February 27, 2026

Day 20. Finse to Kjeldebu. 28 km. 7 hours. 480m up. 640 m down. Breakfast was even more of a bun fight at Finsehyttya as there were so many people staying. However the hosts had perfected the system and there were two streams. It started at 0730 and by 0900 we had eaten well, made our sandwiches for the day and packed. We then said goodbye to the witty Wilhelm who had been great company for the last 5 days. I also said goodbye to Cat Burford, the Molar Explorer. When we set off there was a slight wind and it was overcast, but the forecast was great for the day. As we headed south and skied over Finsevatnet lake to the south there were many groups of people heading off on small expeditions and day trips. Finse was a busy place and there was quite a vibe here but it was also a little noisy and even stressful. The further we skied from the lodge, hotel and railway station the quieter it got until in the end it was in the past.

79. Heading south across Finsevatnet lake in the early morning as the cloud was starting to dissapate

We skied across the lake and then started up the shallow slopes to the south. The cloud was breaking up and there were more and more bright patches across the surface of the snow. To the SW the lofty icecap of Hardangerjokull was emerging from the mists shrouding it. Hardangerjokull was an ice cap, perhaps 15 kilometres in diameter, which sat on a plinth on mountains whose steep ramparts rose out of the Hardangervidda plain. Here and there there were some chinks in the ramparts and down these flowed glaciers from the ice cap above. It was a tremendous sight which was slowly being revealed. By the time we climbed up to the top of the shallow pass by Brattefonnvatnet the whole ice cap was clear and the sky was almost pure blue.

80. Looking up to the plinth on which the large Hardangerjokull ice cap sits covering the entire 15 km diameter plateau on top.

The trouble was as the temperature was rising the surface of the snow was getting less predictable and a few times when we went off the main trail, formed by hundreds of skiers, the frozen surface collapsed and our skis cut through to the sugar snow underneath. It was fine here but I thought the descent down the south side of Helvetes nutane would be too erratic for an easy ski down. We considered the options and decided to give this more adventurous route a miss and continue down to Finnsbergvatnet lake and then head west from here. It was two cautious easy sides of a triangle rather than an adventurous, exciting but potentially difficult one side of the triangle.

81. Having decided not to go over Helvetes Nutane we detoured round them and continued down the valley and across Midnutvatnet lake shown here.

As we continued down the valley it got warmer and warmer with the sun fierce in the clear sky. I stopped to put sunblock on my lips and nose. There were groups of Norwegians sitting everywhere having their lunch on rocks here and there. We passed one group and I heard someone shout “James?”. It was a blonde lady on a rock with 3 others and they were surrounded by 4 pulks. I skied over and suddenly realized it was Hannah McKeand. When I said yesterday that Louis Rudd was arguably the UK’s most prominent polar explorer, I had completely forgotten about Hannah, probably on account that she now lives in the States. Hannah is a prolific polar guide and trainer and has been some 6 times to the south pole and plenty of guiding in the Arctic also. She is the polar queen with a huge character to match it. She is very well known and highly respected. It was again such a coincidence to meet her here. We chatted for a good 15 minutes, mostly with Hannah holding court with great stories and insights.

82. After meeting Hannah McKeand we dropped down to Finnsbergvatnet lake where there was a junction with a route to Kraekkjahytta lodge and another to Kjeldebu cabins.

After Hannah we continued down to Finnsbergvatnet and stopped there for lunch. It was very hot in the intense sun and we could just sit there in our shirts without gloves on. After our lunch we continued west down the lake passing a narrow point on the lake where two peninsulas protruded in on opposite sides. Throughout the millennia this has been a place where Stone Age Norwegians have been trapping reindeer and spearing them as they tried to swim across the lake between the peninsulas. There are archaeological finds here going back some 8000 years.

83. After the last climb there was an exciting run down the final slope to Kjeldedalen valley and Kjeldebu cabin.

We passed the narrows and then continued west, and then south down the valley following a line of lakes. It was such an easy ski with great snow on firm tracks. There had been many skiers down here in the last week but only one today and he seemed to have a pulk. We passed the place where the unmarked route from Helvetes nutane came down from the mountains to join the marked track we were on. In all it was about 9-10 kilometres down this valley and due to all the downhill sections it took less than 2 hours. There was a last trick in the trail as we had to climb 100 vertical metres up and over a spur to reach the valley to the south called Kjeldedalen. It was an immensely hot climb and I could feel my head beginning to burn in the intense sun. From the top of this spurt there was a fantastic run down the south side of the valley side into the valley. In places it was quite steep but it was possible to snowplough down the wider solid track left by all the skiers. We occasionally zig-zagged into the virgin snow on each side of the track but it could be fraught as the icy surface frequently crumbled and you sank down to your shins and fell forwards. At the bottom of the slope the 4 cabins of Kjeldebu came into view just a few hundred metres away.

84. The cluster of cabins at Kjeldebu. The nearest is the toilet and wood shed. On the left are the provisions and on the right the one we stayed in without booked beds.

There were two main cabins and we went into one along with 2 Norwegians and 3 English who came down the slope with us. However it seemed many beds in this cabin were booked and we might be turfed out of our beds if the people turned up. Rather than risk it we all moved into the other cabin which did not have any bookable beds. In the end there were 9 of us in the cabin and it got very warm with the fire on. After dinner I wrote the blog while Stuart chatted with a few of the other guests until suddenly it was 2200 and time for bed. It had been a great day with the best skiing and best weather of the whole trip so far.

85. A superb sunset to end a perfect day at Kjeldebu cabin. Here looking SW across the flat Hardangervidda.

Day 21. Kjeldebu to Sandhaug. 31 km. 7 hours. 630m up. 430 m down. The 8 of us in the self service cabin had a quiet night and everyone was up for breakfast by 0700. We had porridge, fruit salad, chocolate pudding and coffee which we needed to set us up for the 31 km day. It sounded a lot but it was an easy 31 km. After doing some hut chores like refilling the water buckets with snow and sweeping the floor we were ready to go at 0900. The tremendous weather of yesterday was now a distant memory and outside it was overcast but windstill. There was little definition to the snow and the Hardangerjokull icecap was lost in the low cloud.

We left the cabin and started to climb SE out of Kjeldedalen valley. It was not a steep climb but it was quite sustained and it took the best part of an hour to reach the plateau where we headed south. There was a bitter wind but the temperatures were near zero. On the plateau there was an easy 5-6 kilometre undulating ski south towards Dyranut and the main road. Apart from the large cornice clad knoll of Dyranutane itself the area was very flat and many kiters had driven up and were flying across the plain with their huge kites dragging them. Occasionally they accelerated to go at about 30-40 kilometres an hour and some put it in large jumps. It looked like an exhilarating sport. All the kiters wore helmets. We rounded the knoll and then started the small descent to the tiny hamlet of Dyranut which just consisted of two tourist huts. One was closed and the other did not look inviting. We decided to skip a visit and instead carry on south and find somewhere to stop in the shallow valley we were just about to ski into.

86. Approaching Dyranut after the climb up from Kjeldebu with the vast flat plain of HArdangervidda before us.

We left the tourist lodges, skied across the small Vetle Skiftessjøen lake and started the long gentle descent into Bjoreidalen valley. The descent was shallow and long at nearly 3 km. On the way down the snow was very thin and in many places the willow bushes poked through. Snow scooters had driven this way and battered a path through the vegetation which was covered with a smattering of sugar snow as we dropped down to 1000 metres. The descent was relatively quick and at the bottom we intended to have a snack and a drink. However  there was a police and department of nature scooter here making sure the frequent scooter drivers to and from the private cabins on Hardangervidda around here. There are strict rules for scooter drivers and heavy fines for any breaches. Despite this there is a gradual proliferation of snow scooters as more and more of the private cabins are allowed to use them for maintenance and transport of goods. We stopped and chatted to the police for a good 10 minutes before finding somewhere for a break. After the break we started the long shallow climb up Bjoreidalen to the south.

87. Skiing up the very shallow valley of Bjoreidalen as we head from Dyranut to Sandhaug.

The climb was about 6-7 kilometres but it was gentle. The sun frequently broke through the veil of clouds and it warmed us despite the bitter wind. I was quite slow and Stuart forged ahead. I told him we could stop at Langavatnet lake in about 10 km. He surged up the valley skiing well with a good glide while I caught up with some older Norwegians and chatted with them. It was a pleasant easy stroll up the slope for a good hour until we reached the very rounded top of the ridge at Gunnarshaug. Here I left the Norwegians and took long easy strides down the very shallow incline until the smattering of cabins appeared at Hellehalsen and I could see Stuart at the outflow of Langavatnet lake, crouched down beside some upturned dinghies, lashed down with rope and covered in snow.

There was only some 9 km to go now. We both set off at the same time and found the going easy. There was a gentle uphill ski of some 6 km where we just gained 100 metres in all. The slope was so shallow you could ski up most of it and still get a glide. There were many kiters here with most of them dragging a smaller pulk. I guess they were practicing for a longer trip in Norway or even Greenland. I have frequently come across them in cabins on Hardandervidda which is the ideal place for them to play. The sun was shining across large areas of the hillside, especially on the other side of the large Nordmannslågen lake in a slightly hillier country where we would be going tomorrow. After at least one and a half hours of climbing we reached the barely perceptible crest of the ridge and then started down the shallow slope on the other side. Hardangervidda is termed a Peneplain in geography where a previously undulating and lumpy  plateau has been planed flat by recently vanished ice sheets. We smelt the wood smoke from the stove at Sandhaug Lodge and then soon afterwards it came into view just a few hundred metres away on the edge of the vast Nordmannslågen lake.

88. Approaching the large lodge of Sandhaug in the middle of Hardangervidda. The self service cabin in closed when the lodge is open. Beyond the lodge is the large Nordmannslågen lake.

The lodge was open and the small self service cabin I usually stay at when the lodge is closed was locked and out of use. We checked into the lodge and got a bed each in a 24 bed dormitory. There was only one other person in the dormitory at the moment and it was not likely to get busier while the smaller rooms were. We emptied out rucksacks near our beds, hung up our damp clothes and then Stuart had a shower while I wrote the blog, finishing just before dinner at 1900. The lodge was quite busy with at least 40 people staying and there seemed to be a few larger groups of Norwegians. Usually they are in the minority but certainly not tonight.

The meal was not impressive and well below the usual standard. They could take a leaf out of Fondsbu or Iungsdalhytta’s book. It had all the panache of army catering. After the meal I went and chatted with 3 clever and witty Dutchmen who were all around 60. They were kiters and had come from Dyranut. Indeed we had passed them en route as they played in the wind a few kilometres before the hut. Like most Dutch they were great conversationalists and very informed.

Day 22. Sandhaug to Litlos. 24 km. 6.5 hours. 490m up. 540 m down. We had a great breakfast in the morning, Sandhaug had redeemed itself from the poor dinner with a sumptuous spread, including waffles and scrambled eggs. After that we lingered a little in the morning chatting to the 3 Dutch kiters, who were also sharing our dormitory. In the end we did not leave until 0930. The weather was much better than the forecast with large bright patches and a SW force 4 wind. It was also about minus 5 so all the damp snow from yesterday was now frozen solid and the surface was very hard. Had we been going in the opposite direction we would have been blown along on the flat. However we were going to have to battle into it. We skied down to the large Nordmannslågen lake where the Dutch were just setting up and the policeman from yesterday came by on a scooter with a wave.

89. Skiing across Nordmannslågen lake towards Besso Turisthytta lodge on the way to Litlos lodge

We now headed west into the wind with our skis clattering on the frozen surface. It was hard to ski where there were ski or scooter tracks and we both found it easier to make our own tracks beside them on the virgin snow. After crossing the lake due west we crossed a barely perceptible rise of frozen marshes and very shallow ridges until we were south of Besso Turisthytte, which I think is only open in the summer. We then made our way SW in the bitter wind to the small Bessevatnet lake. The sticks and marked route carried on from here but I remember taking this way previously and it involved a lot of unnecessary up and down as it followed the summer route. In these icy conditions it would have been hard work climbing with slippery skis and descending on the fast surface with little control. Instead we decided to go a way I have been a few times previously which was up the gorge like Dimmedalen valley. It was a narrow cleft in the rounded hills and was a good kilometre long. It would take us to a series of lakes we could follow including Bismarvatnet. It would be much easier.

90. The narrow cleft in the undulating plateau of Dimmedalen provided a 2 km shortcut to Bismarvatnet lake.

So we left the sticks and headed up Dimmedalen valley. It was small and narrow with a stream, sometimes open running along the floor of the U shaped gorge. It was a lovely and interesting ski but occasionally there would be some potential from avalanches after a good storm when overhanging cornices might collapse. That, and the 4-5 sections of open stream which needed negotiating, were probably the reason DNT doesn’t mark this route. Today however it was safe. We skied up the floor of the valley and had to climb around 2 areas of open stream and saw another 2-4. However it was easy and with half an hour we had reached Dimmedalstørnet tarn. We carried on over the tarn, crossed a tiny saddle and then more west to reach the larger Bismarvatnet lake. We followed the hard frozen surface to this lake for 3 km until the west end. To my surprise the winter route had been changed and now also came over a low saddle and onto this lake. So half way down Bismarvatnet lake we merged with the sticks. We followed them to the west end and then climbed slightly to Engelstjørn tarn, which was off course frozen over.

91. Skiing up the narrow U shaped valley floor in Dimmedalen we had to skirt a few areas of open water.

We had gone half way now and it seemed a good place to stop for lunch. Two bearded Norwegians from Narvik whom we had overtaken on our easier, more level detour joined us just as we were leaving. The bright sunny patches of the morning were now being replaced by a dull flat light as the forecast weather moved in. The surface was now dull and low clouds were starting to cover the mountain tops. Hårteigen, a familiar nunatak on the plateau, was easily visible as we started to climb the 3 km long gentle slope from our lunch stop at Engelstjørn tarn to a small pass just south of Flautenuten. On the way up this slope we passed the footprints of a large herd of reindeer who were going backwards and forwards. There were perhaps 100 animals. However previously I have seen a herd of about 500 animals here. It is probably the same here which got struck by lightning some 5 years ago and which left 165 dead.

92. Skiing acroas Bismarvatnet lake with the weather slowly starting to close it before the blizzard arrived.

At the top there was a quite easy run down a shallow valley. It was almost like a very gentle version of the Cresta Run. The wind was now up to a force 6 and it helped brake us as we went down the ice surface. We whizzed down to Ambjørnsvatnet lake and crossed it. Ahead I saw a group all pulling pulks. I guessed it was a Ousland Explorers group as I know they went this way about now and wondered if I knew the guide. We soon caught them up and it was indeed an Ousland Explorers group. The guide was Angus, from Dorset, whom I had not heard of before. We chatted for a good 15 minutes as we climbed up the shallow slope to the pass on the east side of Holken. However as we chatted the weather started to turn for the worse and suddenly we were engulfed by a force 8 wind and increasing snowfall. Angus had to attend to his group of 6 who were suddenly struggling in the onslaught.

We carried on up in intensifying weather and I am sure the wind had increased to Force 11 near the top with an insane amount of snow and spindrift. It was nearly impossible to ski forwards and even at the level saddle of the pass I had to herring bone forwards and Stuart even more so as he struggled to stay on his feet. It was an absolute mayhem and nearly impossible to see as the glasses were covered in snow. If you took the glasses off your eyeballs were peppered with snow like shot from a cartridge and it stung. I was very thankful for the sticks and it gave me some reference to the whiteout. At times I could not see the next stick and just clawed my way forwards leaning heavily into the wind until the stick appeared. The descent was full of difficulties and we crept from one stick to the next for a good kilometre. The sticks are about 30 metres apart so it took well over 30 sticks to reach Litlos cabin. It was one of the most intensive snow storms I can remember being in and we were both a bit shocked and in awe of its ferocity. When the lodge appeared it was a welcome relief.

93. The self service cabin at Litlos during a lull in the blizzard. At the height of the gale the cabin was barely visible from 75 metres away.

The main lodge opened in two days time for the Easter season. However there was a staff member, Bridget, warming the place up. The self-service cabin was open but there was already a group of 10 Norwegians staying there and they commandeered the whole small cabin for 2 nights. We could have pushed our way in and slept on the sofa in the main room but they told us the lodge was accepting guests just to stay and we could stay in the lodge and return to the cabin to cook. We met Bridget at the lodge and she was incredibly helpful and cheerful and showed us a room we could sleep in. The drying room was already warm so we unpacked in there and then Stuart brought a chair in and read his book while I found a table in the empty lodge and wrote the blog until 1930 when we went over to the cabin to cook and meet the Norwegians.

There were 10 beds in the self service cabin in 3 bedrooms. All were taken by students and teachers from Sogndals Folkehøgskole, an alternative school to a university or technical college where students study sports or more artisanal trades like traditional boat building. In this case they were studying outdoor sports. They had tried to go up Hårtiegen today but the instructor decided to turn back when he saw the weather coming in. There was also an older German couple there who were sleeping in the main room. The whole place was too busy although the students were very chatty and friendly. We ate our dehydrated meal and a tin of peaches and then withdrew across the 50 metres of blizzard back to our room in the main lodge which had better facilities and was quiet.

Day 23. Litlos to Hellevassbu. 19 km. 5.5 hours. 440m up. 470 m down. It was wild in the night and I heard the wind roaring as it buffeted the lodge. I spared a thought for Angus and his team of clients on the Ousland Explorers trip who were crossing Hardangervidda using tents rather than staying in cabins and lodges. After such a trip one would be ready for a crossing of Greenland or Spitsbergen and many used it as training for such a trip. In the morning we went back to the self service cabin to cook breakfast of porridge and peaches. It was a little chaotic in the cabin with the 8 youth and the 2 instructors and they had taken over the whole place. However we muscled into a corner of the single table as they went to pack. Some of them seemed just 16 years old and it was admirable they were on such a trip. I spoke to one of the instructors, Jacob, who himself only seemed in his early 20’s but remarkably strong and capable. As we ate the sun appeared and the wind seemed to diminish.

94. Leaving Litlos lodge for Hellevassbu cabin on a glorious morning after the gale. The small self seevice cabin is ob the left and everything else is the lodge.

By the time we were ready to go it was very bright with virtually the whole landscape bathed in sunshine despite large areas of cloud. However the wind was strong, up to a force 7, and there was a sea of spindrift flowing across the surface. The team of youths from Sogndal had already gone and we followed in their footsteps. However it did us little good as they were filled in nearly as soon as they stepped out of them such was the quantity of spindrift. Luckily it all stayed below waist height so our vision was not impeded. As we glided across first Litlosvatnet, and then Kvennsjøen, lakes we caught the youth up and I chatted again to Jacob. I thought what they were doing was great. They even intended to camp that night. It was such a far cry from what 99.9% of the rest of today’s youth were doing. The ski across the lakes was a delight and there was a great glide in the new snow which was not too deep and evenly spaced.

95. Skiing across Kvennsjøen lake and looking west towards the mountains between Hardangervidda plateau and Sørfjorden, an arm of the sea which penetrates deep into the mountains.

At the south end of the lakes were caught the two Norwegians from Narvik whom we met in Sandhaug. They had pulks with their “Arctic Bedding” bags poorly strapped on so they dragged on the snow. Here we all started to climb together up about 100 metres of vertical ascent straight up the steep valley side. The athletic Jacob stormed up with two pulks and then at the top descended the slope doing graceful telemark turns to go and help more of his clients. I am sure he will end up on polar expeditions. Most of the youth managed fine but the Norwegians had problems with their pulks blowing over and had to walk the icier sections. It was a good half hour climb and it was quite strenuous, especially where it was icy and polished by the wind. We tried to stay in the areas where the spindrift was lying as it offered more grip to our ski skins.

96. The lively youth from Sogndals Folkehøgskole ourdoor education programme skiing across Kvennsjøen lake towards a campsite near Hellevassbu cabin.

At the top of the climb we reached a wide shelf above Kvennsjøen lake to the north and the higher mountains to the south. As we headed east on this undulating shelf the wind was at our backs and we flew along with the sun in our face. Huge amounts of spindrift were blowing off the ridges which came down from the small mountains and it looked like there was thick smoke in places. Cornices were forming all along the lee sides and frequently became so big they collapsed and then another would form above the debris of snow blocks below. After a pleasant hour we crossed the most westerly of the two Tuevatni Lakes and found a sheltered spot on the shallow ridge connecting the two where we could stop and have a snack. The two Narvik Norwegians passed us and chose to stop a little further in a bit of a wind tunnel on the lake.

97. Skiing along the high wide shelf towards the Tuevotni lakes above Kvennsjøen lake on the left and the small range of mountains to the south (right).

After our snack we continued across the easterly Tuevatni lake and up a shallow small valley to the pass. I had come this way on my Norge På Langs trip and remember getting into a terrible navigational muddle here some 16 years ago using map and compass in the mist as it was before GPS navigation was readily available. It is so much more precise and easier with GPS today but I always carry a map and compass in case of a gadget failure.

98. Despite the wind we managed to find a sheltered spot on the ridge between the Tuevotni lakes to have the usual snack of Bixit biscuits.

The descent down the south side of this small pass was great fun. The snow was either icy and very fast or settled spindrift lying on the ice in patches. It was easy to see the difference between the two in this light and you could accelerate across the ice and slow down in the powder at will across the hillside. It only took some 20 minutes to descend the entire 3 km to reach the Bjørno valley at the head of the Ovsta Bjørnavatnet lake and all of it was fun. It made such a difference with good visibility and sun illuminating all the nuances of the snow. Had it been flat light or even a snow storm this descent would have been much harder and we would have been much more cautious.

99. Skiing up from Bjørnadalen towards the saddle between the hills of Sandvikenuten and Buanuten with the sun reflecting off the wind polished ice.

Once in Bjørna valley we continued SW up to a pass between the craggy Buanuten and Sandvikenuten. The sun beat down on the white polished domes on these hills and shone as if covered in mirrors. Yet there were streams of spindrift flying off the cornices like a giant Himalayan mountain. With the bright sun and the constant flow of spindrift towards me it reminded me of Antarctica. Occasionally there were steeper bits to the climb but generally it was easy and we reached the second pass of the day after some 45 minutes of climbing.

The descent down the other side was again great fun. We could traverse the icy hillside with the strong wind keeping us from accelerating down out of control.  Eventually the descending traverse ended and it was more steeply straight down to the cabin which had just appeared less than a kilometre away. Again all we had to do to manage the descent comfortably was to go from a patch of softer snow to a patch of softer snow. It slowed our descent and meant we could turn at will. Most of the softer snow was on the lee of the ridge we were coming down the crest of.  So if we strayed onto the icier windward side and shot off down the slope we knew we could just veer left or east onto the lee side and slow down in a drift.

100. The descent from the final saddle of the day down to Hellevassbu cabin (centre right) was an easy downhill ski.

Just as we neared the cabin we caught up with the team from Ousland Explorers. They were in good spirits after their nights out and were not stopping at the hut but going on for another hour or two. It must have been very tempting for them to be seduced by the fleshpots in the cabin and the smell of birchwood smoke, but they resisted. We on the other hand relished it and were soon taking our boots off and putting slippers on on the dry varnished floor. There were already three others in the cabin: a very, gentle, nice older Norwegian, called Espen, who had just retired as a psychiatric nurse, and two other Norwegians on inappropriate racing skis who got lost on the way here from Haukeliseter and found the icy surfaces extremely difficult. We took a 4 man room in the immaculate cabin which was extremely well maintained and I wrote before dinner while Stuart read more of his book in the cosy warm comfortable dining room. The weather closed in as the late afternoon unfolded and the sky clouded over and joy went from the landscape, however the wind dropped off. The rumour was it would pick up later and tomorrow would be a difficult day weatherwise. That evening we had mashed potatoes and bacalao again. Probably for the last time this trip as we hope to finish tomorrow at Haukeliseter.

Day 24. Hellevassbu Rest and Weather Day. 0 km. 0 hours. 0m up. 0 m down. Stuart and myself were up early at 0600 to make the final push to Haukeliseter some 25 kilometres away. We could hear the wind whistling and roaring outside the cabin but both ignored it as we ate breakfast and packed up. Stuart had to go outside to the wood and toilet shed and came back 10 minutes later. He was covered in spindrift and unusually quiet and pensive. I followed soon after. Getting to the wood shed was quite spectacular with the wind at my back but the return to the main cabin with its 20 metres into the strong gale in blizzard conditions was more than spectacular. It was a maelstrom of ice crystals and snow rushing headlong into my face like being pelted with a firehose of frozen water. When I returned we both agreed simultaneously that it would be foolhardy and unpleasant to set off for Haukeliseter in these conditions – especially as the forecast was for it to get slightly worse. We still had a spare day and this seemed the perfect opportunity to cash it in. Espen was also up and he was in no doubt he was staying put. The other two Norwegians from Drøbak were full of bluster about how they were going to go to Litlos but it was slowly emerging they were quite incompetent and clueless.

101. We had to spend a day at Hellevassbu cabin as there was a blizzard outside making skiing quite difficult.

Once we made the decision to stay it was easy to settle down for a restful day of reading, eating, keeping the stove going and melting water. The Drøbak Duo kept looking out of the window and making plans to go to Litlos but Espen was determined to stop them. It later emerged on the way to Hellevassbu 2 days ago they had misread the GPS gadget and got lost. After some 12 hours, with darkness approaching, they pressed the SOS button on the GPS gadget. This sent a SOS signal to Garmin in the USA who in turn contacted the search and rescue authorities in Stavanger in Norway. Stavanger search and rescue dispatched a Sea King helicopter to find them. However at the same time they finally figured out where they were and skied the last 2 km to the Hellevassbu cabin. At the cabin they asked for help from 2 Polish skiers as to how to cancel the SOS as it was beyond them. As the Poles were sending the signal the whole cabin started to shudder and vibrate as the Sea King hovered overhead. However when they received the request to cancel the rescue the helicopter flew off back to Stavanger leaving the Drøbak Duo still at the cabin. The whole thing was a farce. Unembarrassed by their escapade they were now contemplating skiing in a blizzard to Litlos on their inappropriate skis without metal edges, in inappropriate footwear, which were like sports training shoes, without a spade or windsack or emergency shelter.

During the mid morning the 8 youth and the 2 instructors arrived after having spent the night in a tent. They were wet as the temperature had risen and the snow was now falling as sleet. However they were cheerful and the teachers were well organized and experienced. We quickly helped unpack their pulks and moved all their bags upstairs into the two dormitories. We then put on the two other stoves and collected 5 full buckets of water by heating the stainless buckets on the stove and then taking them outside to fill with snow which melted at once allowing the bucket to fill with water after 5-7 shovelfuls of snow. This Sogndals Folkehøgskole team soon settled down and became the main centre of conversation. The instructors found a quiz book and soon we were all involved except the Drøbak Duo who had given up stressing and returned to their room for a siesta.

In the evening the instructors and Espen tried to persuade the Drøbak duo to return with us to Haukeliseter tomorrow morning, but they were having none of it. Tomorrow they naively thought were going to ski to Litlos for lunch and then on to Sandhaug for the night. Stuart and myself kept out of it but it was painfully obvious the Drøbak duo were out of their depth but too stubborn to admit it. Norwegians are very practical, cautious and humble but not these two. Stuart and myself went to bed just after dinner, which was the leftovers from the Sogndal team. It was their self made dehydrated chili con carne and it was delicious. Making it on a dehydrator at the school was all part of their outdoor education course. We set the alarm for 0400.

Day 25. Hellevassbu to Haukeliseter. 25 km. 6.5 hours. 490m up. 680 m down. The wind did not abate in the evening but by the time the alarm went at 0400 it seemed a strong breeze, but there was still spindrift flying off the edges of the drifts outside in the torchlight. However I could also see that there were a few stars so the sky was at least partially clear. It was essential we had an early start as I wanted to catch the 1315 bus from Haukeliseter to Oslo and we had to ski 25 km to get there. As we were having breakfast the Drøbak duo got up and started spouting how they were going to ski 45 km that day. I was finding them quite irritating and ignored them. We had our breakfast and were packed and ready to go at 0500. It was still dark but the next 2 km were either flat or up and by then the first light would have arrived. As we set off a snow flurry arrived and there was a mesmerizing stream of snowflakes flashing sideways across the beam of the headlights. It was short lived and passed soon and with it the last wind of what must have been a squall.

102. Leaving Helkevassbu cabin at 0500 in the morning with headtorches to ski the 25 km to Haukeliseter before rhe bus at 1315 hrs.

We reached the bottom of the climb after a kilometre and started up. All the hard icy frozen surface of the snow from 2 days ago was now submerged under a layer of compacted spindrift which was firm and easy to ski across. It offered a great glide and even on the steeper climb gave enough grip so we hardly had to zig-zag at all. By the time we reached the top of the slope it was approaching 0600 and dawn had broken and we could turn the torches off. It was mostly overcast but there were enough areas of blue sky to let the sun shine onto a few of the higher slopes and bathe them in a golden orange light. It was all going well.

It got even better when we passed the watershed at Skudskar at Simletind mountain and started to ski down the upper reaches of Borddalen. The snow was beautifully firm and it offered a fantastic glide. With each stride we flew forwards down the very shallow incline from one frozen lake to the next. The kilometres were starting to pass quickly and we soared past the small locked cabin at Kuntsbu on Midnutsvatnet lake. At the far end of the lake we spotted the red tent of the Narvik Norwegians and saw they were already up. We skied over to them for a chat and to find out how yesterday had gone. The first thing they said was what were the “crazy guys in the cabin doing”. We told them they were going to ski to Sandhaug 45 km away and they laughed. They said yesterday they had gone about 6 km but it was just too difficult to see so they stopped and put the tent up at the height of the blizzard. The reason they found it difficult, and indeed why the Drøbak duo got lost was because this section of the skiing route was not marked at all. Out of the entire 25 km only the first 3 km and last 3 km were marked. This was due to a dispute with a difficult landowner and the DNT. Without the twigs in the snow in a whiteout and blizzard all visual references disappear and it is like scuba diving in milk. After an all too short chat we carried on. It was a shame our paths did not cross more with the Norwegians from Narvik as they were fun and lively guys.

103. Crossing Årmotsvatnet lake after skiing 12 km in the early morning en route to Haukeliseter.

Pretty soon we reached Åmotsvatnet lake and skied down the lake to the small locked hydropower cabin at the south end by the small dam. By now the sky was opening up even more and there were large areas of blue sky and the mountains on each side were all visible. There was hardly any wind at all – in total contrast to yesterday. We passed the cabin and then skied down the narrower valley which was plastered in deep drifts for another couple of easy kilometres until we reached the start of the last climb. We had been skiing for a little under 3 hours and had already done 14 km. As it was not yet 0900 and we now had good time, we stopped here for a snack and drink for a few minutes in the cold, under a still low-angled sun.

104. Stuart about to reach the saddle to the west of Vesle Nup where we had to negotiate through a section of large drifts and cornices to reach the actual saddle.

I had to change my ski skins here to wider nylon ones which would afford me a better grip for the near 300 meter climb to the last saddle just to the west of Vesle Nup. The new skins were perfect and I managed to keep up with Stuart who was at a slight disadvantage with his narrower skins offering less traction. He had to zig-zag more while I could go straight up the slope. We passed to the south of Mannevatnet Lake and then traversed up the slope to the saddle itself which was covered in huge drifts and cornices as it was on the lee side of the prevailing winds and also yesterday’s blizzard. It was in these drifts that the Sogndals Folkehøgskule team intended to snowhole tonight before finishing tomorrow. Stuart and myself were very impressed by their ethos. We skirted the drifts and cornices and then found ourselves skiing up the final slope to the saddle itself. From here we could see the way down the otherside all the way to Slåvatn Lake which was our final destination some 400 metres below us. The descent was not marked by sticks and quite how the team from Ousland Explorers made it down here yesterday with the gales force winds, white out and snow driving into their face I don’t know. It must have been a very difficult descent and Angus very skilled with an intuitive knowledge to lead them down. For us now it was a delight as there was a very shallow ravine with softer deep snow on the west flank and floor of the ravine. We could simply come down in a series of turns in the easy, predictable, forgiving snow. It only took half an hour for us to make it. The “Heroes of Telemark” namely Terje, Anders and Erik from 2 weeks ago in Breheimen would have done it in 5 minutes through such was their skiing prowess. At the bottom by Loftsdokktjønn tarn the terrain became a bit more tricky with many small knolls most of which had small cornices on them. Again this would have been immensely difficult for Angus and his team yesterday.

105. Looking south from the saddle to the west of Vesle Nup and down the 400 metres of near continious vertical descent ro the larger lake of Sjåvatnet, just visibke on the far right.

When we reached the tarn the sticks reappeared in the snow as there was a marked circular route from Hauleliseter up here. Rather than go the usual way to the south which led to an impossibly steep descent we decided to go to the west over a nearly imperceptible saddle, called Ulveåskaret, and then down a wonderful fun descent for 2 km until we reached the main road. It was the first time I have made this descent as opposed to about 3 times the other way and this is by far the preferable. We crossed the main road and skied the last remaining metres to Gråvatn Lake which was bathed in sunshine and nearly windstill. We had now still 2 hours before the bus went and just 3 km to ski across the problem-free lake to reach Haukeliseter. It was a pleasant ski, almost a stroll, and we soon rounded a spur and there just a few hundred metres away was Haukeliseter with its beautiful old buildings on the edge of the frozen lake. The most impressive of these buildings was the old Nansenstue where polar explorers from the early romantic age over 100 years ago used to come and stay before heading out across Hardangervidda for polar training. We arrived and congratulated each other on what had been a great and memorable trip despite the poor conditions caused by 3 weeks of unseasonably warm weather. I would say on average it was at least 10 degrees warmer than it should have been.

106. A final cup of tea before the long and fun descent to Sjåvatnet Lake and the final ski along this lake to Haukeliseter lodge.

We had an hour to go into the lodge’s bathrooms, clean ourselves up a bit, and put on less dirty clothes for the bus ride. Angus came down to meet us as we changed and told us about the difficulty they faced yesterday. We were in awe of his skills and I must take my hat off to them for seeing it through. The bus came at 1315 and both Angus’s team and Stuart and myself got on. I was nervous the bus would be full but it was still not quite the Easter rush so there were many seats available.

107. After skiing 423 km over the last 25 days we finally reach Haukeliseter lodge and the bus to Oslo. This is the Nansenstue at Haukeliseter where the earliest polar explorers stayed over 100 years ago.

Some 4 hours later we got off at Hovik and were met by Roland, a friend from the past 10 years. He drove us to Hartmut’s near Sandvika, a friend for the last 43 years. Hartmut is an exceptional cook and there was a large and delicious curry waiting for us after a quick shower. It was a great welcome back into the world away from the winter wonderland we had immersed ourselves into for the last three and a half weeks.

 

Total Statistics. 25 Days (1 March 2026  –  25 March 2026). 423 km. 131 skiing hours. 10730m ascent 10750m descent.

 

Back

February 27, 2026

Day 13. Tyinkrysset to Sulebu. 10 km. 4 hours. 660m up. 180 m down. The small apartment had everything we needed, including a washing machine to clean nearly 2 weeks worth of grime. It was a great rest and a superb location beside the supermarket. I also managed to catch up with all my writing late in the previous evening. We had a short day today so we lingered a bit before setting off well after 1000. It was windstill in the valley but the forecast snow had already started to drift down in small flakes. Right beside the apartment was a ski poma to drag people up the piste. It was not operating and the line of the poma was a perfect way to access the mountains above. We skinned up the slope which was quite steep in places, where we had to herringbone. After just 30 minutes we had climbed nearly 250 metres to the end and were now above the trees on the hillside. I had come up just in a shirt, working hard, but now we needed to stop and put on more clothes as the snow was falling heavily and the wind was getting up. As expected the visibility was terrible and the light was very flat, meaning there was no definition to the snow at all, but it was not quite a white out.

50. After leaving the top of the piste in Tyinkrysset we skied 2.5km in poor visibility to Tenlefjordenhytta cabin.

It seemed there was a prepared track which was also marked by bamboo poles leading south from the top of the poma to a small tarn called Vesletjørnet and then further south to a larger lake called Tenlefjorden, where there was a small leisure cabin. We followed the bamboo which led up to the cabin climbing gradually all the time. The wind was certainly picking up now and it was already a force 5. Mist, snow and spindrift made every step a step into the unknown as apart from the bamboo 30 metres apart there was no reference point on the ground. Some 2.5 km from the top of the ski poma we reached Tenlefjordhytta. It was plastered in spindrift and looked grey against the featureless background.

Here the marked route veered right, which was counter intuitive to both of us and we checked the maps. However it seemed it was correct and there was even a signpost saying “Sulebu 6 km”. As we went across the undulating knolls on the north side of Tenlefjorden the weather got even worse with strong winds driving the snow into our faces. Stuart had a good glide on his skis but mine were totally balled up with ice and compacted snow. All I could do was shuffle forwards as if on sandpaper. These ski skins were great for climbing, but not gliding and I had to stop and change. Just then a maelstrom of vicious weather hit with storm force winds and huge amounts of spindrift and snow. I had to change skins but was also wary about losing a glove or even a skin in the total whiteout. I managed to do it but my hands were getting cold. Once on the new skins the glide was perfect and I soon caught Stuart up, who was standing with his back to the wind waiting for me. The maelstrom died down as quickly as it started and soon it was just a gale again.

51. Stuart heading up to Sulebu cabin on the marked trail in a rare period of better conditions.

To my great surprise it seemed we were on groomed cross country skiing tracks again, and had been for much of the day. There must be a network of groomed tracks up here. They were largely buried under new snow but occasionally they reappeared. It looked like they were going all the way up to the Sulebu cabin. We followed them as the snow showers came and went climbing in dreadful visibility beside the bamboo poles on the south east side of Gamlestogo Fjellet hill. It made for a relatively easy climb despite the conditions and with the bamboo poles every 30 metres or so you could read the lie of the land in what otherwise would have been a white out. On and on the route climbed with the sun trying to break through on occasion to no avail. Near the top we reached a gentle corner and there just 6-700 metres in front of us were the 3 huts of Sulebu.

However before we could get there another violent squall hit and it was very spectacular. I was being buffeted about but that was irrelevant compared to the huge amount of spindrift and new snow that was lashing me. It was impossible to see anything, not even the next bamboo say 10 metres away, and I just had to carry on with the snow peppering my face hoping I was going in the right direction. Eventually the cabins reappeared out of the maelstrom now just 100 yards away and soon we were there.

52. It was a maelstom of a blizzard with strong winds and heavy snow when we reached Sulebu cabin.

I have stayed here some 5 times since 1984 but could not remember which cabin was which. We checked all 3, and it was the last which was the best. One was just the warden’s store, toilets and wood shed. We immediately made a fire and started to heat the water so we could put snow into the boiled quarter pan and get a full pan of cold water. It was initially cold and miserable in the cabin and 3 degrees but within an hour it was 14 degrees and then after two hours 26 degrees and very cosy. Outside the wind was intense and it whistled round the cabin and sometimes obscured the other two. It was delightful to be in the cabin looking out and seeing the ferocity of the gale. I wrote the blog while Stuart had a siesta in the warm room before he woke to cook dinner from the provisions in the cabin. Tonight it was Spanish Bacalao and mashed potato followed by chocolate pudding. Thereafter we chatted in the fireside seats before going to bed early at 2100 hrs with the gale still raging just outside the well insulated walls.

Day 14. Sulebu to Skarvheim. 22 km. 6 hours. 260m up. 570 m down. The vicious wind from last night dropped through the night and the stars appeared. When the alarm went off in the morning it was a completely different day and in the first light I could see it was clear and cold with a shallow river of spindrift slowly flowing across the snow’s surface. The snow was well defined and every small drift and formation was visible. It had all the making of a good day at last. There was a notice in the cabin saying the usual winter route to Skarvheimen cabin over Suleskardet, about 1500m, was not recommended on account of little snow and there was a marked alternative via Sulevatnet lake that actually suited us better.

53. A DNT cabin breakfast fit for kings and skiers. Porridge with a can of peaches, chocolate pudding and vanila sauce.

54. Virtually the same photo as last night but this time in benign conditions at Sulebu cabin. Suleskardet pass is behind the cabin.

We set off at 0800 after tidying the hut. Initially we skied across wonderful snow. It was hard with a dusting of new snow and spindrift on top. The ski stick tips creaked when twisted in the snow meaning it was a bit like neve. I still had the narrow skins on and they gave me the perfect glide in these near perfect conditions. There was a chilly force 3 wind but it was just enough to keep you cool as we strode out up the slight valley towards Tysketjornet tarn on the east side of the craggy Sulefjellet mountain at 1812 metres. There were many avalanches on this side of the mountain where the snow from the last week had blown over and settled in the lee. Eventually this drift got too big and broke off sliding down the face. The valley was very wide and there was never a chance any would reach us. It was a wonderful ski in full sunlight.

55. Stuart heading across Tysketjornet tarn with Sulefjettet mountain in the back with its avalanche potential.

56. Heading towards Sulevatnet lake in everchanging sun and shade.

At the end of Tskyetjornet we climbed a small rise and then started a superb descent down a gentle bowl to Sulevatnet lake. The snow was sparkling and you could see every ridge and ripple and you could also see the different textures of the surface, like where it was hard and icy and where it was soft and powdery, and react accordingly. This level of visibility made life much easier and it had been missing for nearly a week. With the confidence to see where we were going it was a wonderful descent and we could turn at will and enjoy it. The descent lasted for 10 minutes until we reached the lake itself. We kept to the shore where the twigs marked the route until we reached the dam which we passed on the north side.

57. Stuart beginning the descent to Sulevatnet Lake in great conditions.

From the dam there was a wonderful marginally downhill run for about 3 kilometres. The sun was still out as we strode out with a long forward glide on the leading ski. At last the skiing was excellent and we were really enjoying ourselves. In fact I felt euphoric. We passed a few old cabins which were probably there due to the hydro power but they could also have been some old historic hunting cabins from the local community. It was too high for sheep in the summer who prefer the lusher grasses near the treeline. After 3 km we crossed the frozen river and then climbed south over a watershed for a few kilometres to reach Masseringstjornet under some large cliffs. It was about here at the lake that the morning detour met the original route again. I much preferred the detour and will use it in the future.

58. Happy with the conditions at last and heading towards Masseringstjornet lake where there was a shallow watershed.

It got slightly overcast as we started the main descent from Messeringstjornet down to the main valley of Mørkedalen. In total this descent was perhaps 5 kilometres and it was fantastic. You could just stand on your skis and plan your route down, swinging from bowl to ridge so it was a continual gentle gradient with no up. The snow was easy to read and we had some fun as we glided down. It was exactly what we needed after the last week.  Towards the bottom the gradient slacked off a bit. There were a few skiers coming up and we stopped for a chat with most of them. There was an Easter ambience to the mountains. At the bottom before the road we stopped for a snack and considered our options as I could now get a weather forecast again.

59. Crossing Masseringstjornet lake and about to begin the fantastic long descent into Mørkedalen and the main road.

It seemed like it was about to snow, but tomorrow was good. Previously I crossed the road here and went up barren hillsides and across small tarns to reach Startjornet to gain the trail to Bjordalsbu cabin. In all it was about 14 km and about 5 hours. After yesterday’s white maelstrom when the wind picked up I was reluctant to embark on this unmarked route as route finding would be difficult in a blizzard. I had done it twice before in good weather and it was a great route but in poor weather and visibility it had its hazards. Instead we opted to go to the nearby Skarvheim cabin and then take the marked trail tomorrow. That meant skiing down to the road and then skiing down beside it on the snow banks which snow ploughs had piled up. It took an hour to reach the cabin but the skiing was not that pleasant.

The Skarvheim cabin was beside the road and I had never been here before. I was worried it had a special key but when I got there I was relieved to see it was the traditional DNT key. We let ourselves into the cabin and we were quite shocked by what we saw inside. It was like a house with electricity, a well equipped kitchen, a bathroom with a shower, 3 bedrooms with bunk beds and a wonderful cosy living room with a huge stove and open fire. It even had running water so there was no melting snow. Just after we arrived, so did Eric, a Belgian skier who had just arrived by bus and was spending the next 4-5 days heading to Finse – as we were.  I lit the fire and we settled in. I wrote, Stuart snoozed and Eric looked at his phone. By 1830 we were all active again to cook. That evening we had a stew and mashed potatoes from the provisions larder which was quite bare. Tomorrow we will go up to Bjordalsbu cabin and if the weather is as predicted we might even continue down the other side to Iungsdalshytta lodge. It had been a great day’s skiing – perhaps the best yet.

Day 15. Skarvheim to Bjordalsbu. 13 km. 4 hours. 660m up. 120 m down. Stuart was keen to get up and leave early. He got up even before the alarm went at 0530. I got coffee in bed by way of compensation. On the plus side it was a beautiful cold morning and by the time we were ready to go at 0700 it had been light for the best part of an hour. William, a late arrival last night, and Eric the Belgium were also up and preparing to go. We all left the cabin just after 0700 and headed down the side of the road to Briestølen lodge, which is always closed. The reason for the morning hurry was the weather forecast which predicted a strong gale or even storm from the mid afternoon onwards for 24 hours and we off course wanted to beat it. At Briestølen we could pick up an icy track which took us down to the frozen river and through a gate in a fence. The fence seemed to be erected to contain an animal disease called “Chronic Wasting Disease”. Once through the gate we were onto the mountainside and could follow the twigs poked into the snow.

Initially the path was very icy but as we climbed slowly up the alluvial fan where the river in Stardalen above disgorged centuries of silt and stones the snow got firmer. Soon we climbed the fan and entered a narrow valley which in places was a gorge. I had been up here once before 42 years ago but could barely remember it. It was a snow filled slot in the hillside. There was never an avalanche risk here with the exception of collapsing cornices after stronger winds. The branches stuck into the snow gave us a degree of confidence and you knew there was a route up this slot to the higher plateau above. There were the tracks of many other skiers also from the last week or two. Occasionally it was steep enough to herring bone up the slope but most of the time the ski skins provided enough grip. We climbed continually and efficiently, gaining 100 metres every 20 minutes or so.

60. Heading up the U shaped ravine of Stardalen leading from Briestølen in Mørkedalen and up onto the higher plateau around Statsjøen lake.

Stuart was ahead and I suddenly saw him contending with a dog which was jumping up. There was someone running down the gorge to control him. I soon caught up and saw there were two campers in a tent on a shelf in the gorge and it was their frisky 9 month Samoyed dog who was wanting to play. He saw me and came bounding down the slope and was about to leap up when I brandished a ski stick. When that failed a quick delivery of the stick handle across the snout did the trick and he walked to heel back up the slope. It was a very playful but large dog. The owner was most apologetic and turned out to be an Englishman living in Norway, Tony Parker.

61. Looking south across the plateau around Starsjøen lake. Bjordalsbu cabin is in the distant sunlit mountains.

63. Looking across Starsjøen lake towards the sputh face of Graveggi mountain. Bjordalsbu cabin is the other side of this mountain.

After a long chat we continued up the Stardalen valley which was opening out and becoming less gorge like. Soon it unfolded onto a sloping open plateau with  long easy slopes on lovely firm soft snow. It was about minus 5 and the snow squeaked when you twisted the ski stick. There were large patches of sun on the surrounding mountains and it looked plastered in snow. It was exactly as I hoped. Stuart was forging ahead but my ski skins did not offer the same glide and I lagged behind. On and on we climbed until there was a short descent down to Starsjøen lake. This was the lake I usually come across from the east on my way from Sulebu cabin, crossing the road where we met it yesterday and not going down to Briestølen at all. We crossed the edge of the lake and continued up the slope. It was getting colder and slightly windier and I had to stop to put on my gloves and jacket. Soon the wind had picked up to a force 3-4 and there was spindrift flowing across the surface of the snow. However there was still considerable amounts of blue sky and we felt optimistic we could carry on from Bjordalsbu to Iungdalshytta lodge. As we climbed up the last 5 kilometres these blue patches vanished and dark clouds gathered. But the time we crossed Nedre Bjordalsvatnet lake and skied up the final slope to Bjordalsbu Cabin at the pass with wind was a constant 4-5 and the light was very flat and the contrast in the snow vanished.

64. About to ski up Nedre Bjordalsvatnet lake on the way yo Bjordalsbu cabin, with the wind increasing.

We went into the cabin to have our snack and consider the options. Stuart was keen to carry on for another 15 km to the next lodge but I was wary. It is a lovely descent most of the way but in the flat light and potential wind it would be difficult and there were always the predicted strong winds which were yet to arrive. William, the Norwegian, arrived and indicated in the light of the forecast he had recently seen it would be somewhat foolhardy so we decided to stay put. It was not as if we were in a hurry. We collected snow for water, fetched firewood from the outhouse and then settled down for the afternoon. Within an hour it had started to snow and the wind was up to a force 6.

Just then 3 French arrived from Iungdalshytta lodge. They had the wind in their backs but were a bit bewildered and excitable by the conditions. It soon transpired these older gents were a little hapless and out of their comfort zone. However they were joyful and happy and would make for a cheerful evening. A little later Mai-Kristin arrived having skied up from Skarvheim with the wind in her face. Unlike the French gents she was anything but hapless and very experienced. That made 8 of us now sheltering in the cabin.

65. In the evening there was a raging gale at Bjordalsbu cabin with Force 9 or 10 winds carrying huge amounts of spindrift. It would have been impossible to ski.

As the afternoon wore on the wind picked up to a force 9 or 10. It was impossible to tell if it was snowing or not as there was so much spindrift swirling about in the air. It was spectacularly bad weather and the French were enthralled by its intensity. Bjordalsbu cabin sits on a pass so it was probably much worse here than where we intended to ski but we were glad we made the decision to stay. The cabin outhouse just 40 metres away was sometimes obscured but the white inferno outside. We all sat in the main kitchen/living area and marvelled at the ferocity of the weather. There was a branch right outside the cabin and even it was obscured from time to time.

Day 16. Bjordalsbu to Iungsdalshytta. 17 km. 4 hours. 130m up. 600 m down. The wind dropped off considerably in the night and by 0500 in the morning it was down to force 4, still enough to lift spindrift but not enough to stop us skiing. By 0700 in the morning it was almost windstill but the light was terrible as it was misty. According to the forecast the sun would burn off the mist and it would be a tremendous day. The French were up quite early and set off into the mist around 0800. It was about the same time the rest of us were just having the morning coffee and thinking about breakfast. There was an advantage to waiting if the sun would indeed burn off the mist. After breakfast we spotted the first blue sky and these patches only grew. Maj-Kristin and Eric set off first and then Stuart and myself and William last. We had about 16 km to ski to Iungdalshytta and much of it was gently down.

66. The next morning after the storm the wind quickly dropped and the sun returned just 12 hours after the peak of the tempest.

There were still some lingering patches of mist as we crossed Øvre Bjordalsvatnet lake but by and large it was sunny. The snow was superb as it often is after a storm. The spindrift had been blown for miles making it compact and where it settled it formed a firm surface. The skis glided well over them and we made good speed across the lake and up the slope on the south side. Wiliam soon caught up and overtook us as he had no skins on and was getting a long glide for each ski step.

67. Crossing the upper Ovre Bjordalvatnet lake before starting the wonderful descent down Mjolgedalen valley in the sun and clearing mist.

We crossed another lake and then started a long downhill which was divided into a few steps. The upper ones were wonderful and the snow was so consistent. One could just stand there and glide down without even looking at the slope in front such was the smooth consistency. With this great light and smooth consistent snow the down hill was at last fun. I caught Willian and Stuart as they were chatting waiting for me. William then headed off down the next slope with his intuitive Norwegian skiing skills, almost part of his DNA, clearly visible, while Stuart and Myself were more cautious. It was a fantastic downhill section and superb fun. At last after 2 weeks we really enjoyed a down hill section in good light and snow.

68. Looking down Mjolgedalen, full of beautiful new snow, towards the large Djupsvatnet lake.

As I descended I caught up with William again. He had stopped to chat to 2 people and I skied towards them. As I arrived William said ”James here is your fan club” I did not know what he meant until I saw the two people. They were Anni and Hege whom I last met 10 years ago when we were the only guests at Skogadalsboen. We had kept in touch ever since through Facebook. What a fantastic coincidence and lovely surprise. There were big hugs all round. It was great to see these sporty women again. Stuart caught up and we chatted for a good 10 minutes in the sunshine. They were heading over to Skarveheim and us down to where they had just come from. It was a shame our nights had not coincided in the same cabin.

69. On the way down Mjolgedalen I met two skiers, Hege Raastad and Anni Kummeneje, who I met 10 years ago in Skogadalsboen. It was a joyous coincidence.

After that joyous meeting we continued down keeping to the east side of a huge bowl which allowed us a two kilometre continuous glide as we traversed diagonally downwards to meet the twigs in the snow and the well established ski track which was getting more defined with every skier. There was a small rise now where Maj-Kristin and William were sitting in the sun Norwegian style eating their lunch. We passed them and carried on down. I felt the consistency of the snow waver a little underski as I came down which some suspect snow underneath. It was only when I slowed to turn I crashed through the top surface into the sugar snow underneath. The ski stopped but I and the rucksack kept going and I crashed into deep snow which was difficult to extricate myself from. Eventually I did but then 5 minutes later I did the same right in front of an ascending DNT group of about 10 people, mostly old Norwegians. It was humiliating. The leader warned me there was more suspect snow in the next few hundred metres until it got better again. I was very cautious for the last bit of the descent until I reached the valley at the bottom. There was now just a lovely run down the frozen river to reach the edge of the large Djupsvatnet lake near Toviki.

70. Approaching Ijungsalshytta after sking along the north shore of the larg. Djupsvatnet lake

The day was now warm and comfortable and the surrounding mountains were plastered in snow. It was fantastic to have these conditions and I was at last pleased for Stuart who had to endure nearly 10 days of poor weather. This was now the best Mountain Norway had to offer. William and Maj-Kirstin caught up on the lake and after a quick chat overtook us and glided off to the lodge while we followed in their tracks, stopping to take photos. After 2 km we went over a spur and the lodge came into view on a prow above the lake with a spectacular backdrop of steep snow-covered mountains behind it. We sauntered along to it, climbing steeply to reach it.

71. The 100 year old Iungdalshytta lodhe had a lovely ambience in the living room and served high quality, local, traditional food

Iungsdalen is quite an old lodge, perhaps 100 years old and has a reputation of local old fashioned food as was found here historically due to the summer farms. We slept in a dormitory as I was sure we would be the only ones and had the whole place to ourselves. It was the self service cabin which was used when the main lodge was closed.  It was what we were used to so we lit the fire to warm it and dry clothes. It was just the same as last night but tonight we would not have to melt snow for water or cook from the provisions. Tonight’s supper would be various smoked fishes caught in the lake, dried lamb thigh, rommegrot (a porridge made of cream) and other local delicacies which the old summer farmers produced through the centuries. The whole meal was delicious and unique in Norway. We ate with William and Mai-Kristin who were both very easy going with great humour.

Day 17. Iungsdalshytta to Geiterygghytta. 27 km. 7.5 hours. 1060m up. 890 m down. Breakfast was at 0745 and we were quite sharp in eating as many calories as possible and then making our sandwiches as we wanted to leave early. It was a longer day and the forecast was for the wind to steadily increase in the course of the day. The recent wind at Bjordalsbu cabin 2 days ago was a good reminder we did not want to be caught in such weather. It was already overcast when we left but absolutely still.

We headed west up Iungsdalen crossing many frozen swamps and tarns until we reached Eivindbotn, a corrie to the north of the main valley. It was here Eivind Fredlaus lived for some 19 years as a fugitive outlaw in the 18th century. He had killed a man down in the valley in an argument over a field and fled to the mountains before retribution. It is difficult to imagine how he survived for these 19 years with a bounty on his head, evading vigilantes and finding enough food and shelter to survive. Eventually he was shot by someone from Laedal. His story is becoming legend with books and even a film made about him.

Near Eivindbotn the marked winter ski route headed south and started to climb up the southern flank of the valley side in a series of zig-zags. The cloud was thin and the sun sometimes broke through the veil and shone a golden atmospheric light onto the hillsides. Stuart was ahead making the trail with me, Wilhelm, Mai and two French brothers following. It took nearly 2 hours to climb the valley side, then ski up the higher valley and up the end of it to reach the plateau where there was a collection of lakes. The one we reached was Volavatnet. It was some 5 kilometres long and divided into various bays and sections by headlands of moraine deposits. It was often difficult to tell if we were on the frozen surface or skiing on the snow covered boulder fields. By now the wind was increasing significantly and by the time we reached Kongshelleren cabin it was at least a force 8 and there was spindrift filling the air. It was a relief to get inside. It was not cold outside at all and for the last 2 kilometres I had terrible problems with the snow clumping up under the ski and skins so in effect I could not slide my skis at all but had to walk on my skis – which made it worse. I even took the skins off so it was bare ski with no wax but it was still happening.

72. The route from Iungsdalshytta to Gieterygghytta lodges climbed to a high lake studded plateau where it got very windy before descending again.

We were nearly an hour in the cabin waiting to see what the weather was doing. It was not getting worse so the 6 of us decided to continue. It was a mad 10 minutes getting ready with those who were waiting standing with their backs to the wind which was perhaps force 10 at times. Stuart was locking up and when he was ready he came to join us but was blown over en route such was the power of the wind. I think we all felt empowered by being in a group, but if any of us were on our own we would have probably stayed put in the cabin.

We fought our way south down Langavatnet lake for a kilometre with the wind and spindrift lashing us. Someway down the lake there was a small rise and we entered a shallow valley to the north of Langvassnuten mountain. The more we went into this valley the more it protected us from the south wind until fully in its lee the wind was a mere force 4. It got so hot skiing and with the lack of wind we had to stop and take off some clothes. Thereafter we had a great ski down the shallow valley, round a spur to the south and over a ridge to enter another valley. During this stretch all the twigs put in to act as waymarkers had had all their bark stripped off by passing reindeer looking for any sustenance in these meagre times.

I had forgotten there was a twist to the tail of this descent and that was a steep descent from the saddle at Bolhovd down into Rossdalen valley and then a long climb up the other side. With the wind directly against us Stuart and Myself found it easier to ski down than it might have been. Mai and Wilhelm were both good skiers and were down at the bottom in no time. The climb up the other side was taxing and it was hard work towards the end of a long day to reach the ridge.

I was preparing myself for the long difficult 2-3 kilometre descent down the other side but again with the wet snow, skins on and the strong southerly wind to slow us it was actually very forgiving. Mai and Wilhelm found it very easy and shot off down to the lodge, while Stuart and myself found it right on the edge of our comfort zone. I somehow made it down to the open valley without falling and then went round a corner to see the lodge just 300 metres away.

It was not busy with just 25 people staying and Stuart and myself got a 4 man room with 2 sets of bunks and a west view. It was ideal for us. There were free showers and a trough-style sink to wash my skiing clothes. The large drying room swallowed up everyone’s wet gear and by 1830 I was refreshed and clean and waiting for dinner. The 6 of us, 2 Norwegians, 2 Scots and 2 French who had made it over from Iungsdalen today sat at one table. It was nice that the team which skied together ate together. The food was good, not Fondsbu, or especially Iungddalshytta standard, but still very good and what it lacked in top quality it made up for in volume. We ate well but then by 2030 and the end of the meal I was ready for bed. It had been a great day really despite the weather which spiced it up. What really made the day was the company.

Day 18. Geiterygghytta rest and weather day. 0 km. 0 hours. 0m up. 0 m down. It was forecast to be warm and wet today with temperatures at just over zero. The 4 of us, Maj-Kristin Wilhelm, Stuart and Myself, who had become something of a team over the last 3 days all decided to have a day off. It was a nice lodge with a relaxed vibe, the food was good and there was no reason to push ourselves in this unpleasant weather. I spent most of the morning writing while the others read books with their slippered feet up on the sofa and a wedge of pillows behind them. As always on a weather day you are anxious that the weather will not be as bad as predicted and if it is too good you end up feeling guilty you are wasting a day. One look outside the window however allayed any guilt and we felt perfectly justified being in and reading.

In the afternoon I uploaded everything and then had a small snooze. But by 1600 I was up and joined the others. It had been a long day and we were all glad for the rest but by mid afternoon we were getting bored. Just at that minute Eric turned up having come from a different route to the one we took yesterday. He said I had gotten very wet in the sleety rain. At last supper time arrived and it was reindeer stew and real potatoes. Again good honest food and plenty of it.  The 4 of us and Eric sat at the same table again and by now the banter was becoming quite fluent and we told more personal stories of our past. On the neighbouring table there were two more Scots and we learned we had mutual friends here. Fjell Norge (Mountain Norway) is a small cosy world.

Day 19. Geiterygghytta to Finse. 18 km. 4.5 hours. 530m up. 530 m down. Breakfast as usual was a rush to eat enough for the morning and make a packed lunch for the day. There was a huge buffet to help yourself from and lots of great bread which had been freshly baked. The quality of the food at all the serviced lodges was high, yet it was practical, delicious and honest also. Stuart and myself felt we were getting great value for our money. Maj-Kristin left early as she had to catch a train at Finse. Stuart and Myself later at 0900 and Wilhelm after us. We said goodbye to Maj-Kristin as she was a great skier, natural sportswoman and we stood no chance of catching her.

73. Heading up the valley west of Geiteryggenhytta towards Omnsvatnet lake

It was great weather with just a slight NW wind, but the sun was out and there was plenty of blue sky. The only issue was it was so warm and wet yesterday that all the lovely snow which fell in the storm 3 days ago had melted and it had refrozen in the night so the surface was icy. Our ski skins did not really provide enough grip so we both had to stop and change to thicker ones. Even then it was difficult to ski on the icy surface. The route went up a series of small lakes on the valley floor which were completely frozen over and covered in drifts. There were a few steps between the lakes, some of which were quite steep but after a glorious 4 km we reached the larger lake of Omnsvatnet.

74. Crossing Omnsvatnet lake and heading towards the start of the climb over to Finse.

To the south of the lake were flanks of Hallingsskarvet, a long ridge at about 1800 metres high and some 30 kilometres long. In many places it was wide enough at the top, perhaps 4 kilometres to be a plateau. We would have to climb over this barrier and drop down to Finse on the other side. On the north side of the lake were a line of mountains which were plastered in snow. Indeed at this point there was as much snow as we have seen anywhere on the trip so far. Huge drifts and large cornices threatened anyone who wanted to go up these sides. The ski down the lake was a delight. It was a winter wonderland with the sun shining and little wind. I could see the slope at the end of the lake we would have to climb and it was plastered in deep snow with huge drifts.

However the route did not go to the end of the lake but about ? of the way along it climbed steeply up the north side over a spur coming down from the mountains. I followed Stuart and the sticks up here without really questioning it. The reason for it was because there were large deep drifts at the end of the lake where the natural route could have been. DNT have been marking the routes for decades now, perhaps even a century, and they would never mark a route which went into a dubious area and which might have had a history of an avalanche in the past. One can rest assured that the routes marked by the DNT are tried and tested, and the safest. The climb up this spur was a little taxing but at the top there was a gentle downhill run to the valley at the end of the lake and pleasingly above the problematic area with the big drift. Stuart had caught Eric up and the pair of them were snacking in the sun when I arrived. Wilhelm was right behind me having caught everyone up.

75. Looking south to Hallingskarvet. We had to climb over this huge ridge to get to Finse on the south side of it.

I did not stop but started up the steep flank of mountains to the south to the apex of the Hallingsskarvet ridge. My ski skins now became an advantage and gripped the snow so well I could just about go straight up. I looked back and the others were having to zig-zag more, as Maj-Kristin had. The icy conditions of the valley and Omnsvatnet lake were a thing of the past as this lee side of the mountain was receiving all the spindrift which was blowing about and it lay where it settled covering all the ice. It was a good, hot, half hour to climb up the ridge to the undulating plateau on top. Just as we reached the top a large group of about 15 skiers came towards us. They were mostly Norwegian I think as despite their age they were all competent and confident skiers. They were on a DNT arranged tour. Their leader lingered to chat with us but it was mostly a dictat of “be careful here, don’t do this, watch out for that”. It was a one sided dialog in English that was not endearing and it went on even when I interrupted him in Norwegian. His fussy manner and teaching instincts were etched on his hard drive.

76. Arriving at the apex of the huge Hallingskarvet ridge having climbed up from Omnsvatnet lake.

At the top the wind veered to the NW so it was frequently behind us. Initially this was an advantage as it helped us along on the deep spindrift and snow fields of the undulating plateau however as we started to descend the surface became icier bit by bit and the wind hurled us down the slope. Although it was misty, the mist was thin and the sun could frequently break through the veil and illuminate the snow’s surface. It was quite easy to see the whiter, more luminous spindrift patches and the duller areas of wind polished ice. We could ski accordingly from a softer spindrift patch to another and brace ourselves for the icy corridors between them. But as we descended further the spindrift became less and less and the ice more and more and we had to really dig the metal edges of the skis in and traverse widely from side to side. It did not take long to descend the 250 vertical metres to the powerlines but it was sore on the legs which were often straining to keep the skis on edge.

At the powerlines Wilhelm caught us up. He had been keeping his skiing ability hidden under a bush but now he whizzed down the slope with all the aplomb of a Norwegian who was born with skis on. He zipped down carving beautiful turns on the difficult icy surface and was soon out of sight and nearing Finse. Indeed Finse had just appeared below us. Stuart and myself were far too timid to follow Wilhelm’s example and continued to traverse with the wind pushing us hard.

77. After a long easier descent from the Hallingskarvet ridge we finally arrived at Finse.

We soon reached Finse itself and skied across the train tracks to the Finse 1222 Hotel just in time to catch Maj-Kristin before she caught her train. Eric soon joined us and we said good bye again. From here it was just a short 500 metre ski around the edge of Finse lake and away from the Hotel and Station hubris to the large isolated Finsehytta lodge, one of the Flagship lodges of the DNT. It had a hubris of its own and at the reception we learnt there were over 100 guests. Stuart and myself managed to get a 4 man room which we would hopefully not have to share as there were still 100 beds free at the busy lodge. I settled down to write the blog while Stuart, Wilhelm and Eric sat in the main room and sampled the IPA beer brewed by the lodge in its basement. The beer was something of a legend now.

78. Maj-Kristin, our companion for half a week and 80 kilometres since the storm at Bjordalsbu about to get the train from Finse Station.

An hour before dinner I went over to the hotel Finse 1222 where a couple of acquaintances were staying namely, Louis and Amelia Rudd, who I wanted to have a coffee with. Louis is arguably UK’s leading polar explorer, certainly in Antarctica, and Amelia is very active in Antarctica and now Spitsbergen. It was after meeting with Louis 3 years ago on Hardangervidda that I made the decision to go to Antarctica. As I skied over to the hotel some 500 meters away I bumped into Cat Burford, AKA the Molar Explorer, who was also a South Pole Soloist and who I sold some of my radio equipment to. I had never met her but we recognised each other immediately and there were more hugs. At the hotel I met Louis and Amelia for a half hour chat before rushing back for my meal at 1900. The dining room was busy and the meal was good but not up to Fondsbu or Iungdalshytta standard. There was an element of army catering to it, as there had to be with the number of guests. I sat with Stuart and we seemed to be surrounded by Scots. There was also a witty Danish guy I met 10 years ago and we shared a laugh about a lady with a cello from our last meeting. It had been a great skiing day despite the icy conditions and a very sociable and happy evening at Finse. The only downside was saying goodbye to Maj-Kristin today and then Wilhelm tomorrow.

Back

February 27, 2026

Day 09. Prestesteinshytte to Skogadalsboen. 17 km. 6.5 hours. 200m up. 740 m down. The weather was better than the forecast and the mountains to the south of the cabin, Fanneråki and Steindalsnosi, both over 2000m, were looking sharp. There was a huge glacier which flowed down from them and would once have ended in the Prestestein Lake but now stopped far up the mountainside. We were lethargic in getting started and making sure the cabin was as we found it and did not really set off until 1000. Initially we skied the kilometre and a half back along the Riksvei 55 road along our tracks from last night until we intercepted them and the tracks from the 3 Norwegians, whom Stuart now referred to as the “Heroes of Telemark” on account of their skiing prowess. We decided to follow their tracks along the undulating shoreline on the east shore of Prestesteinvatnet. It was very easy going and the glide was perfect.

35. Looking back at Fannaråki and Steindalsnosi, both 2000m mountains from our ski across Prestesteinvatnet lake.

At the end of the lake we could look up to the east to see the white glaciers and black cliffs of the Smørstabb massif with its sharp mountains and razor sharp aretes, where glaciers had been working on each side of the mountain eroding the hard rock. From here we had a difficult choice. Either continue following their tracks to the south as that is where they looked like they were going and then down Vetle Utledalen or continue east over a ridge and go down a valley to the east of Vetle Utledalen. The former was certainly shorter than the latter which involved a further climb. However the former was also avalanche prone in certain conditions and not recommended by the DNT who mark the latter route as the official winter way. I had been down the latter on skis twice before but never the former. However the Heroes of Telemark certainly knew what they were doing and we decided to follow them into the lion’s den.

37. Entering the funnel of Vetle Utledalen knowing there is no escape if we encounter a difficulty except back up.

We crossed Rundhaugstjorne to the inflow at the SE corner and then continued over a series of small tarns in flat country until a vista opened up in front of us. There was a nice easy descent into the bowl at the top of the valley and the sun was out so we could see the formations and even texture of the snow and prepare for them as we approached rather than hitting them blindly. There must have been poor visibility yesterday when the others went this way as they were quite cautious. Ahead we could see the hill rise and we would have to climb this to reach the official track and it did not look enticing.

36. A distant view of the Stølsnos Massif to the south from the start of the descent down Vetle Utledalen.

However the route the others took down the valley did look enticing and it gave us confidence to take it. There was always the possibility though it would end in an unforeseen hazard and we would have to climb back. We set off swinging from side to side as we zig-zagged down this great funnel with the sides getting closer and closer. It was a magical descent and the sun was out still, long after the weather forecast said it would disappear. Once the funnel stopped and the sides grew closer together I could look up and see, especially on the east side that there would be terrible avalanche conditions here in the right conditions.

38. Descending into the steep sided gorge which was like a giant Cresta bobsleigh run in Vetle Utadalen.

From the end of the funnel the descent now entered something like a giant version of the Cresta bobsleigh run. It zig-zagged down with steep rock walls and banks of snow on each side in a slot which twisted down the valley in a ravine. Snow completely filled the bottom of the slot and it was easy to ski. I could see the altitude dropping quickly and we were nearing the flat swamp at the bottom of the valley where the two routes met up again. It was all going well until the route stopped at a drop of some 30 metres down to the rocky ravine below. There was no way it could be skied and had I been on my own I would have been so anxious I might have climbed back again and gone the official route, and that would have been 3 hours at least. Luckily I was with Stuart who had a lot of mountaineering experience and he said it would be quite straightforward – which inspired confidence. We took our skis off and put them on the packs and then stepped forth onto the west side wall of the ravine which was banked up with snow at about 40 degrees. However at one point it was 50 degrees for 30 metres and we had to downclimb facing the snow and kicking steps until we reached the lower section of the easier Cresta Run again. There were already some footprints and steps across this snowface, probably from the Heroes of Telemark which made our life easier. A fall or a slip would have meant a speedy descent into the sluggish stream at the bottom which was quite shallow but rocky. Luckily there was no incident and it was skis back on for a last ski down the chute until we spilled onto the open valley floor and the other route. The other route had just been marked with a line of twigs, thrust into the ground from a passing snow scooter, and we could follow them to Skogadalsboen cabin. We stopped here for a rest for 5 km from the cabin. I noticed some fresh wolverine tracks here.

39. The steep traverse across the side of the snow in the gorge was necessary to avoid a 15-20 metre vertical drop.

Initially the marked route was fantastic and we sped along eating up 2 kilometres gliding nicely  However, the route now descended more quickly into the upper birch and juniper forest and it was too steep to ski. We zig-zagged back and forth in the forest endlessly, which had its problems. The snow was rotten and occasionally if I strayed too close to a tree or bush the snow collapsed under me and I sank down half a meter or more. Getting out of this slot was fiendishly hard work. I fell about 5 times and Stuart slightly less before we reached a flat area where three large valleys all met. By this time I had big skins on to try and give me some more control.

40. Looking down upper Utledalen to the start of the forest. Skogadalsboen cabin is just 3 km away but the forest was difficult.

The final 2 kilometres were perhaps the hardest of the day and the route through the forest took the summer path. It was deep rotten snow but luckily the Heroes of Telemark and a few scooters had packed a path. It was almost raining, and the snow was soggy and fast, so it was difficult to control the skis. I have walked along this path in the summer and it is a lush, verdant delight, rich in wild flowers but today it was a slog. Up a little, steeply down through overhanding trees, sharp turns – there were hazards lurking everywhere and we were slow and cautious. Eventually in the light sleet we reached the main lodge. It was closed and will open soon, so we carried on to the self service cabin a little beyond. It was open and already warm as the Heroes of Telemark had left that morning.

We found a room and unpacked into it. Just then Renee and Peter Metcalf arrived, a couple from Montana. They had come down from Olavsbu self service cabin. They also found the forest section hard. With Renee, Stuart and myself dragged a huge pile of cut wood down the slope on a tarpaulin which we found in the wood shed 50 metres away. We then melted 3 large pans of water from snow and settled down for the evening at 1800. It had been a hard 3 days for Stuart and Myself and we planned a day off here tomorrow, especially as the forecast was not good. It was another nice pleasant, convivial cabin evening beside the immense stove which pumped out heat as we told tales and stories from our past. By 2130 we blew the candles out and went to bed.

Day 10. Skogadalsboen weather day. 0 km. 0 hours. 0m up. 0 m down. It was warm and overcast in the morning. When I went out I was shocked to see it was a light drizzle. There was not even the hint of sleet so it must have been plus 5. It was unheard of in early March. Luckily Stuart and Myself have the day off and we unenviably watched Renee and Peter Metcalf pack up and head off. I had a day catching up on the much neglected blog while Stuart had a book to finish. We gently loaded the large stove as it was too easy to overheat the place and then sat on the upholstered bench in front of the tables and started.

41. A relaxing rest day in Skogadalsboen cabin reading with the large Jøtul stove keeping us warm.

I just could not write and had a long sleep in the morning. I felt a little groggy and Stuart said he had a small headache. It was perhaps the effects of our efforts over the last few days and the hot, well-sealed and insulated stuffy room. After we ventilated the place I felt better and spent the rest of the day writing while the drizzle came and went and with it some much needed snow. There were enough provisions in the cupboard to keep us well fed for a while. The afternoon was lazy with a bit more snoozing on the upholstered bench, and then we were sure no one else was coming, we started dinner with something from the huts provisions. This evening we had pasta and reconstituted chicken.

After basking in the warmth of the cabin’s living room with the enormous stove all evening. I went out at about 2130 to see the weather before bed. The stars were out and it was feeling a bit colder which bode better for tomorrow. Suddenly I saw another light too low to be a star and then I realised it was on the hillside about 400 metres away. There were two of them. I knew it would be an unfortunate team who were battling through the terrible conditions to reach the hut. It took them an hour to reach us with some shouting and flashing of lamps. When they arrived they were exhausted having spent the last 5 hours wading through waist high snow. They said their day was going well until the last 2 kilometres when the “Wheels fell off”. We had already prepared a room by lighting the stove in it and were waiting with hot drinks when they appeared. They were two English lads from the Home Counties. They told us terrible tales about reaching the cabin after a tolerable day when they encountered first a boulder field with a layer of soft snow on it and then the birch woods with its deep unskiable sugary snow. I was quite fearful of what we would encounter the next morning. The “wheels fell off team” were quite bewildered and shellshocked at their experience and we left them up as they sorted themselves out and went to bed at 2300.

Day 11. Skogadalsboen to Fondsbu. 24 km. 10.5 hours. 920m up. 690 m down. Stuart was up at once as soon as the alarm went off at 0630. We had a quick breakfast, where I had a can of stew and Stuart some porridge. We packed hurriedly, fearful of the long day we might encounter. As we were about to leave Wheels Fell Off appeared from their room after a well deserved rest and quite unsure about what to do next. We chatted a bit and then set off at 0800.

Initially the snow up to the bridge, just 300 metres away, was good and the frozen snow held our weight. However, at the bridge there was no snow at all covering it. We crossed the bare boards and then started on the snow up the other side, which was much less firm and our skis started to sink in the snow. We climbed up a small rise where the summer and winter paths diverge. The summer path threaded a line through the trees climbing diagonally, while the winter ski path headed down across an open frozen meadow and then headed over to the Urdals River before climbing up a more open spur before the two met again after a kilometre. All the ski tracks from the Hero of Telemark, Renee and Peter, and the footsteps off Wheels Came off, with huge deep holes a metre deep, went up the more difficult but more intuitive summer path. We were in a quandary, follow the summer path where the others went or drop down a bit and break a new trail. We chose the former as the least of two evils. The former was proven, while anything could happen with the unmarked latter.

42. Looking back down to Skogadalsboen lodge and cabin from the start of the extremely taxing forest section with deep soft snow.

For the next two hours we crept forward at a snail’s pace in some of the most difficult terrain I have ever skied in. It was an immense struggle to move forward and up and in some areas we gained 10 metres in 15 minutes. Our skis either disappeared into half a metre of snow where they became entangled in birch branches, or slithered across the slippery glazed surface causing us to fall forwards and crash into the snow. The resultant effort to get up was so severe we started to make sure we never fell, even if that meant fussing over a step for 5 minutes. Very slowly we made progress up the icy trail which was punctuated every half meter with huge footprints where the ski skins surface was in mid air, not providing any traction. In the end it took us 2 hours to battle a hard won kilometre and reach the boulder field.

43. Looking back down the boulders section with hazards at every turn. It was hard coming up but near impossible to descend.

I thought our worries would be over now but they were not. It was a large boulder field with stones the size of cars jumbled across it. I have skied up and down here 5 times over the last 20 years and normally most of the boulders are submerged under a large snowfield. However in this year of lower snowfall the boulders just had a smattering of snow on them. There was a difficult route through them which took a further hour to gain less than a kilometre. It was bad enough going up, but coming down would be exceptionally difficult and fraught and I could understand why the Wheels Fell Off for the English Team. Usually there is a route through the boulder marked by sticks a snow scooter driver has placed, however this year a snow scooter would just get stuck, impaled on a boulder or wedged in a slot and could only be extracted by helicopter. Some 3 hours after leaving the hut we had covered 1.8 kilometres and used an enormous amount of energy to do it. It was already 1100 and we still had a long way to go. Heading the other way, as Wheels Fell Off did, I could see it was a terrible trap they skied into, oblivious to the forthcoming hazards and so close to the cabin.

44. Once in Urdadalen the wind threatened to pick up to beyond gale force but luckily did not.

Once out of the boulders the wind suddenly picked up and there were some very strong gusts. Spindrift was flying everywhere in the force 9-10 blasts and this also made us worried in case it should worsen. Stuart set off and broke a trail, as the other tracks had largely vanished. Luckily the wind did not increase and we managed to battle into it for the next 2.5 hours to gain just another 7 km to reach the pass. However it was now 1330 hours and we still had 13 km to go which was worrying. It was a great shame the weather here was difficult as there were no views, either back to the lofty giants of Hurrungane behind us or the massive Uranostind and Falketind in front. I knew these spectacular mountains and was hoping it would be a highlight for Stuart, but instead it was the exceptionally difficult conditions and terrible weather for which Urdalen will be remembered. Although once we were out of the boulders the snow conditions did improve as the snow under the ski was firm with the below zero temperatures. As we reached the pass, Urdalsbandet at about 1460 metres, the wind was a good gale yet there were a couple of ravens in the spindrift filled air who were just playing in the wind, as if showing off their acrobatic prowess to us. We did not stop at the pass as it was too windy to do anything but started down the other side, gingerly making slow wide turns as the light was very flat and we could not make out the undulations in the snow. When we finished the descent we were on the relative calm of Urdalsvartnet some 150 metres lower than the pass. We stopped here for a snack.

45. Stuart skiing across Kvitevatnet lake heading east on higher ground towards Fondsbu lodge

The snow was now excellent with a firm base and a dusting of new snow on top. It gave us a great glide with our smaller skins on and we flew down this lake, climbed a small rise to reach Kvitevatnet and flew down this too to the SE corner. At last things were going well. However I felt tired due to the exertions in the forest and boulderfield. There was the odd patch of blue sky occasionally, the first for days, as we glided east over undulations and across smaller tarns until we reached Sløtatjernet tarn at the end of this easier passage. Slowly the ground started to descend as we stood on our skis and travelled down into a lower side valley. It was covered in snow, but too difficult to make anything out. Stuart was in front and at one stage he went over a small drift and disappeared into a heap 2 metres lower. I felt sorry just for the effort in getting up at this stage in a long day.

46. At the start of the steeper long descent down Mjølkedalen valley towards the huge Bygdin lake. Galdeberget is on the lake’s left

The descent eventually took us down into Mjølkedalen, a higher valley which led down a wide open U shaped descent down to the cluster of cabins at the east end of Bygdin Lake, 1036m. It was a descent I had been dreading all day as I had been down some 5-6 times, sometimes without even falling. However I felt tired and the flat light falling this time was inevitable and the thought of getting up made me fearful and cautious. In the end it was not that bad and there was a great view down Bygdin Lake and even over to Galdeberget Mountain, my last 2000 metre top some 20 years ago. We made cautious swings from side to side down the U shaped funnel dropping some 10-15 metres with each one. I knew if I did a ski turn I would fall, so instead I came to a halt and did a step turn before starting the next descending traverse. After some 25 turns we at last neared the bottom and could then traverse to the north in the direction of the closed Eidsbugarden hotel. We passed Asmund Vinjes historic cabin and then Fondsbu came into view some 500 metres away. Stuart is very hardy and never one to complain, but said his knees were sore after that taxing descent. At last after some 10.5 hours we reached Fondsbu as dusk was finishing.

We went in and were given a small room with bunk beds. Supper was going to start in half an hour so we quickly changed out of our stinking, damp ski clothes into our evening attire and went through. The host, the renowned  Solbourg, was greeting everyone as they entered. When she saw me she exclaimed in delight and we had a warm hug. I have known Solbourg for 25 years and she looked after me once 15 years ago when I was at a low ebb on my Norge På Langs ski trip in 2009 when I helped her prepare for the lodges opening in early February. It was great to see her again. That evening Stuart and myself sat with 2 other British and were served the most sensational high quality meal of a rich tomato/ministone soup, venison stew and brown goats cheese ice cream. It was delicious simple honest food for which Fondsbu is famous. I thought about writing afterwards but was totally exhausted after the meal and went to bed early at 2100.

47. Solbourg Kvalshaugen, the host at Fondsbu lodge and the Queen of Jotunheimen, whom I have known for 25 years.

Day 12. Fondsbu to Tyinkrysset. 23 km. 6 hours. 240m up. 470 m down. The intention had been to ski the 33 kilometres to Sulebu today. However after yesterday neither of us was up for it. Luckily we could split it and we still had a few spare days in reserve. So instead we decided to go just 23 kilometres to Tyinkrysset and we then managed to arrange a small apartment there usually rented to skiers. The forecast was not good with a wind increasing from force 1 to force 7 in the course of the day with heavy snowfall later. However, on the positive side the temperatures were at last dropping below zero degrees. After a sumptuous breakfast of more high quality ingredients we packed up and were ready to pay by 0900. However there were a few people I had met previously including 3 Dutch from about 10 years ago, and of course Solbourg so we did not leave until nearer 1000. As we put our skis on, the Norwegian pennant hung unmoving from the flagpole. We passed a few parked weasels made by Bombardier used for ferrying clients about and nearly 60 years old. They were from another era, We then started up the shallow hill to cross over to the large lake at Tyinholmen. We skied on the road which was completely covered and used by the weasels to take up to 10 passengers at a time to the bus stop at the end of the road.

48. Looking SW down Tyin Lake which is about 16 km long as we skied down the snow covered road on the east shore.

The ski was fantastic. At last the conditions were good and we got a great glide with our smaller skins on. We sauntered up the hill and then down to Tyinholmen on the other side. It was all relatively shallow and quite fast and we covered the 4 kilometres in well under an hour. At Tyinholmen the forecast wind started to pick up and soon spindrift was starting to pepper us, flowing directly towards us. We thought about skiing the 14 kilometres down the lake, but it would be boring so instead decided to continue on the slightly undulating road for the next 15 kilometres. It was an easy ski but occasionally the gusts heading towards us were intense and buffeted us about. I was fearful the wind would increase to a force 8 or even 10 and then progress would have become very difficult, but it topped out at force 7 for the whole section. We skied well and fast, delighted to make such easy progress after a difficult week. We passed many characterful cabins along the shore of the lake, all of which had to conform to stringent conditions such as a grass roof. It was a lovely ski and before we knew it we had skied the 19 kilometres and reached the junction with the big road and the incongruous apartment block which did not conform to any planning permissions it seemed.

49. The Bombardier weasels are about 60 years old. Their 600hp engine can transport up to 10 people along the road we just skied from Fondsbu.

It was not far to Tyinkrysset now but the ski route was very difficult in these conditions and in this light. It was steeper than yesterday’s descent and was made difficult with increasing birchwoods as we descended further. Luckily there was an alternative and that was the main road which we had just arrived at. We decided to walk the 4 kilometres down the Riksveg 53 road rather than tangle with the forest and steep slopes. Within the hour we had reached Tyinkrysset and then walked to the lovely apartment at the bottom of the ski piste. It was the piste we would climb tomorrow.

The apartment had 2 bedrooms, a kitchen/living room, bathroom with washing machine and even a small sauna. It was also close to the local shop for food. We settled in and then went shopping, getting fish and potatoes for dinner and granola for breakfast. It was simple and easy. Back at the apartment in the chalet style building we filled the washing machine with all the dubious clothing and then I wrote the blog for the rest of the day. Stuart cooked the potatoes, carrots and cod for supper which was delicious with butter. Despite the 23 kilometres it had been an easy day and we arrived early enough to enjoy some downtime rather than arriving exhausted after a struggle.

Back

February 27, 2026

Day 05. Pollfoss to Sota Seter. 24 km. 8 hours. 440m up. 330 m down. It was bright and sunny when we woke in the somewhat overdesigned hotel room. After breakfast we set off down the track we had come up yesterday. It eventually led to a small hydropower station and the local farmer had spread grit on the snowy surface so we had to walk for 1.5 km until we reached a junction in the pine woods. Here we left the gritted track and immediately crossed the mostly frozen river on a bridge to the SE bank. There was a snow-covered track here where someone had been skiing a week or two ago and we followed their tracks which had been largely obscured by a few smaller snow falls.

17. The exceptionally characterful Pollfoss Hotel was a comfortable break. On account of a hot tub it was now called a boutique ans spa hotel.

Initially my skis and skins worked well and I got some glide, and Stuart got a great glide and shot off. However as the temperatures increased the snow started to ball on the thin mohair skin under my skis until it was impossible to ski. There were huge clods of snow compacted onto the underside of the skis some 5-10 centimetres deep. It was like walking on platform shoes. I stopped and took the skins off but even with bare skis there was still enough stickiness in the snow to stick to the residual glue of the skins and some old wax, and I had to scrape the skis to stop it compacting on the underside again. It was slow hard work and I was sweating just in a shirt in the plus 5 celcius temperatures.

18. Heading up the track on the SE side of the Framrusti river where my ski were clogged with warm wet snow.

After 4 km I caught Stuart up as he had stopped at Framrustiseter. It was a stunning collection of some 40 old wooden buildings, all made of logs, which had been used as summer farms for centuries. Their gnarly log walls shone golden against the white fields that surrounded them, and their turf roofs were covered in snow. It was here we were to leave the track and head up a much smaller snow covered track over the ridge to the Ostri Valley. This track was not long, perhaps 4 kilometres but it involved 100 metres of ascent and 150 descent over a saddle at Bråtååsen. The climb up was immensely difficult. The snow was rotten and the ski poles could go in half a metre. The skis luckily only went half that before the sugary snow was compressed enough to take out weight. We took it in turns to plough a furrow up here in the warm temperatures and blazing sun. Every step was a huge effort. Even without skins I was getting enough grip in the sticky snow to push my moving foot forwards. Soggy snow even stuck to the tops of the skis. It was like wading through treacle with diving fins on. After a good hour we reached the saddle just 1.5 km from the junction and started down the other side. It was much easier now and soon we came across someone else’s ski tracks. We followed a zig-zag of tracks leading to past working farms to the main road in the Ostri valley.

19. The immensely taxing climb over the Bråtååsen saddle between the Framrusti and Ostri Valleys. This 1.5 km climb took well over an hour of hard toil.

There were some 5-6 farms here in this rural hamlet. They smelt of sillage as humming machines kept the sheep inside the barns ventilated and provided them with fodder. I had hoped to also ski the road here, but it was bare wet asphalt for 2 km until the end of the public road and we had to walk to the turning place at the barrier where the private track continued up the valley. This track had not been salted and was still covered in a layer of compacted snow about 5 cm deep where the machine had cleared it. It was difficult to ski on as the skis just went sideways as easily as forwards. However initially there was a lovely kilometre descent where the track gently dropped SW into the valley, which came up to meet it. We kept our skis on here and flew down.

20. One of the beautiful old summer farms and cabins which were beside the track beside the Liavatnet lake and the valley below.

Once on the valley floor through there swift easy section was over and we still had some 12 km to go on this track to Sota seter. We tried various combinations of skins on and off, wax and even taking the ski off and walking. All seemed of equal speed. Occasionally there was a longer downhill section where it was worthwhile putting skis on for the effortless kilometre but by and large it was easiest to walk. When we reached the north end of Liavatnet, where the outlet of the lake was spanned by a beautiful old rustic wooden bridge I decided to walk while Stuart continued with skins on. He was only marginally faster than me. It was a long and somewhat tedious walk on the compacted snow road but there was enough interest in the small cabins along the road and the views over the frozen lake. Towards the end we were also rewarded with views up to the south where the giant monolith of Tverrådalskyrkja, 2088m, loomed above everything. After a tiring day we at last reached the cosy lodge at Sota Seter where we were to spend the night.

Sota Seter is one of the DNT flagship lodges and it is staffed. Its old buildings are arranged around a yard with about 10 buildings in all. It was once the biggest summer farm in a collection of summer farms and its outbuildings were the traditional collection of a stabbur (larder), fjosset (barn) as well as the bake house and blacksmith workshop which were always separate in case they caught fire. There was another group just arriving and they were sleeping in the stabbur. They were doing an avalanche awareness course. We were shown a more perfunctory, less traditional building with plenty of space and great bunks.

21. As we skied south along Liavatnet lake towards Sota Seter the massive monolith mountain of Tverrådalskyrkja loomed above us.

Later that evening 3 Norwegians arrived. They were all in their 60s and exceptionally strong, active sportsmen. They were a group of friends who often did tours together and they had a vast knowledge, great humour and were typically modest like many older Norwegians. They were a delight, and we and them shared an affinity as we sat together for dinner. The only thing worrying us was the weather forecast – it was just too warm and the snow would be melting for the next week or so, certainly below 1200 metres. However these 3 exceptionally experienced Norwegians also wanted to ski to Nørstedalseter. We would follow in their experienced footsteps after we all took a day off tomorrow.  It was set to rain and finding a way out of the forest would just be too exhausting in the rotten sugar-snow.

Day 06. Sota Seter weather day. 0 km. 0 hours. 0m up. 0 m down.  We had decided to have a day off at Sota Seter as it was forecast to rain. It was overcast and 5 so it was not unlikely. It was extraordinary weather. The last time I was here was also in March, 8 years ago, and then the temperature was minus 39. The three very experienced Norwegians were also taking a day off as one of them needed to repair a binding. However the 8 or so younger people on the avalanche awareness course also staying here decided to go up the hillside through the forest in the direction we would be going tomorrow. If nothing else they would make a great trail for us tomorrow, although in these temperatures the snow would still be wet and sugary.

Breakfast was not until 0800 and it was a large buffet type breakfast. I ate well knowing this would be lunch also. Thereafter Stuart, myself and the 3 Norwegians, Anders, Terje and Erik sat in the cosy smaller living room and chatted for a couple of hours. The three Norwegians were very accomplished but they were modest and you had to extract their achievements from them, but the also shone through. We had a good natured chat with the occasional look out of the window at the others breaking trail up the hill. It was poor weather and the expecterd rain was indeed gently falling in some of the most unseasonal weather I have ever seen.

22. The cosy artifact-filled “Peisestue” at Sota Seter lodge, where everyone gathered to chat.

In the afternoon Stuart went for a small ski while I did the blog and other office work and then we chatted with the 3 Norwegians again. It was a very convivial afternoon chatting infront of the birch logs burning quietly on the open fire. A few more people arrived in the evening just as the drizzle was turning to snow which was a good sign. I was still worried about the climb up to Fortuns Glacier tomorrow and the descend from the bottom of the glacier on the south side but we should be a few hundred metres higher and hopefully the snow was not so rotten up there. Dinner was again at 2000, which was relatively late, but it was woth waiting for. There were about 20 of us at the table now, most when to bed soon after but I stayed up to write a bit more.

23. Our companions for a few days at Sota Seter and Nørdstedalseter. From left Terje, Anders and Erik. Extraordinary characters, accomplished outdoors men and exceptional skiers.

Day 07. Sota Seter to Nørdstedalseter. 23 km. 9.5 hours. 950m up. 900 m down. It had snowed a little in the night but it was still unseasonably warm at around plus 2. The roofs were dripping. However we were going up and it would not be long before we climbed to minus temperatures. Luckily we had the trails to follow from the avalanche group from yesterday and also the 3 Norwegian this morning. It went up the summer trail but it would just be too hard to follow the winter ski trail which was still deep virgin forest snow and probably sugary and rotten. We set off before 0900 and followed the route as it twisted in and out of the forest as it climbed up. The trees were dripping wet snow on us initially but as we climbed through the woods the wet snow had frozen onto them. It was hot work especially when the mist thinned and the sun came out.

24. On the climb up through the difficult forest from Sota Seter the sun broke through the mist.

25. Heading up the high Tverrådalen valley towards the monolith of Tverrådalskyrkja, 2088m.

After an hour we climbed out of the treeline onto the bare hillside and got some atmospheric views up the main valley where the mist still lingered below us. The snow here was much better now with a firm base and last night’s new snow lying on top. It was as it should be. A quick traverse across the hillside took us further up into the slightly hanging valley of Tverrådalen. This side valley drained the north side of the huge block of mountain which was Tverrådalskyrkja and it dominated the landscape rising well above anything else. It was a flat valley full of frozen lakes and good snow and we made great progress. Further up the valley forked and we took the SE fork climbing steeply across boulders to reach Steindalen. I had been here before a few times and I can never remember so little snow. Previously I could ski where I wanted, but now we had to pick our way through boulder fields. We continued to follow the 3 Norwegians tracks keeping west of the hollows the small lakes lay in until we reached the snout of the glacier where we stopped for a snack just as the three Norwegians were departing. It was a great spot just beneath the mountain. I had been here 25 years ago and climbed the mountain and recognised the spot where I climbed off the glacier to gain the ridge. That spot was now 25 vertical meters above the glacier showing just how fast they were disappearing.

26. Looking up the steep crevassed glacier which tumbles down the east side of Tverrådalskyrkja mountain.

27. The three Norwegians, Terje, Erik and Anders heading up Fortundalsbreen glacier to cross over it. We followed in their tracks

The climb up the smooth convex slope of the glacier was wonderful. The sun shone on us out of a blue sky with just the odd mist swirling in the corries of the mountain. As we climbed to the west of a small hill called Sveinkollen I saw the ice walls of a wind carved bowl called Hekse Gryte. I remember these ice walls some 40-50 metres high years ago but now they just seemed 10 metres high as the height of the glacier reduced. At the crest of the glacier the view to the south slowly unfolded and the tops of the Hurrungane range, perhaps Norway’s most Alpine mountains appeared. With every step they got bigger and bigger with their jagged profile soon in full glory. They were a little lost in the mist but you could still make out all the features including the massive U between the mountains of Store Ringstind and Austanbotntind. Further to the east I could see Store Bjorn in the heart of Jotunheimen. We paused to admire it all before the long descent.

28. At the top of Fortundalsbreen glacier looking south to the giants of Hurrungane. The infamous Store Skagastølstind is the highest in the middle.

Initially the convex descent was slow but soon speeded up and we had to take wide swings. One of the Norwegians, Terje, had headed straight down doing the most graceful set of Telemark turns all the way to the bottom. The other two were also excellent. Stuart and myself on the other hand were much more cautious and took long diagonal runs across the glacier with a snow plough turn before starting the next diagonal descent. After half an hour we were at the snout and at the start of a long section of piles of moraine which the retreating glacier had left behind.

Skiing through these drumlins and small gullies was a real challenge. The three Norwegians made a route, and it was excellent, but we made heavy work of it. Stuart fell a fair bit in the heavy sugar snow which was rotting in the midday afternoon sun and it was exhausting getting up as there was no purchase to press up against other than your rucksack, which you have to take off. I skied very cautiously on the unpredictable surface and also fell at least 5 times. After a frustrating 3 hours we eventually made it to the lake and then across it more easily to reach the dam.

29. Stuart sking down the end of the glacier and reaching the morraine debris in Nørdstedalen which led down to the lake and cabin.

It was now 1700 and we still had 3 km of buried road to ski along to reach the cabin. Although all of the road was covered in large drifts and completely buried it was marked with poles and these allowed us to judge the gradients which otherwise would have been hidden in the flat light. It took us another hour to get near the cabin which lay on the far side of a tricky ravine. In a normal year we could have just skied straight across this on drifts but now we had to pick a crossing some 30 metres lower down and climb back up again.

The main cabin at Nørdstedalseter was serviced and it was closed. However there was a small self service cabin on a knoll beside it. The three Norwegians were already there and they warmly welcomed us. It had two bedrooms and a nice living space/kitchen area. They cooked pasta for us and we supplied the desert all from the provisions in the cabin. It was a very easy going and convivial evening in great company. The Norwegians were not only great skiers and able sportsmen but also very accomplished in life, and Terje was a professor in climate change at Oslo University.

30. Leaving the small new self service cabin at Nørdsteddalseter in the morning.

Day 08. Nørdstedalseter to Prestesteinshytte. 25 km. 10 hours. 1030m up. 700 m down. The three Norwegians were up and away early. They had a monster day to Skogadalsboen; something we were splitting into two. I knew the day was longer than the touted 20 km to the main road, but was a bit blasé about it, so we set off relatively late at 0930 after cleaning the cabin. The rotten snow of yesterday was now frozen firm as the temperature was minus 5 in the night. It made for a fast climb away from the cabin with our thicker skins on. However, to counteract this there was not as much snow as I remembered twice previously and the normal way up the river was a little blocked with rocky ravines and steep drifts. We decided to follow the 3 Norwegians who went up some very steep and icy slopes. It was slow and exhausting as you were always tense. The Norwegians had full ski skins over the whole length and sauntered up the bits we struggled on due to our shorter skins. What should have taken an hour ended up taking 3.

31. Heading up Vesldalen east of Nørdsteddalseter cabin in gnarly terrain.

32. Looking back down Vesldalen after climbing past the more difficult area. Nørdsteddalseter is far below in the valley.

Eventually we made it out of the clutches of Vetledalen and reached the higher lakes of Grønevatnet. Here the ski became much easier and we climbed from basin to basin up great snow in sunnier weather with good light. When we reached Liabreenvatnet, with the much diminished Liabreen glacier flowing right into it, the snow was superb and Stuart shot off on his skis, getting a great glide. I had to change skins and lost half a kilometre on him. Two snow scooters came towards us and they were National Park Rangers looking for wolverine. They had not seen any that day. The left us great trails to follow beyond the lake and up to the highest pass of the day at about 1600 metres. From the top was another great view to the mountains around the two glaciated basins of Lierbreen and Smorstabbbreen. These mountains were not as dramatic as the Hurrungane mountains but were still very spectacular.

33. Stuart in front of the Smorstabb Massif on the descent to Storevatnet.

We now started what was to be the greatest challenge of the day, the descent to Storevatnet. We followed the snow scooter tracks down gentle slopes initially but they soon became steeper and we had to zig zag widely. The trouble was the light was going and it was overcast and the snow just had no definition to it. If there was a small drift or ridge you could not see it until you hit it. I fell some 5 times and Stuart a bit more. Once he went over a small unseen cornice and was airborne for a metre before crashing down in a heap. It was very tiring and frustrating and the nearer it got to the lake the worse the visibility became. It was with great relief when we were finally on the lake.

The lake itself was superb and we found the scooter tracks and followed them to the dam making great time. The skins we had on the bottom of the skis were perfect now and allowed a great glide. At the dam I went to the west end. Here I made a mistake and followed the route I previously used across the small lakes below to the dam and then up to a hydro electric hut. However this year that route was very undulating and the snow had not filled in all the obstacles. We should have gone to the east end of the dam and then along the snow covered road to the hydro electric hut. The mistake cost a good half hour – half an hour we could ill afford as it was already 1730 when we reached thIs hut.

It was now a more simple ski up the snow covered track for a good 5 kilometres to a shallow pass. Thank God there were the snow scooter tracks here to follow as they made travel across the snow’s surface much easier. It still took a good hour to reach the pass by which time dusk was upon us. The descent down the other side was relatively short and the large poles to mark the way guided us down across easier and shallow ground until at the last light we reached the Riksveg 55, the infamous Sognefjellsveien, one of the most scenic mountain roads in Norway on account its views. The road was completely closed and in places buried under drifts 5 metres high. We donned head torches and followed it west for 1.5 km keeping between the snow poles which defined the edge of the road for when the snow plough eventually clear it for the 1st of May.

After 1.5 kilometres on the road we headed down towards Prestesteinvatnet Lake where I had already arranged a private hut to stay in. It was a relief to see it appear in the torch light however we still had to dig extensively for 20 minutes to find the key box buried in the snow. However we were in by 2000 after an epic day. There was a small porch on the front of the hut and I had to shovel more snow from here to allow the main door to open. Unfortunately a fox had been using this drift as a sheltered toilet for much of the winter and the snow was filthy with its pee and faeces. It was the only spade we had and it was a little tarnished now. I could only plunge it into clean snow 50 times to clean it as this was the same spade we used to dig blocks of snow to melt water to drink. Once in the very cold hut we got the stove going and the gas on melting water and after 3 hours it was homely. We eventually went to bed at 2300, both shattered after the hardest day yet.

Back

September 1, 2025

Day 119. 05 September. Msata to Bagamoyo. 71 km. 5 Hours. 360m up. 600m down. The lodge gave me a huge breakfast, including a portion of goat stew to go with the omelette. The owner came and introduced himself as I was leaving. He was a retired Brigadier General in the Tanzania army who built this lodge on leaving the army. He was a large, gentle, affable soul who I could not imagine leading troops into guerilla warfare. Once I left the lodge I had to cycle the 2 kilometres north on the T2 into the centre of Msata to a T junction. The main T2 continued north and connected to virtually the whole of north Tanzania and also Kenya. The road I wanted was the T35 and it met the T2 here at Msata. Unfortunately it was nowhere near as quiet as I hoped as all the traffic from the north of Tanzania and Kenya came down the T2 but then left it here if they were going to Dar-es-Salem, which most were, and followed the T35. It looked like I was going to have to put up with 65 kilometres of traffic. However this road did have a better verge than the T1 and T2 of yesterday.

724. From Msata to Bagamoyo I followed the T35 highway for 65 kilometres. It was quite a fast road but had a tangible verge.

It was not an enjoyable cycle though. The traffic was quite fast and there were many more buses than yesterday and fewer trucks. The trucks were actually a benefit on a road like this as they tended to slow everything up. For the first 30 kilometres or so the landscape was quite dry and barren with few villages or towns enroute. Those that were there lined the road and owed half their existence to selling produce or meals to passing traffic, and then the other half to the meagre agriculture.

725. The villages beside the T35 showed more and more of an Islamic influence with more mosques than churches and many people in Islamic dress.

Slowly as I travelled further east the villages became more prosperous. There was still little agriculture as there was not the necessary water but the crops were according to this like coconuts, teak plantations and even pineapples. The maize in the fields was all harvested and dried and now just fodder for the tended cattle and goats. I passed a huge steel mill beside the road, which was Chinese owned and then dropped down to the Ruvu River as I neared Bagamoyo. I considered the steel mill and how any in the UK or USA, tariffs or not, could really compete with it in this global economy.

726. There was some agriculture around the villages and grazing between them. Here are pineapples growing under teak trees growing under coconut trees at Kiwanga village.

This large river had split into a number of channels as it crossed the coastal floodplain before reaching the sea. It was intensively farmed with well organised rice fields across the plain as far as I could see. There were people working in the fields and many scarecrows to keep the birds off. I saw quite a few kingfishers on the electricity cables, mostly white and black, but one was a huge black one with a rapier beak as long as its body. Beside the river channels were gravel banks where the Maasai herdsmen had gathered their cattle for the afternoon. They were the larger Sanga type of cattle as opposed to the Zebu type and they all had huge horns. I had to pass a few on the road earlier in the last week and although the cattle might be docile the horns were something to avoid and even if the cow was flicking some flies from its head the tips of the horns moved considerably.

727. Towards Bagamoyo the road crossed a number of rivers and grazing areas between them. The were a few herds of the Sangea type breeds about with large horns wich the Maasai favour.

728. There were also many rice fields between the rivers and these fields looked like they irrigated so could produce rice throughout the year not just in the rainy season.

On the other side, the east side of the Ruva valley, the landscape rose very slightly to reach an imperceptibly shallow ridge which was the edge of Bagamoyo town. At last after some 4 hours I could get off the T35 highway and dive off down a side street into the town. I was initially very surprised to see the strong Arabian influence. Virtually everybody was dressed in long islamic robes. They must be very practical for this hot climate but then many women were in burkas which would not be that comfortable, especially black ones, in the heat of the day. There were small mosques on many streets and no signs of any churches. I cycled down for about 15 minutes stopping to look at my phone to home in on the Firefly lodge. As I approached it I came round one corner and saw something turquoise at the end of the street. It then dawned on me it was the sea. It was just at the end of the street and just to confirm it was the sea I saw a couple of white horses. I had to turn off down a side street to get to the Firefly lodge but knew I was getting close.

729. On the beach at Bagamoyo there were lots of small dugout outriggers and larger boats which fished the more protected waters of the Zanzibar Channel between Bagamoyo and Zanzibar Island.

At the Firefly they had a room but it was more expensive than I bargained for and was twice what I had paid anywhere else on the trip so far. It looked like a nice place and potentially full of backpackers. I however decided to check out one other place which was the Millennium Breeze. It was twice the price of the Firefly and seemed to be for rich businessmen from Dar-es-Salem. It was not my scene at all so it was back to the Firefly. Once back I unloaded the panniers into my room, which was only £48, and then went back to the empty bicycle.

I wheeled the bike down through the gardens to the gate at the bottom and opened it onto what I thought was the beach. However it was a thriving and busy fishing village with lots of shacks, hundreds of fisherman and many boats, all side to side along the beach. I managed to tread a route down to near the water. I asked one young guy if he spoke English but they all shook their heads and pointed to a small shack with a young Rastafarian outside. I asked him if he could take some photos and explained why. He told the others and I heard them all exclaiming “Namibia”. I gave the Rastafarian the phone and then carried the bike into the sea, having asked him to take as many photos as possible while I held the bike aloft out of the knee deep salty water of the Indian Ocean. It was the celebratory photo I wanted and he managed to capture some. I thanked him and then returned to the Firefly lodge with squelching shoes.

730. After 5639 kilometres and 40340 metres of ascent I finally reached the Indian Ocean having left the Atlantic Ocean and crossing Africa in 119 days.

The lodge was quite quiet and I carried the bike up to the room and then had a great shower. For once I was not bothered if the water was warm or not as even the tap water was lukewarm. The water however was roasting, scalding even, and I managed to wash everything I needed. I then went down for a burger. By way of celebration I just had a crate full of passion sodas and some icecreams. I had intended to try and catch up with the blog but by the time the sun went down I was tired. After some 5,639 kilometres with over 40,000 metres of ascent and descent I could go to bed knowing I did not have to continue east. I will now spend a couple of days in Bagamoyo finishing the blog so it does not hang over me and then try and get some cardboard and tape to cobble together a bike box so I can book a ticket home in a few days time.

As I went up to the room I noticed what an extraordinary building the Firefly lodge was. From the outside it did not look much at all. There was about 50 metres of street frontage of an old 2 story building which looked tired. In the garden area on the other side of this were a large amount of Bohemian chill out areas each with its own unique day beds and cushioned areas. All of these were around a small clear clean pool. At the bottom of the garden before the gate to the fisherman’s shacks on the beach was a large open area shaded by trees where people could camp in their own vehicles or where the overland lorries with 10 off travellers parked every other night. However the real gem was the house itself. Behind that tired facade was an grand merchants house with cool balconies and huge rooms. There were shuttered windows on each side of the room to allow the sea breezes to pass through and keep the house cool. Upstairs there were perhaps 6 rooms and most were 30 or 40 square metres with high ceilings. When I asked more about the house I found out that the the merchant who lived here dealt in slaves up to just over 150 years ago and long after the Atlantic slave trade was banned in 1807 On the East coast of Africa the slave trade still flourished for another 50 years, with the Arabs of Zanzibar shipping slaves to the Middle East. The merchants here at Bagamoyo bought slaves which had been captured from the interior, and shipped them to Zanzibar where they were sold on. David Livingstone was instrumental in getting this East African slave trade banned in 1873 by lobbying the British and French governments and this is part of the reason he is reverred in East Africa.

Day 118. 04 September. Morogoro to Msata. 111 km. 9 Hours. 1110m up. 1360m down. After a restful day at Mama Pierina’s lodge in Morogoro I was ready for the final stretch. I was not really looking forward to it. There was little I could do to avoid the main road without going on unknown footpaths. Initially I had 20 kilometres of the Old-Dar es-Salam road which was not consumed by the building of the New Dar-es-Salem road or the T1 highway. It was essentially a continuation of the road I had been on from Kipera to Morogoro a few days ago. It took me a few kilometres to get out of the city with ever diminishing traffic until there were just tuk tuks and motorbikes left. To the south were the Uluguru Mountains which rose steeply, their heads buried in the low cloud on this overcast morning. These lofty summits, some 2 kilometres above me, caught rain from the winds coming off the Indian Ocean and apparently there was never a month there was no precipitation up there. The streams which came down its jungle-clad slopes nourished agriculture at the mountain’s base. Without these mountains there would not be anything like this level of agriculture or population.

714. Leaving Morogoro city and looking south towards the high jungle clad peaks of the Uluguru Mountains.

715. Leaving Morogoro and looking north over some homesteads to the flat drier savannah.

To the north of the track I was on was a more arid plain which did not have the benefit of the mountain streams. It had to rely on the seasonal rains to nourish the crops during the wet months from November to March. After 15 kilometres or so I reached the village of Pangawe. Here there was a small river from the mountains which was diverted into the rice fields, and even at this time at the end of the dry season there was enough water to irrigate the rice and crops which were growing beside the track. I stopped here just to see the rest of the way towards the main T1 road and have a soda. My route from here was on a track which got smaller and smaller until it was a footpath. This then went under the new electric railway connecting Morogoro with Dar-es-Salem and finally rose up to the main road. My rural sojourn was over.

716. To the east of Morogoro there were some hamlets blessed with streams and springs from the Uluguru Mountains which allowed farming, even rice farming, throughout the year.

717. The track through the village of Pangawe to the east of Morogoro and halfway between it and joining the busy T1 main road.

As soon as I was on the road my attitude changed. I was no longer ambling along, curious at my surroundings and stopping to look at things. I was now on a mission to get through the next 45 kilometres unscathed on the T1 highway. No sooner had I crossed the road to the east bound side a convoy of some 15 lorries all rumbled past their wheels spinning quite slowly, but with unstoppable force, just a meter or a meter and a half away. The lorries moved so slowly it took them 4-5 seconds to overtake me and I could see what they were carrying, from sacks of rice and maize, to half a million dollars of copper plate. The lorries however were predictable, slow, lumbering beasts similar to those giant herbivorous dinosaurs, like a herd of brontosaurus. Once they passed came the intercity buses, desperate to keep a timetable and pick up passengers before their rivals did. They were eager and frustrated and flew along like a hungry Tyranosaurous Rex looking for a meal. These beasts were the real danger on the road and I was constantly looking in my mirror to see when they were approaching and then I would go off the road verge and sometimes even onto the earth beside it.

718. I had to cycle along the T1 main road for about 43 km between Mkambarani and Ubenazomozi. The real problem was not the well driven trucks but the long distance buses and the 4×4, especially those with government number plates.

719. Beside the T1 main road there were many market places selling fruit and vegetables all stacked in pyramids with colourful ladies at the stalls.

It was an unpleasant 45 kilometres and I was frequently looking at my odometer counting down the distance. The only redeeming feature of the road were the roadside markets and stalls every 2-5 kilometres. Here the road builders had widened the road to allow for lorries to rest but the locals had commandeered the rest places to sell their produce. When a lorry or car did stop here it parked on the verge so I would have to wait until the carriage way was clear before overtaking. During the 2-3 hours I did not really stop and take any photos, but was just on a mission to get to the turn off as soon as possible. Eventually I reached Ubenazomozi and was able to pull off the road and find a cafe. Here I ordered chips and eggs, a popular meal like a chip omelette.

720. At Ubenazomozi I left the main T1 main road and headed NE on a small road. At Ubenazomozi I stopped for a chip omelette in a local cafe.

I still had another 50 kilometres to go today but the next section was on a small gravel road. It was the long side of a triangle or hypotenuse between two tarmac highways. It was great to be able to relax and look around again. I could veer into the middle of the track if I wanted, and stop at will to take photos. Sleepy hamlets appeared and herders followed their animals up the middle of the road. This is what cycling in Africa should be about and the previous stressful 3 hours was really just a link between rural sections which I had to grin and bear. This track however was anything but flat and as the afternoon passed it got extremely hot. Some of the longer climbs in the lowest gear were very taxing and there was just some small relief at the top with a cooling breeze.

721. The small dirt road from Ubenazomozi and Lugoba was about 30 kilometres and very rural with a few remote villages, mostly of cattle herders.

The hamlets and villages here were quite sparse and I only passed about 3 in the entire distance. There was virtually no agriculture at all and what there was, like long since harvested fields of maize, looked quite half hearted. These hamlets were primarily occupied by Maasai and their cattle, sheep, plus a few goats were grazing here. They have a disdain for agriculture and to be fair this land did not look that suitable for it. The Maasai houses here were different to the ones I had seen for most of the trip and made out of bricks. Here the houses were constructed from a wooden framework of sticks which were lashed or woven together in a framework leaving apertures of about 20 by 10 centimetres. These apertures were then filled with a clod of mud smeared onto and encompassing the sticks. It looked much easier, faster but much more temporary and short-lived than the brick houses elsewhere. Many had corrugated roofs and the rest grass roofs. The area around the houses was also quite barren and dusty with no flowers or shrubs planted. There were quite a few motorbikes on this stretch and most had Maasai tribesmen on them with their crimson and red robes flowing in the wind behind them. I assumed they were going from their homes to their herds to watch over them for a spell and relieve the others who were already there.

722. The architecture of the herders houses between Ubenazomozi and Lugoba was different and it was mud daubed on a wooden framework. The were few brick houses on this stretch.

After 3 hours on this small track I reached Lugoba at 1700 in the afternoon. It was getting late but I still had 2 hours of daylight to do the final 15 kilometres up to Msata. This was another large road, the T2, although it was nowhere as busy as the T1. At Lugoba there were dozens of trucks already parked up for the evening and at first glance it made a frightening sight. However, as I left the town I saw very few lorries and buses and even the cars and 4X4 were not that frequent. The road was reasonably flat and the small breeze was now behind me so I made good time up the dull road. The only excitement came when I had to cycle through an area where the grasses were burning at the side of the road and the flames were 2-3 metres high. Apart from having to hold my breath as I passed the smoke the heat was terrific. I reached the lodge I had earmarked at 1800 quite exhausted. However they had great showers and also large portions. There was no way I was going to write anything in the evening as I was too tired and put it off until after I had finished in Bagamoyo.

723. At Lugoba I left the small gravel road and joined the T2 highway. It was much quieter than the T1. I followed it for 15 kilometres in all.

Day 117. 03 September. Morogoro Rest Day. 0 km. 0 Hours. 0m up. 0m down. I was a bit behind with my writing and generally felt a bit tired. I had a cough which I was sure was from the dust of the earth roads and the dry air, and occasional fumes from roadside fires or passing trucks. So last night when I was in the warm shower in the spacious room in the quiet tranquil guesthouse I decided to spend another day. When morning came I was quite relaxed and had a lazy breakfast chatting with Dimitrea.

After breakfast I went to look at the airlines which flew from Dar-es-Salem to Edinburgh, and of which ones could take a bike. It seemed that KLM, Emirates and Turkish Airlines were the only contenders, and of these KLM had the best times without a long wait at their hub in Dubai or Istanbul respectively.

With that research done I then turned to the blog. I was reasonably up to date anyway but I could just not get started on yesterday, and had some sort of writer’s block which I eventually overcame as I started bashing away on the keyboard. Perhaps the greatest curse of this trip was writing the blog. If I was too tired I simply could not do it and then that would mean I would have 2 or perhaps even 3 days to do at once in the near future. This would entail a day off, which to be fair my body also needed especially if there was a 100 km or 1000 metre ascent day previously.

713. The lovely tranquil gardens of the quiet Mama Pierina hotel in the middle of Morogoro was an easy place to spend a rest day before the final push.

I had it finished by dinner and then could chat to the other 2 guests in the evening. However blog or not I always felt tired and ready for bed around 2100. I felt a bit guilty I had not even left the hotel compound all day as I am sure Morogoro was a city well worth exploring. Tomorrow I would start the final 180 kilometres, a good proportion of which was on larger main roads, which I was not looking forward to that much but needed to do if I was to have a continuous journey under my own stream.

Day 116. 02 September. Doma to Morogoro. 75 km. 7.5 Hours. 620m up. 640m down. There was no breakfast at the Kilimsuli Lodge, and that was perhaps a good thing as it was pretty filthy. However, there was fried chipatis and hot water for coffee in the roadside restaurants nearby. I had 3 chipatis and 2 of my own coffees and was ready to go by 0900. As I was packing up Cheng appeared from his room wheeling his fully packed bike down the narrow corridor. He was just going a short distance today so I said goodbye and wheeled my bike across the busy T1 road to the east side and then found the road to Msongozi. I cycled down it and after 50 metres I was already in a different world where the stench of diesel and fried foods and the noise of the traffic was soon forgotten as tomato fields appeared on each side of the track.

It was about 14 km to Msongozi on a rough stony track, no different to the ones I had been on for the last 2 weeks really. I was quite surprised how arid it was all of a sudden and apart from the irrigated tomato fields and some maize fields everything was brown and parched. There were quite a few baobab trees on the undulating hillsides and this is always a sign that the climate is dry most of the time. There was a village after a few kilometres but it looked quite poor but with plenty of bougainvillea bushes to brighten up the single dusty street. Women in headscaves and one even in a full burkha carried large yellow water buckets on their heads from the various hand pumps back to their relatively small brick houses. The men were almost suspicious as I cycled through and there were no shouts and the silence was a bit unnerving. It was one of the very few places in Africa where I was not a welcome novelty. After a good kilometre I was through the village and then heading down the gentle hill on the other side.

705. Leaving Doma for Msongozi i initially passed through a strongly muslim village where there was a lot of vegetables grown, especially tomatoes.

Soon I saw cattle in the fields and a few Maasai in their traditional robes and sandals tending them. There all had a large knife and also their club, or rungu. This club was a 50 centimetre long stick which had a lump at the end and would be a formidable weapon. As I passed the Maasai they always waved and smiled. They had a confidence which the muslim inhabitants of the last village lacked. I expect that down the millennia of looking after cattle they have had to protect them from predators and thieves and as a result are quite ready to fight. I think today in Tanzania they easily find work as security guards and watchmen if they are not herding anymore.

As I left the irrigated fields of the muslim village the landscape became very dry and there was no greenery at all. The leaves on the small trees and shrubs all seemed to have dropped off and I think this was the vegetation’s strategy of coping with the dry season. It was essentially to shut down as deciduous trees do in the temperate zones of the Northern Hemisphere. In the occasional dry river course there were tall coconut trees and other green trees which must have had their roots into the moisture, deep in the sand. Before I reached Msongozi I passed another village where the people were much more friendly and there was plenty of “how are you” shouted as I went past, by kids and men alike.

706. The smaller village, I think called Kibungo, which was just west of Msongozi. The village was friendly and there were some Maasai herdsmen here.

After a good hour I reached Msongozi. It was a village a little lost on an isolated plain at least 14 kilometres from the main road. It was very much a sleepy farming village and there was a curious plant, a 2 meter high bush, which bore pea type pods growing everywhere. I looked them up later and found out they were called pigeon peas and they grew on perennial bushes. This and the irrigated vegetables seemed to be the main crops, but I saw fields of harvested maize and sunflowers. Maasai were tending their cattle and sheep as they grazed on the stubble. The village had a population of a couple of thousand inhabitants and it also had a small hospital or health clinic. I paused for a drink here and chatted with the shop owner before moving on.

707. The larger village of Msongozi was based on irrigated agriculture and also the tall legumes bushes producing “pigeon peas”. It was quite remote with the way I had just come for 14 kilometres as the lifeline to the world.

For the next 20 odd kilometres I turned north now and headed up the Melela Mlandizi. The route on a rough road took me through a very inhospitable landscape. The trees were mostly bare and the ground cover virtually non-existent. The earth was a reddish brown and looked sterile. The only redeeming feature was the towering Uluguru Mountains to the east which looked very high and towered over everything but they were some distance away still, and looked lost in the haze. As I cycled north in this near alien landscape I passed a few small mines. I was not sure if they were mining for minerals or they were quarries for a white stone, possibly quartzite. After a few undulations I reached the roadside town of Melela Mlandizi and cycled up the side street where Maasai herders had parked their motorbikes and were sitting outside various groceries drinking soda. I joined a group at one and chatted with them and was pleased to see they were in awe of my nomadic cycle across Africa. At the end of the street I could see lorries roar past like roving dinosaurs and knew I would soon be amongst them.

708. My rural sojourn came to an end at Melela Mlandizi where there was a small roadside town through which the main T1 road and all its traffic passed. I had to follow the T1 for 10 kilometres next.

For the next 10 kilometres I had to cycle on the main road as there was no option. However I was pleasantly surprised that there was something of a verge and the lorries were nowhere nearly as frequent as I feared. Furthermore there was a gentle downhill run so I got up quite a bit of speed and covered the first half in about 15 minutes. On the other side of the road were larger parking areas and there were Maasai tribesmen trying to coax drivers, especially lorry drivers, into them, where there were large cuts of meat displayed on sticks for sale. Much of it looked like the shoulder of a sheep or goat. After 10 kilometres I reached an uphill climb on a long sweeping bend and could then escape the main road and head off to the SE on a smaller dirt road down to the small town of Kipera.

709. After 10 kilometres on the main T1 road I could escape again and go down to Kipera and along the base of the mountains on an older minor road for 30 kilometres to reach Morogoro city.

As I bounced down the earth road for 5 kilometres or so to Kipera I suddenly noticed just how close the Uluguru Mountains now were. While they were still in the haze they loomed large above the town. Their highest peaks were around 2500 metres, some 2 kilometres higher than I was. These mountains were a barrier to the moisture laden ocean winds and forced the air to rise creating rain. I read that it can rain in any month of the year up there on the high montane clad peaks and that meant that the streams which flowed down from their heights could irrigate all year round. There was plenty of evidence to see that was the case and there were fields of maize growing well under coconut trees and these fields were being watered by people with large hosepipes.

710. On the route down to Kipera on the earthen road I passed a few hamlets and fields and some coconut groves.

711. Before reaching Kipera I passed coconut groves under which were large fields of irrigated maize watered by hose from streams coming off the adjacent Uluguru Mountains.

Once at Kipera I had another stop and was thrilled to see that there was now smooth tarmac. I assumed this would be the case for the next 20 kilometres as I followed what was the Old Dar-es-Salem Road. It went past a few large training colleges and a hospital and was bustling with pedestrians, cyclists, motorbikes and tuk tuks. However after some 5 kilometres the road veered off to the main highway and I now had 20 kilometres of quite bumpy track along the base of the mountains all the way to the outskirts of Morogoro. Although the road was in poor shape and quite narrow it was reasonably busy as it passed a large army camp, an animal research centre with many cows and even a few camels and finally a University. It took nearly 3 hours from leaving the main highway to complete the 30 kilometres and finally reach the large city of Morogoro.

712. Passing through Kipera under the Uluguru Mountains my hopes were raised by a lovely tarmac stretch but this soon reverted to bumpy dirt for another 15 kilometres all thr way to Morogoro city.

Morogoro has a population of over half a million inhabitants and was the biggest city I had been in since Lilongwe in Malawi, which I just passed through. However Morogoro looked quite wealthy with a few taller buildings of 10 stories or more. Because of the now looming Uluguru Mountains the plains around it are well watered and there is a thriving agriculture to support the population. With the training colleges and the University it felt more sophisticated than anything else I had been in since Windhoek. There are also good train links, including a new electric train, to Dar-es-Salem less than two hours away. I imagine people often come up here from this major port to escape the heat and turmoil. I cycled through the city on wider roads and round a couple of roundabouts homing in on Mama Pierina, a recommended mid range hotel. I navigated using Google Maps as I was on the old quiet Dar es-Salem Road and not the truck laden highway, which bypassed the old city centre to the north through more modern suburbs. I found the hotel quite easily and met Dimetria, the welcoming owner. She was of Greek and Italian parents and had been running the hotel for decades since she inherited it from her parents. I got a nice room for 40000 shillings, (£12) with a large table and great hot water. Dimetria was about my age and quite a character with perfect English. There were a few other white travellers at the hotel and I felt very much at home. I had not seen another European since the disabled centre at Ikonda at least 2 weeks ago. Once settled in I decided to spend a rest day here and write the blog tomorrow, so after a dinner of genuine moussaka I went to bed without doing any digital chores.

Day 115. 01 September. Mikumi to Doma. 53 km. 3 Hours. 240m up. 220m down. I had arranged to have breakfast at 0700 and went up for it then, and it was ready. It was good with plenty of hibiscus flower fruit juice, fresh fruit and eggs on toast. The Mukumi Lodge and Resort was just right for £25 for dinner, bed and breakfast. I still had the blog to do from yesterday so went back to my room at 0800 and typed for the next 2 hours until checkout time. There was no worthwhile signal here so I did not waste time trying to upload it.

I had spoken to the manager the evening before and he said the main T1 road was the best way to get to Dar-es-Salem or Bagamoyo. He gave me an assurance there was a good verge, he said the lorries only travel by night and he said the other way I was considering was much longer. I took his word and assurance with a pinch of salt and as it turned out he was speaking nonsense, but I had already made up my mind to go through the park to Doma and then the small roads which different cyclists told me about. Once I left I weaved through the sandy side streets of Mikumi for a good kilometre before reaching the tarmac T1. Here the manager’s assurances all fell by the wayside as there was a queue of lorries waiting to go through a roadblock and the verge was a broken shambles with a ragged edge.

700. At the entrance to Mikumi National Park there were many signs encouraging drivers to keep their speed down for the next 50 kilometres.

However, as soon as I left the town I entered Mikumi National Park and there were large signs saying the speed limit was 70 km per hour in the day, and 50 km per hour in the night and there were fines for not adhering to it. There were also signs for fines if you hit and killed an animal and some of these were a lot. The cheapest was a guinea fowl at US$150 and the most expensive was a giraffe at US$15,000. This would have been a huge amount of money to a Tanzanian. As I entered the National Park I noticed the traffic was adhering to the speed limit, especially the trucks.

I did not see anything except for a couple of warthogs for the first few kilometres and then suddenly there was a giraffe at the side of the road. As I watched it another 2 crossed the road and joined it and then as a truck was coming in the opposite direction another darted across the road and the truck had to stop quite sharply. If it was going any faster it would have hit the giraffe and been severely out of pocket. I watched them for about 5 minutes aware they might be the last wildlife I would see.

701. There were quite a few giraffe in Mikumi National Park. This group of 4 were beside the road near Mikumi town

I noticed that the trucks would come along in convoys with about 3-10 in each batch. Then there would be nothing for about 5 minutes before the next lot came. It made it quite easy to navigate the road and when I saw a convoy approaching in my mirror I pulled right over to the side and let them pass. Most gave me good space but I could never be sure there was not an intercity bus or a 4×4, both of which were more gung ho, overtaking them and preventing them from giving me space. The road surface for me was quite fast and I managed to keep an average speed of around 20 km per hour. It was mostly due to the flat road and the lack of headwind. There were a few more animals I saw, notably gazelle and baboons. The latter were quite road savvy and looked up and down first and then ventured alongside the road to see if there were any morsels discarded.

702. The were many baboons beside the road in the Mikumi National Park looking for discarded food I think. The were quite traffic savvy and quite confident when I went past.

On each side of the road the grass had been burnt. I am sure this was deliberate to prevent a fire spreading from one side to the other. The fires would have been set earlier in the year when it was not so dry and then probably with a fire crew in attendance as I saw in Botswana. If there was a fire now there was a good 40 metres on each side with no grass. Beyond this scorched area there was taller dry grass, perhaps a metre high and slowly swaying in the thermals and breezes. I am sure there were gazelle hidden here and there, and also perhaps lions although I should imagine they would be much further from the road.

703. There were also quite a few gazelle in the park and I alo saw wildebeast and buffalo a little distance from the road.

I did also see some buffalo and some wildebeast but they were some distance from the road. About half way there was a main gate into the park where visitors would have to pay a fee to drive in. From what I had seen so far this was not a prime park by any means and a poor substitute for Chobe in Botawana or South Luangwe in Zambia. The brown arid landscaper looked very uninviting and it did not look like it would sustain many herbivores. As I travelled further east it got even drier and there were more and more baobab trees appearing. I passed one huge tree whose lower branches were grazed in a perfectly flat line. There were 10 giraffes sheltering from the sun under its vast canopy. Much quicker than I thought I reached the east edge of the park after 50 kilometres and I knew that the roadside town of Doma was just after this. In the last two kilometres the road did not improve and the verge was still very poor, however the traffic remained quite slow.

704. At the east side of the park nearer the town of Doma I saw 10 giraffe sheltering from the sun under the canopy of a vast tree.

Doma was just a roadside stop. It had a large vegetable, tomato and sweet potato essentially, at the west end in some dusty patches beside the road. Then the town itself started with a collection of shanties and these graduated to a row of local fast food outlets. Every restaurant was just selling chips and small chunks of meat barbecued on a stick over a charcoal fire. There must have been 10 such restaurants on each side and none looked very alluring. There were trucks, cars, motorbikes and 4X4’s parked up along the widened street. There was a single guesthouse here called the Kilimsuli Lodge and I had already earmarked it as a place to stay.

There was a Swiss cyclist, Joerg, who had been a week to two weeks ahead of me ever since Livingstone in Zambia. I had picked his brains in the last few days and he gave me some good tips about riding along the T1 main road. He said that Mikumi National Park was tolerable because the traffic was slow and the unpleasantness of nose to tail lorries was offset by the sightings of animals. However after Doma he said it was terrible and gave me a few alternatives. It was due to these alternatives Joerg mentioned that gave me the confidence to come this way as I knew the manager at the lodge last night was quite naive and a bit clueless about my questions, as I suspected he might be. If it was not for Joerg I would have gone a different but longer way via Kilosa, Mziha and Mbwewe. It was only 1400 in the afternoon but my aim this afternoon was to plot the exact route and send it to my gadgets.

As I went down the slight lane and pulled the brakes at the Kilimsuli Lodge another cyclist arrived 5 seconds later. He was Cheng and had been cycling for the last 18 months from China, around SE Asia, then Nepal and now a great circular trip in Africa. He had also just come from Mikumi and was going to Dar-es-Salem but he was now going slowly as he had 14 days to do 300 kilometres. We both took a room and then went for some chicken and chips in one of the many restaurants and swapped tales. I then went back to the room and had a snooze. When I woke I spent about 3 hours plotting my route to Msata and then to Bagamoyo where I will finish. It is about 200 kilometres to Masta and of that I will have 50 on the T1 Highway in two different sections, and 150 km on smaller roads which is as good as I hoped. Once this was done I knocked on Cheng’s door but there was no answer so I wrote the blog and hoped I would see him in the morning before I went off on a tiny road to the east.

Day 114. 31 August. Ifakara to Mikumi. 109 km. 8 Hours. 710m up. 460m down. After breakfast, where I was reprimanded for taking two eggs, I packed and set off just after 0900. I did not really have a goal for the day and would just let it unfold as I went. I carried on north through the rest of Ifakara and then after a few kilometres of busy urban traffic, mostly motorbikes and tuk tuks, I got to a roundabout on the very fringe of town. After going round it I suddenly found myself on a beautiful, flat, smooth tarmac road with a large shoulder. It was relatively quiet also. I had forgotten how quick new tarmac was and I was blasting along at 20 km per hour with the tyres back up to 40 PSI. At one specially constructed bus stop was the police officer who interviewed me yesterday. I had a quick chat with her and said I had put my account of the crash on my blog if she wanted the address. She said that because I did not see the crash it was of limited use and they are pursuing another line of inquiry.

Although the road was generally quiet with vehicles, the verge was busy with cyclists and pedestrians. Many were heading off to the various churches. Everybody was dressed up and looking smart. The women on their older “sit up and beg” bicycles looked elegant in their flowing dresses and a scarf wrapped around their neck and trailing in the wind like a Parisian. The men were in their suits and with polished shoes. I suppose all over the world people try and look their best for Sunday services and nowhere more so than Africa. I did hear some singing but in general the churches were a distance from the road. I had been told the best choirs and singing belong to the T.A.G. congregations and this is the Tanzania Assemblies of God, which is a fairly prolific church here.

693. Looking east across the vast Kilombero Plain to the hills on the other side. Each edge of the plain was cultivated but the centre with the flood prone channels was the real of wild animals.

As I headed out of town the superb road climbed a small ridge and I could get a view over the Kilombero Plain to the east. It was the lower or eastern half of the vast plain, split into two by the protrusion of a higher wedge of land at Ifakara. I could see the hills on the other side and I could see the vast floodplain between. It seemed there was agriculture on each side of this plain but in the middle there was a brown area where the channels were and it was liable to flood and this was where the wildlife was. There was a large lodge built in the style to cater for western tourists, with thatched cabins and a large open sided central dining area, also under thatch, about to open.

694. East of the road were many villages before the agricultural land on the Kilombero Plain. There were many vegetable nurseries here bring on seedlings to transplant.

It was initially quite dry and parched here but as I cycled north the Udzungwa Mountains started to approach from the left hand side (north west) as they got closer so the landscape got greener. I think this was primarily due to the small streams which tumbled down their flanks and then flowed under the road and across the plain to reach the channels of the Kilombero River. The mountains rose so abruptly from the plain the air hitting them was forced to rise would have condensed releasing any moisture. The whole escarpment was verdant green and as I approached its main ramparts got even lusher with everything dripping in vegetation. I passed some lovely small vegetable plots on the side valley floors here which looked like they were nurseries, with the thriving small vegetables ready to be transplanted to larger gardens or fields when they were robust.

695. The Udzungwa Mountains rose steeply on the west side of the road for most of the day. Much of it was a national park.

I also passed a sign with an elephant and an European Union flag on it and was curious about it. While I was taking a photo an man in camouflage came up to me and explained what it was. There was a large underpass under the road and fences on each side of the road funnelling into the underpass on each side. He explained this was a wildlife corridor which connected the Udzungwa Mountains on the west side with the vast Nyerere National Park on the east side, beyond the Kilonbero Floodplain across which there was also a wildlife corridor. He was a ranger and monitored movements. It seemed that elephants used the underpass regularly as it connected the lush, wet mountains with the more arid park and they migrated at certain times of year between the two. I noticed the funnel of fences into the underpass were electric and on the plain side there was lush vegetation, especially sugar cane, out of reach of the elephants and protected by a fence on each side of the corridor.

696. There where many villages between the road and the corporation farmed sugar cane fields south of Ruaha. Most looked similar to this.

The road here was a delight to cycle along after the bumpy dusty roads of the last two weeks. It was quite built up on one side, the east side, where there was a continual series of villages. Beyond them were some small fields and then vast areas of sugar cane. The sugar cane was perhaps hundreds of thousands of hectares as it formed a band about 3-5 kilometres wide and maybe 60-70 long. I saw one factory belching black smoke towards the north of this band, near Ruaha. Here the sweet sappy stems were crushed and then the crushed stems were fed into the furnace to evaporate some of the liquid and turn the sap into syrup or even raw sugar. The sugar industry here was obviously a big employer and it looked like this sustained the population rather than subsistence farming – which I did not see that much of. There was the occasional rice threshing mill but nothing like what I had seen in the 3 days before Ifakara around Mlimba and Mbingu. I guess the sugar estates here had bought or acquired all the farmers’ lands and turned them into employers of their industry.

697. The vast corporate sugar cane fields where part of a huge plantation and a sugar cane factory near Ruaha.

I was getting parched riding in the mid afternoon sun and stopped at a couple of places for a soda. In a lot of the villages there were large gatherings which looked like weddings. It was obviously wedding season as some villages had two parties on this Sunday afternoon. If it was not a wedding then it was a very flamboyant church service. As I went north, and especially around Ruaha I noticed there were more and more muslims, to the extent that the men in a head cap and long flowing shirts and women in headscarves outnumbered those without. However everybody mixed fluently and in the Christian African local grocer I was in there were plenty of Muslim customers. I only passed one mosque where there was a call to prayer and the iman was singing it himself rather than using a scratched gramophone record or digital recording. His voice was powerful but a little out of tune.

698. North of Ruaha the Udzungwa Mountains started to diminish and the sugar cane grew on their lower slopes. I think these were individual cash crop farmers growing it here.

North of Ruaha, where there was a large river across the road, the villages continued for 10 kilometres but then started to peter out. The Udzungwa Mountains started to diminish and withdrew from the roadside. They also looked more arid now and not covered in the lush vegetation as earlier in the day. However the sugar cane was now on both sides of the road in smaller fields. I think these fields were cultivated by private farmers looking for a cash crop, rather than the large estates which employed all its labour. The area was not nearly as densely populated and there were just a few smaller villages scattered about in the undulating fields.

As I left them and headed further north towards Mikumi the road, which was an older tarmac road without the smooth surface and magnificent verges south of Ruaha, started to climb up a forested valley. There had been baboons all day venturing onto the road to retrieve sticks of sugar cane which had fallen from lorries or search for scraps of food but now they thrived in the forest on each side of the road. The stream got smaller and smaller as I climbed until it was eventually dry. The road crossed this stream bed about 10 times, all on very narrow bridges and without any sort of parapet and a 5-10 metre drop onto the rocks or sandbanks on the streambed below. It would have been very easy to cycle or drive off the edge totally unimpeded.

699. There had been baboons along the road all day but as I climbed up a jungle clad valley to the plateau where Mukumi lay the baboons became more numerous.

At the top of this valley the road reached a plateau which it crossed for a few kilometres to reach the larger town of Mikumi. The town sat astride the T1 highway and this might be the reason it has thrived. The highway connects Dar-es-Salem, the biggest port in East Africa, with Tanzania, Zambia, Malawi, Congo and even Rwanda and is busy with nose to tail trucks. I would have to cycle it tomorrow through the Mikumi National Park before escaping on smaller roads to the east as it approached the coast. I had to ride on a two kilometre stretch through the town to reach the Mikumi Lodge and Resort and it was busy and stressful. At last I escaped off it and cycled through sandy lanes, past schools, small shops and houses to reach the lodge. I had hoped to find more people here but I was the only guest. I got a lovely welcome drink of hibiscus and melon which was so cold it gave me a small headache after 5 glasses. I then got a nice cabin with copious amounts of hot water. I sat on my own in the empty restaurant for dinner. Despite a coffee I could not stay awake to write and went to bed early at 2100 under the novel mosquito net. The lodge was good value and I suspect the western safari type guests were at one of the more expensive lodges in town.

Back

August 15, 2025

Day 113. 30 August. Mbingu to Ifakara. 62 km. 6 Hours. 210m up. 220m down. I was up at 0700 and then went for breakfast. Today the Sisters gave me two pancakes, a large omelette, a bowl of fried plantains and as much milky coffee as I wanted. It was exactly what I wished for. I packed up soon afterwards and then left at 0830. Initially I went to see if I could see anything of the large convent next door but it was all behind closed gates. There was not even a sign on the gates to indicate there was a convent here. Not being able to see much I turned round and headed for Mbingu and the main track which was an easy 2 kilometres away. I had let some of the air out of my tyres, and instead of 40 psi I was running them at 30 psi and it made all the difference to smoothing out the stony surface, and I glided along with a spring in my step. The rest day at the retreat had done me the world of good.

687. The unnamed river which drained an arc of the Udzungwa Mountains a little to the north. It crossed the road some 5 km east of Mbingu.

I crossed a bridge over a stagnant stream and then entered Mbingu again. It was quite a scruffy town and it was difficult to imagine that the refined Convent and Retreat was just down the lane. There was another guesthouse in this small town but I did not see it and I don’t think it could have given the Retreat any competition. Before long I was leaving the last of the stalls and heading out into the countryside again. I had only gone about 5 kilometres before I crossed a small girder bridge over a brown river which drained an arc of the Udzungwa Mountains to the north. Just after it was a stretch of irrigated fields, mostly with maize. The maize was planted in many places and a lot of farmers were in these fields weeding their crops. Most were using the digging hoe with the long handle and it was by far the most common form of implement in farming. The next was a slasher which was a curved machete on a sturdy stick which was swung from a height and would go through a 3 centimeter diameter log. Everybody also carried a normal machete and this was used for everything like collecting firewood, harvesting bananas and plantains, and I am sure as some sort of defence but there were no threats here, neither human or animal.

688. The digging hoe is the main farm implement I have seen in the Central and East Southern Africa. The next most popular is the slasher for clearing land.

As I continued east there was a bit of traffic on the road and it was very dusty. The motorbikes kicked a bit up but the larger vehicles were the main culprits. The dust coated all the vegetation beside the road with a reddish brown hue. There was a correlation between how fast a vehicle was going and how much dust it produced and the infrequent 4X4 were the worst. Suddenly I saw one coming towards me going really fast, well over 100 km per hour, which on this road was extreme. There were clouds of dust behind it. I gestured for him to slow down. It was a white Toyota landcruiser, without a roof rack and without letters on the side. I pulled my hoodie up over my mouth and cycled into the cloud. As I cycled through it and it cleared I noticed there was another girder bridge 100 meters ahead.

There was something on the bridge and it seemed strange. As I got closer I realized it was a person lying down. As I approached him he sat up, but seemed totally bewildered. Then I noticed there was a motorbike on its side and jammed into the girders which stopped it going off the edge into the stream below. Then I noticed there was another person at the east end of the bridge and she was an older lady perhaps in her 50 or 60 and she was groaning and on her back. It did not take long to work out what had happened. The landcruiser and motorbike were both travelling in the same direction towards Mbingu and they got to the narrow bridge at the same time. The landcruiser was going much faster and overtook the motorbike and hit it, and as it did so knocked the bike over. It must have known it hit the motorbike and caused the crash but rather than hang around and help as he was morally and legally obliged to do he decided to bolt and hope the motorbike rider and passenger did not recognize the vehicle. It was a hit and run essentially and that is the reason he was going so fast when passed me; to escape the scene.

Within a minute there were a few more motorbikes around and we blocked off each end of the bridge. The motorbike riders went to the two injured people while I and another pulled the motorbike from the girders, got it upright and wheeled it off the bridge. There was soon a bus at each end of the bridge and the passengers went to help. The young man who was the motorbike driver looked like a really strong tough guy but he was a bit bloody on a bare foot and his leg. A few men got him standing and then escorted him over to a motorbike and sat him behind the rider while another passenger got behind him so he could not fall off backwards. He was pinned between two people and then the bike drove off, presumably to the nearby health clinic.

I tried to explain what happened to one man who was early on the scene and was quite involved in the rescue. He was on the phone to someone and I could hear him say “cruiser” a few times. Hopefully he was asking people further west to stop, or at least get the number plate, of the escaping culprit. Google translate did not seem to work that well but I think he had already grasped what had happened. In the meantime they managed to get the older lady onto the back of another motorbike and pinned her between the driver and a passenger. There was a lot of groaning though and she was in pain as if she had broken a limb. I was surprised they did not commandeer one of the minibuses for half an hour to help her to the health clinic. When she had gone there were a few people milling around, but there was little I could do. In fact I had not done that much at all despite being first on the scene. Those who arrived just after me were so efficient, responsible and helpful, and knew Swahilli, that it made me redundant. The only person who acted shamefully was the culprit who fled in his landcruiser.

689. The homesteads here were not so sheltered from the sun and where not so overhung by large trees.

The whole scenario played on my mind a bit for the next hour and I could think of little else as I went through a few villages. In one of them I saw one of the main helpers and we greeted each other. Soon though it started to recede from the forefront of my mind and I began to observe the landscape again. The Udzungwa Mountains were now a long way to the north and I was well onto the floodplain and in the middle of an intensive rice growing area. There was no rice at the moment but there were plenty of ponds of water beside the road and tiny trickles in the stream but not enough to irrigate rice. Its cultivation here would obviously have to wait until the rainy season was in full swing to soak the fields. Here and there some Maasai herdsmen were tending their cattle which were grazing on the stubble. The Maasai cattle had absolutely huge horns, some almost a meter long on each side. It was very tempting to photograph the Maasai but I did not want to intrude or get into a discussion about payment.

690. The Maasai cattle had huge horns with some bulls having a tip to tip span of over two metres.

I passed rice mills and threshing plants frequently as I passed through villages heading to Ifakara. In one of them an ambulance came up behind me with its siren blazing and lights flashing. It was the same as the speeding Landcruiser I had seen earlier but this one had the light on the roof, while the other had nothing, not even a roof rack. I then passed a barrier and was approaching Ifakara when I noticed a policewoman under a tree sitting on a chair. As I approached she got up and walked to the edge of the road and flagged me down. She said something but I did not understand so I got the phone out and she spoke Swahili into it which the phone then translated. She said “I want you to tell me about the accident”. Obviously the news had travelled fast and the authorities were on the ball and investigating already. I used Google to translate what I thought had happened but I don’t think it translated well as she looked unconvinced. Perhaps it was when I said ”I arrived 30 seconds after the accident” she thought I was no use as a witness. But the driver of the white landcruiser was a marked man now. She explained that the ambulance which passed me was taking the older lady passenger from the health clinic near the accident to the hospital for further treatment.

691. As I got closer to the regional capital of Ifakara the landscape got drier and the maize and rice crops were not irrigated and would only thrive in the rainy season.

After the police interview I crossed a few more rice growing areas in the increasingly brown and dried landscape and then entered the outskirts of Ifakara. It was a larger town, a district capital, with a population of around 200,000 I guess. It was not hectic and chaotic as I feared but quite calm, with plenty of small lanes and trees. I cycled through a few of them to get to the Ifakara Health Institute Main House, which was a lodge and restaurant for the Health Institute. However the lodge was busy and quite noisy and the room opened onto the bar area. So I left and went past the St Francis Regional Referral Hospital where I guess the older lady on the motorbike was now. It looked like a very new, well organised and up to date hospital. I think it shares links with the convent and retreat I was at this morning. I am also sure both the convent and hospital here have links with a Catholic order in Switzerland and have had for nearly a century. Next to it was the main Catholic church in Ifakara and I am sure I met the priest or even bishop from this church yesterday at the retreat. I tried one more lodge, The Cliften, which looked like it was an office, and then settled on the Mountain Peak Hotel which ticked all the boxes. I had intended to spend an extra day here but have now abandoned that idea and will split the 130 kilometres to Mikumi town on the T1 highway into two days instead.

692. St Andrew Catholic Church in Ifakara seemed to be the main Catholic church in the region and had connections to the Mbingu Convent and Retreat and also the St Francis Hospital in Ikafara.

That brings to an end the penultimate Section 09. West Central Tanzania. It has been one of the best but also one of the hardest. What I really liked about it were the kind, straight-forward, hard-working people all of whom made me feel welcome but without going over the top or with a hidden agenda. I also loved the countryside and the very varied agriculture and land use from the fruit orchards, timber and tea to the rice and potato fields. However it was hard with over 10,000 metres of ascent and descent in a little over two weeks, and much of that was on dirt roads. It was one of the most rewarding sections.

Day 112. 29 August. Mbingu Rest Day. 0 km. 0 Hours. 0m up. 0m down. I initially slept very well but woke in the night with some coughing. This turned into a bit of a fit and I was awake for a good hour coughing. I am sure it is from the dust on the roads and I will have to find some sort of filter or mask. After that I slept again and did not wake until 0730 when the receptionist was knocking on the door to say breakfast was ready. It was a hearty meal with a large portion of chicken and potato stew, a pancake, an omelette and a lot of milky coffee. The Mbingu Sisters certainly don’t skip on portion sizes. I was joined at breakfast by Nestor and two other priests. At the other tables there was plenty of laughter and leg pulling. It was almost as if this was a group of lads on holiday rather than the spiritual elite of the Catholic Church in Kilombero Region. They were all a very good natured group and typical of all Tanzanians I have met so far who are very straightforward, more serious than their Malawian and Zambian brothers, but as friendly if not more so. If a couple had three sons the Tanzanians would be the eldest, reliable and steadfast, the Zambians the middle son, also dependable, and the Malawians would be the happy go lucky, slightly mischievous, but the most fun youngest son.

685. One one the quiet peaceful verandahs in the Mbingu Sister’s Spiritual Centre where I spent the rest day writing.

Unfortunately the priests and higher clergy were leaving today as their retreat had come to an end and they were going back to the parishes for the services on Sunday. I had enjoyed their company. When they had all got into their very expensive 4×4 vehicles and departed the place felt deserted and I was the only customer. There was the receptionist, who was a man, and then a few of the Sisters who worked in the kitchen preparing the meals. However, it did not matter as I had one task today and that was to catch up with the long overdue blog. I had written 4 of the 6 days I had to publish but I had to write another two and then caption about 50 photographs and publish them also. I knew it would take the rest of the day and I was not looking forward to applying myself to the relatively tedious task. In the meantime my legs would have a rest. I did about half of the writing when the receptionist called me for lunch.

The sisters had cooked me fish, perhaps on account of it being Friday. I am sure it was tilapia and it was whole in a tomato paste sauce. I derive little enjoyment from fish on account of the bones and not being able to shovel it in without getting a mouth full of soft mushy flesh and toothpicks, and the tilapia was the epitome of what I don’t like about fish. When I tried to debone it I only managed to get about half out and spent the rest of lunch picking the others from between my teeth. I am sure a more skillful fish affectionado would have dealt with it in a more refined way. The sauce, the rice and the green vegetables were much more to my taste.

686. The central building in the Mbingu Sister’s Spiritual Centre had been commandeered as a prayer room by the Catholic priests and clergy who left in the morning after a few days retreat.

After lunch I returned and did half the captions and loaded the photos before a small stroll round the tranquil grounds and a peek into the main conference room which the clergy had commandeered for the prayer room. I then went back to the photos and managed to finish them all before having a small snooze. After dinner, which was chicken and chips, which I could wolf down, I tidied up the last of the blog and then did some emails. Tomorrow would be the last day of this Section 09. West Central Tanzania when I reach Ifakara, where I will have another day off.

It will primarily be to investigate the route further. Of the 400 kilometres remaining on this Section 10. East Central Tanzania about 300 are on the infamous T1 Highway. It is the main road from perhaps the biggest port on the East coast of Africa into Tanzania and Central Africa beyond that, and is not really an option. However, I have got some feedback that there are dirt roads beside the main T1 and they are a tolerable solution. There is also the option of crossing the T1 at Mikumi and heading north on the B127 for 3-4 days to Mziha and then heading west to Bagomoyo on the Indian Ocean and the journeys end.

Day 111. 28 August. Chita to Mbingu. 56 km. 6 Hours. 250m up. 260m down. There was no breakfast at the Flying Sparrow Lodge so I was packed and ready to go by 0830 after a great night’s sleep. I could have gone the short kilometre back into Chita to find breakfast but decided to head north and find something enroute. After a couple of kilometres I came to a small hamlet with a couple of road side stalls. At one of them a man was selling small ripe yellow bananas and large green plantains. I stopped and bought 12 bananas for 1000 shillings. I ate half straight away, and half beside a stream 15 minutes later. I was wary about keeping them in the front pannier on this bumpy road as they soon turn to mush and burst out of their skins after bouncing about.

678. Leaving Chita in the morning and heading NE along the edge of the Kilombero Plain with the Uzungwa Scarp Nature Forest Reserve rising steeply to the NW.

As I cycled north the escarpment of the Udzungwa Mountains rose steeply on my left (the north west). These jungle clad slopes were very imposing and wild, although they have suffered from human encroachment, particularly from poaching. To combat this the Uzungwa Scarp Nature Forest Reserve was created in 2016 to try and protect some of the endemic species that are found here, like the Red Colobus Monkey and rare small deer called duikers. As I cycled along here I could see waterfalls coming down the slopes, cascading over rare patches of bare rock. On my right (the south east) was the huge Kilombero flood plain. I said yesterday it was riven by channels which flood and threaten crops but these channels are along the central axis of the plains and between the mountains on each side and these central channels are barely perceptible slopes which are 5-10 kilometres wide and they are agricultural land. They are well watered from the streams which come down from the mountains, but apparently the soil is not that fertile, as the minerals which are washed down from the mountains lack nutrients. Nonetheless it is a prime rice growing area. As I continued north I passed hamlets and small villages where numerous tracks led off at right angles and headed onto this floodplain to the fields where the crops, primarily rice, were grown.

679. At Ikule I was spotted taking a photograph by these kids who burst into an excited run and followed me for about 2 kilometres all the way to their school.

After a good hour I reached the village of Ikule with its rows of grocers, bike repair shops and small food stalls. It was well shaded by tall trees on each side and in the compounds of the homesteads, so much so that photography was almost futile as everything was in the dark shade. At the north end of the village I stopped to take a photo looking back up the track. Just then I was spotted by a group of younger children of about 6-8 years old who burst with excitement and started to chase me. They soon caught up as I cycled more slowly over the stony road. Initially there were about 6 but their numbers grew to about 20 as we caught up with others. I was amazed how easily they ran and even after 2 kilometres the original ones were not breaking sweat or puffing but jogging along quite easily at 10 kilometres per hour. I suppose this is what comes of living and playing outdoors all day without phones or digital games. These kids were not only supremely fit, but also happy and were joking with each other as they ran abreast of me. I left them at the gates of the school and continued north.

680. North of Ikule I passed these three characterless ladies selling bananas and ripen payaya by the roadside and stopped to buy some.

After another few kilometres I passed a group of ladies selling bananas and papaya. I had looked at a few papayas but they were always green, however these were ripe and quite yellow. I bought some bananas and a papaya. They cut it into quarters for me and gave me a spoon to scoop out the seeds and eat the flesh. It was delicious and exactly as a papaya should be. My hands were covered in juice but they had water and a cup to rinse them. I think they were primarily selling to the occasional bus which came this way. They were so cheerful I asked for a photo but as always people then lose their joy and become more serious so I could not capture their joy and laughter.

681. Around Mngeta village the dusty road veered onto the flat Kilombero Plain and away from the mountains but the streams from the mountains still flowed and irrigated large areas of vegetables like the pictured tomatoes.

As I continued past the larger villages of Mngeta and Njagi the traffic started to get busier. It was still very little but what there was created clouds of dust. There was the occasional large lorry with a big trailer and these were very slow due to the rough road and created some dust. The 4X4 vehicles, particularly those belonging to aid organisations and private people, were quite fast and kicked up loads of dust. Many of the locals on motorbikes had scarves or masks on but I tended to hold my breath until I was clear of the worst of it. Nonetheless I was inhaling quite a bit of dust and had noticed over the last few days I was getting a cough because of it.

682. At the village of Njagi the homesteads where lush with irrigation and idyllicly situated at the foot of the mountains. The palms here are oil palms.

The homesteads on each side of the road were continuous, as was the farming and gardening. There were enough streams coming down from the escarpment to keep this place irrigated even in the dry season. As I approached Njagi and Mbingu the road veered away from the base of the escarpment and onto the flat lands on the floodplain but the streams continued to flow and sustain vegetable gardens of tomatoes and greens, and also fields of ripening maize. There were lots of mango, papaya and banana about, and also palms, many with coconuts. There was sometimes a putrid smell from some of the palms and I thought nothing of it. However in both Mngeta and Njagi I passed filthy yards full of the large blue plastic drums which were blackened with dirt. I could not work out what they were and initially I thought it was a local brewery or even distillery making alcohol that would surely make you blind. In the end outside Mbingu I saw another and was curious so asked someone. He said it was palm oil and went over to get me a spoonful. It was clear with a red hue. The putrid palms I had been passing had already harvested and pressed their cluster of trees and these places with the blue barrels were collection depots.

683. Starting to enter the edge of Mbingu which was a thriving market town and it seemed this was where the lorries dropped their loads which were then redistributed to smaller lorries by traders serving the villages on and along the Kilombero Plain.

I reached Mbingu as the heat of the afternoon was at its most intense. I did not really go into the town but turned off to the north just before the centre. I headed out on a small road to Mbingu Sister’s Spiritual Centre. It was a large cross shaped building with 4 arms leading from a round central block. The round central block housed a conference room now commandeered as a prayer room. In the 4 arms were accommodations, dining rooms and more prayer rooms for guests. The whole place mainly operated as a spiritual retreat but was also open to visitors to stay at. Next to this centre was a larger complex where something like 1000 sisters or nuns stayed at or were based there while they worked in the community. It was the sisters from this large complex which ran the retreat and guesthouse. This large complex was home to the Fransciacan Sisters of Charity who had many worthy projects in the area.

684. Just outside Mbingu was a Spritual Retreat run by the Fransciacan Sisters who lived and were based in a large adjacent complex housing 1000 nuns.

I was given a lovely cool room and then sat near the central area. It seemed the centre was holding a retreat at the moment and there were about 20 Catholic priests here at the moment. They were milling about in their cassocks and sandals waiting to go into the prayer room for their afternoon prayers. I am sure some of them were very senior members of the Catholic church from this region and some of the older ones looked very calm, confident, learned and warm as if they were highly intelligent and well educated. I chatted to a few of them and they were exceptionally welcoming. Later at dinner I sat next to a few, including Nestor, who was from Mlimba originally and now worked in his parish of Ifakara. When I mentioned I was from Edinburgh a few exclaimed that Julius Nyerere,the so-called “Father of Tanzania” and the first president had done his degree there at Edinburgh University from 1949 to 1952. I tried to write that evening but was just too tired so decided to take a day off and catch up with everything and let my body relax as I was still tired from the climbs 3-4 days ago.

Day 110. 27 August. Mlimba to Chita. 44 km. 6.5 Hours. 330m up. 330m down. I left the nice hotel quite early after an easy stay. They didn’t have breakfast so I had more granola, finishing my penultimate packet. The hotel was at the southern end of the town and I had to cycle through most of it to get to the northside where the road to Ifakara led out. I passed all sorts of shops, some very specialized, like electricians or phone shops and also a few tailors and seamstresses. I had the most comfortable cycling shorts I had used from the start accessible in the front pannier should I need to change into them later in the day. The trouble was they were ripped at the crotch and were slightly embarrassing to wear in this prudish society. Instead I wore my cycling hotpants which were more obscene as they were so short and I had to wear shorts over the top of them to cover them up. The trouble was the shorts made the set up too restrictive and hot. It seemed ridiculous to pass all these tailors without asking one if they could repair my favourite shorts. The trouble was there was a pad in the inside of these cycling shorts which they might think is a nappy. I passed one and it looked promising, but continued. After a 100 meters I plucked up the courage to turn round and go and ask one. The man I asked was in a tailor shop with about 5 other men all making clothes. He said he could patch it and it would be 3000 shillings (£1). All the others came over to peer at this strange garment and discussed it while I buried myself in the BBC news on the phone. 20 minutes later it was done and I returned them to the panier and cycled off through town in the uncomfortable pair.

It did not take long to leave town on the asphalt road which was a godsend to cycle on. It was quick and smooth. To my south and east I had the huge floodplain of the Kilombero River. This flood plain was about 150 kilometres long from south of Mlimba to Ifakara, and an average of 25 kilometres wide. It is contained by the Mahenge Mountains to the South East and the Udzungwa Mountains to the North West. 4 main rivers flow into it, including the two I cycled over yesterday. These rivers meet at the south west end of the flood plain in a braided splay of channels and they then start their journey over the floodplain, flowing in up to 10 different channels. It is one of Africa’s largest wetlands and can measure up to 6000 square kilometres. At the town of Ifakara the sides of the valley come together for a while and the Kilombero River forms into a single channel again, before leaving this pinch point and splitting into more channels again to cross a smaller flood plain. When it leaves this smaller floodplain to the east the river flows through the huge Nyerere National Park and joins the Rufiji River to flow to the Indian Ocean.

671. Leaving Mlimba and looking north west to the start of the Udzungwa Mountains which quickly approached the road and formed the NW boundary of the large Kilombero Plain and wetlands.

The Kilembero floodplain is an internationally important environment area with a huge variety of birds, naturally wetland birds especially, but it also borders on key areas for Africa’s major animals, like elephant, lion hippopotamus buffalo and puku and it hosts them also. The trouble with the area is there is also a growing human population as the more and more smallholders move in to try the risky business of rice farming on the floodplain. It is risky because the rains can be erratic and if there is too much the rice fields completely flood and the harvest is lost and this can happen more often than not.

672. Looking east on the road leaving Mlimba across the start of the vast Kilombero Plain and wetlands which was about 200 kilometres long and 40 wide and hemmed in by mountains on each side.

On my other side to the north and west I had an escarpment which led up to the Udzungwa Mountains. This range was about 150 kilometres long and pretty much coincided with the north west side of the Kilombero Floodplain. The mountains rose steeply from the plain which was at about 300 metres altitude right up to well above 2000 metres. The mountains were thickly clad in forest. Down here it was tropical forest but I think up at 2000 metres to the highest peaks at 2500 metres it is montane type forest. The road I was on went from Mlimba to Ifakara round the edge of this vast floodplain and along the base of the Udzungwa Mountains. It promised to be generally flat as it went from village to village for 150 kilometres.

The first 20 odd kilometres were on a tarmac road and I was quite spoiled by it. It was a lovely cycle on a quiet road with little traffic except local tractors, both 4 wheeled and the 2 wheeled engine block with a trailer. There were quite a few tuk tuks and this seemed to be the main way of getting around if you did not have a motorbike or bicycle. Occasionally I managed to get a good look into the tuk tuk and there were about 6-8 people in each one. They were crammed in like sardines. There were also smaller lorries and motorbikes. The tractors and the lorries were full of larger sacks which I am sure were rice still in the ear and they were going off to mills along the road which dehusked them. The Udzungwa Mountains were not that big here, but I could see them starting soon and even in these smaller foothills there were plenty of small streams flowing down from them and onto the plain. They were used for irrigation and there were quite a few fields with green maize.

673. As I approached the Kihansi Dam offices and social club 20 kilometres NE of Mlimba the Udzungwa Mountains were now right beside the road and covered in jungle.

After 20 kilometres I reached the Kihansi Social Club. It was up a tarmac road on the hill and was essentially complex for the workers who operated the Kihansi Dam up on top of the escarpment. The dam was for a hydroelectric scheme which provides some 180 MW of electricity. It is not much in today’s world but when it was commissioned in 2000 it provided 13% of Tanzania’s electricity. The complex had all the workers’ housing and also a guest house for visiting workers which was open to the public. It was supposed to be a nice place to stay but there was 100 metres of ascent up to it and I really wanted to do a bit more today so the journey tomorrow to Mbinga was shorter. So reluctantly I cycled past the hydroplant offices and a small wildlife centre where they bred the endemic toad which was displaced by the dam and would be extinct now were it not for this. The toad was called the Kihansi Spray Toad which thrived in the spray of the once magnificent 800 metre waterfall. Right after these hydroplant offices the lovely tarmac road came to an end and it was a gravel track again.

The gravel track was not in good shape. It was full of rocks which the sand and dust coating them did little to smooth off. The tractors, lorries, motorbikes and even tuk tuks bounced along with their suspension smoothing out all but the worst bumps but the cyclists had to endure them. I thought of letting my tyre pressure down so the tyres are wider and more shock absorbant. A few times the track crossed the TAZARA railway line which looked small gauge. There were rarely trains on it, perhaps once a day, and people were using it as a path to collect firewood. There were also old iron bridges over streams coming down from the forest-clad Udzungwa Mountains escarpment which were now looming above me. These streams were clear as they tumbled down over small waterfalls from high above.

674. Approaching the village of Udagaji whose main street and adjacent homestead compounds where heavily shaded by large trees, mostly mango.

675. There were frequent rice mills where the rice was dehusked by machine all the way along the road every two kilometres or so showing how much rice was grown on this part of the Kilombero Plain.

After about 10 kilometres I reached Udagaji village. It was hidden from the sun by a canopy of trees, many mangoes. The village was long and went on for about three kilometres with a row of houses on each side hidden in the dark. The houses were brick with corrugated roofs mostly and were quite quiet with hardly any kids playing at them. I even wondered if some were seasonal homes for the rice season. However there were also shops and a couple of pubs with men hanging round on motorbikes. I think it was a normal village but I could barely see some of the compounds because it was so shaded. I took a photo of a few homesteads but they didn’t really come out. Towards the end I spotted a rice mill in the sun and took a photo of it. Nearby kids came running up and wanted me to take their photo. These were some of the more confident open kids I have seen so far in Tanzania. There were rice mills everywhere and for the next 10 kilometres to Chita there was one every couple of kilometres. The tractors were also towing portable ones. Rice was obviously the main business here.

676. At Udagaji the kids were much more forthcoming and wanted to be photographed.

Eventually I got to Chita at around 1500. I passed a couple of guesthouses which boasted they had attached rooms, pool table and bar. But this means the bar is their mainstay and the music is guaranteed to be loud. In the centre of the small dusty town there was the White Lodge and I went in. The rooms were OK but when I looked out of the window there was the lodge’s bar already with 15 customers right outside. So I explained to them that I could not stay. Outside I asked someone working nearby in the restaurant attached to the White Lodge and he explained there was a lodge at the other end of town which was nice. A group of men started to explain it to me but then the cook got on his bike and offered to show me. We cycled north past about 10 large sheds where lorries and tractors were coming and going with bags of unhusked rice and hundreds of people were outside. There were many ladies winnowing the husks hoping to get enough rice from this supposed waste, and in a day they might get half a bag. After nearly a kilometer we turned off down a small road to the Flying Sparrow Lodge. He rang the bell and someone came to the gate and he explained I was looking for somewhere to stay. They did have a room so I gave the chef a tip and he left.

677. The homesteads continued all the way from Udagaji to Chita with many shaded by trees and palms. Here are coconut and palm oil palms (the shorter) and a mango trees. There were banana groves everywhere. The main farming was done on the adjacent Kilombero Plain.

The lodge was new and exceptionally clean. The hot water was limitless, as there was an electric heater in the bathroom. I think it was essentially a couple who had good jobs and they saved and put all their money into this property, half of which was a guesthouse, and half were their own rooms. It was quite a dull place but it would be quiet. They had no kitchen so there was no dinner and I went back to the White Lodge and the chef in the later afternoon for the usual beans, stew and rice. I was finished before dark as I wanted to get home before it was dark and avoid the gauntlet of lorries and motorbikes driving in the dark. I just managed to write the blog before a wave of tiredness swept over me.

Day 109. 26 August. Taweta to Mlimba. 56 km. 6.5 Hours. 320m up. 490m down. I had a large bowl of granola for breakfast as the lodge did not do breakfast, and I needed to get rid of some of it. It was quick and I was finished and packed up by 0800. As usual for the last few days it was very overcast and the sky was dark and threatening in places. I cycled back through town and over a simple steel latticework bridge crossing the Mynera River to the north bank. I then quickly left town but cycled past a series of homesteads which looked like they grew rice on the valley floor and bananas around their homestead. The homesteads here continued to be poor and along with the road into Taweta yesterday, the poorest I have seen in Tanzania. As I was about 5 km from Taweta I noticed a few large raindrops. A few minutes later it was raining heavily and I parked the bike and took shelter under a large arc of bamboo stems. The rain lasted for about five minutes and the air smelt musty as the earth got wet. Just as the drips were starting to come through the bamboo leaves it stopped and I got back on the bike. I did not have a rain jacket as I thought it never rained in the dry season. Had I got wet it would have made little difference as it was warm rain and I would have soon dried off.

651. After leaving Taweta I immediately crossed over the Mnyera River which drained the northside of the ridges I had been on for the last three days.

For the next hour or so I cycled through a string of poor homesteads whose mud and grass roof shacks were generally hidden in the banana groves which surrounded them. There were rice growing areas in the valley just to the side of the road but it did not look well farmed and the fields were ill defined. Here and there I passed couples working in these fields and it was as if they were trying to establish a farm. I passed three couples and all of them were making bricks beside their rustic house. I think this area was just being opened up by younger people who were encouraged to try their hand because of the road. Eventually I got to the village of Ipinde about 6-7 kilometres from Taweta. It was small and poor with many of its buildings looking quite rustic.

652. Between Taweta and Ipinde the track went alongside valleys where the were some poorer homesteads with banana groves and some maize and rivers plots being reclaimed from the encroaching jungle.

After Ipinde the road deteriorated a bit and there were plenty of muddy sections. In this dry season it must be a challenge to the lorries but in the wet season it must be very challenging and I am sure many don’t bother as the conditions are so muddy there is a danger of getting stuck for a while. The homesteads stopped for at least 5 kilometers while the road went into deeper tropical jungle. It was dense on each side and virtually impenetrable. I passed a few groups of the small green vervet monkeys who seemed to thrive in the forest here. Perhaps they occasionally raid the adjacent farmers but they are in danger of being hit by a catapult and they know this. Just at the end of this forest section I came across a lorry with its back wheels off. The crew had taken it off as the bearings were shattered. The greasy parts all lay on sacks to keep them off the dirt. The driver then appeared. It was Mr Fistbump from yesterday and he spoke OK English. We had a small chat and he said “Mlimba is now near”. I said “it was still 45 kilometres away” and we laughed. His situation looked dire but he said he had already asked a motorbike rider to get the parts and was waiting for them.

653. After Impinde track went through some thicker areas of jungle where the track was very rutted and near impassable in the rainy season I should imagine.

654. After the jungle section following the village of Ipinde the track crossed a few ford which flowed over the track on concrete ramps.

The jungle ended with a ford over a stream. It was murky and I could not see the bottom so I took off my shoes and socks and walked the bike over while a large crab watched from the shallows at the side. Had I cycled over I would have got wet feet as it was well over the pedals. On the other side the rice farming continued but this time it was more organized. The fields were clearly marked out and they were already planted or in the process of being planted with almost luminous green shoots being taken from a nursery paddy field and transplanted. In these rice areas the houses looked more substantial and their farming looked like it had been here for at least a generation.

655. As I approached the village of Mpanga the rice fields became more organised and established as if they had been there for a generation or two.

656. In most rice areas the farmers have a nursery where the rice shoots are planted and nourished before being uprooted and taken the the prepared main paddy fields where they are planted much further apart and in rows to mature

There were also a few cattle. Not the usual scrawny local cattle but larger cattle with huge horns. I was sure they were watched over by Maasai tribesmen as they were dressed in that way. There were about 5 herds with 20 cattle in each herd, with a few sheep clustered together in the heat also. Each herd was watched by a Maasai. Obviously the Maasi and local farmers must have an agreement about grazing rights here. Pastoralists are always more assertive than farmers who they often view with disdain and this is throughout the world, especially in the Old World nomadic groups like the Kurds or the Fulani. Where the road veered away from the flat valley floor the farmers became poorer again as they had to eke out a living from maize and bananas. I am sure the Maasai cattle could cause havoc amongst these farmers if unsupervised and these poorer remote farmers would not have the same collective voice as the rice farmers. Just before the large village of Mpanga I crossed a bridge over the Mpenga River and stopped to take a photo of the ingenious irrigation system. It was a huge wheel bolted onto the side of the bridge some 10 metres in diameter and made from steel, plastic barrels and black industrial pipes. As the current flowed into the scoop of the plastic barrels it turned the wheels which pumped the water into the pipe and forced it up 10 meters where it could flow. As I was admiring it, 3 men approached me selling sandals. I said “you guys look like Maasai” and they said they were.

657. Before Mpanga the rice paddy fields disappeared as the track left the flat valley for shallow hillsides and the homesteads became poorer as they relied on maize and cassava.

658. The dusty town of Mpanga was thr main market town for about 10 kilometres in each direction.

Mpanga was the most vibrant small town I had seen since Lupembe nearly 100 kilometres back. It had shops and groceries down each side of the street which was shaded with large mango trees. If it were not for the red dirt road and the mud built buildings it could almost have been a French style boulevard. The small town was cool and pleasant and I thought about stopping here but suddenly I was on the far side of it and heading out having procrastinated too long. The track now became more and more sandy as it crossed a few small stream beds. Most of these were dry but they would have washed sand onto the road in the rainy season. There were also a few rutted areas and some more fords, which were much shallower and I cycled through them, after watching the motorbikes negotiate them first. On one sandy stretch where I was struggling to keep the bike in a straight line a Maasai passed me on an old bike. That would be unremarkable except he was only holding onto the handle bars with one hand while the other hand was clamping the legs of a sheep he had over his shoulders. It must have taken great strength and skill to do this and he cycled as if he owned the road not giving way to the motorbikes at all.

659. I was passing more and more Maasai herdsmen with small herds of cows. This herdsmen passed me on the bike carrying a live sheep across his shoulders.

It got very hot in the afternoon now the skies had cleared and I was at about 300 meters altitude. As I crossed the sandy open areas the sun beat down on me. At least it was generally flat with just a few rises and descents. The road got busier and busier with all sorts of vehicles, there were the 3 wheeled motorbikes with the tipping trailer and also a few of their predecessors. This was an engine with a front wheel, behind which was a trailer. The driver sat on the back of the engine and steered the contraption with two handles which manoeuvred the engine from side to side. I was always wary around them as I was not sure how much control the driver had. There were many motorbikes and more and more tuk-tuks. There was always peeping to warm me something was coming from behind. One series of beeps was quite cheerful. It was Mr Fistbump who had somehow received the new bearing and refitted it. He carried on, negotiating a muddy rutted section just in front.

670. Entering the town of Mlimba which was the largest town with the most amenities since leaving Njombe four days ago.

After half an hour the mayhem of the motorbikes and the sand suddenly came to an abrupt end with a section of tarmac. Suddenly I did not have to vie for a position on the firmer bit of track and now I could go right over to the side as I entered town. I stopped at the first petrol station to ask about hotels and he said Njema or Shelaton. However I could find neither on googlemaps which after 2 days of no signal was now working. I carried on and met Mr Fistbump again. This time I said “ now it is near” and he laughed. He suggested the Lugelele Lodge which was nearby. After we parted I cycled about 300 metres and found the sign. It was down a side street and looked secure. She had a room but she spoke no English so I downloaded the Swahili part of Google Translate and we started to have a disjointed conversation via the phone. The room was 25000 shillings ((£8) and it supposedly had hot water. It was a large room and she demonstrated the shower and it was indeed hot. I took the room and enjoyed a long hot shower and washed my clothes. There was no food or drink at the lodge so just before the sun went down I went out and found a nice local restaurant in the busy streets. I had chicken, beans, rice and green vegetables. While eating I was surprised to see a train stop at the end of the street. It was at Mlimba station which was on the Tazara line between Dar-es-Salem and Zambia. I walked back to the lodge in the dark amazed at how little traffic used their lights at all, with at least half the motorbikes were in complete darkness, except for the puny streetlights. Back at the lodge I wrote for 3 hours.

Day 108. 25 August. Madeke to Taweta. 44 km. 7.5 Hours. 940m up. 1660m down. I was awake early and got up at 0630 as I was keen to do as much as possible before the heat of the day. I was surprised to see that there was a mist about and the base of the cloud was just at Madeke. All the surrounding hills which were a bit higher were obscured and the valleys below were dull without the sun. Rather than go into the village for breakfast I just had some granola and powdered milk on the bench outside the lodge. I thought Branson had already gone to work but he was doing a large laundry wash and then was going to the market to get food for the helpers on the farm. We chatted a bit but we were both busy and I left at 0800 by which time the mist had burnt off but it was overcast and still.

641. Looking back towards Madeke after leaving it in the morning for the arduous journey to Taweta. You can see fields of pineapples here and there.

Initially the road descended a bit but I was prepared for a real roller coaster today having been warned by Sam and Will that it was very hilly and very few of the hills showed up in the phone apps. There were no real settlements after Madeke but plenty of small farms and homesteads. They were not just beside the road but on the side ridges. Initially they were mostly avocado and pineapple, especially pineapple. There were large cleared areas too with nothing except bracken which seemed rampant and at least 1.5 metres high. I think the pineapple farmers had a constant battle with it and passed many plots where it had been cut with a slasher, otherwise it would overpower the pineapple bushes. A lot of these homesteads looked very romantic perched on their ridges surrounded by well kept plots but I am sure the reality is much harsher and the farmers are at the mercy of both the weather and also the markets.

642. Looking east along the ridge leading out from Madeke with the taxing track running along its apex from knoll to knoll through fields of pineapples.

Pretty soon the road started to drop steeply only to climb again. The drops were very steep and the climbs equally so. As the earth was not smooth I had to go down using the brakes to keep myself at walking speed. On the ascents I was always at walking speed. Sometimes it was so steep it was easier to get off and push. I think a lot of these farmers, Branson included, were hoping the promised tarmac road would arrive. This would really make farming easier for them, especially getting the fruits to market. However, I could not see how even the Chinese could build a tarmac road here without huge expense as the ridges were so convoluted. The yo-yo nature of the road was starting to tax me and I spared a thought for Sam and Will who came up this way. At least for me the descents were bigger than the ascents but it was the opposite for them.

643. There were also orchards of mango and avacado beside the ridge top road leading east from Madeke to Taweta.

As I continued to drop down the avocados seemed to be replaced by mangos. However, the pineapples still were the most abundant crop here. There were some large fields of 2 hectares or so full of the plants. It was not pineapple harvesting season just yet but there were a few that were ready and they were being collected from the fields. There were some ladies beside the track selling the fruits but I did not pass any lorries which could take them to market. I would have liked to buy one but would have ended up a sticky mess with no water to rinse my hands afterwards. After 10 km or so I reached a larger pineapple farm of about 20 hectares of well looked after bushes. There was also a mango orchard here with 100 trees and a larger plantation style bungalow. There were workers in the fields carrying large white sacks of fruit up to the track. There must have been a few tonnes already collected this morning. I guess this was a resident landowning farmer in the larger bungalow who employed some 10 men to run the farm.

644. Most of the pineapple groves were small and manageable by a family. However, there were some farms like this one with a larger farmhouse where the owner employed labourers to work on the larger farms.

I climbed beyond this farm and then started a more continuous descent. The avocados had long gone, but now the mangos and pineapples also disappeared as I dropped below 900 metres. There were some great views over the ridges which were now largely covered in jungle. Frequently it had been cleared of trees, but most of the time this land was abandoned once the trees had gone. Rarely there was a homestead growing maize or cassava on the steep hillsides while they also grew vegetables on the rich black earth on the valley floors, which were irrigated. However these homesteads were rare and it was usually the jungle which prevailed.

645. The pineapple crop on the road between Madeke and Taweta was just starting to ripen but there were some bushes already producing mature fruits.

646. The track between Madeke and Taweta was very convoluted with plenty of steep descents and climbs but generally it dropped down the ridges to the flatter lands in the distant east.

In one large dip I crossed a larger stream. I was half way over the small bridge when a lorry appeared. I got off the bike and reversed it back as there was not room for two. As he passed he rolled down the window and gave me a fist bump as a gesture of friendly gratitude. After he passed I had a very steep push up through the jungle. I was getting quite tired with all the climbs but knew I was just about half way. As usual at the top there was a ridiculously steep descent down to a very small village. It was totally different to anything I had seen in Tanzania and was very poor. The houses were brick and thatch and the fields looked like it was a constant battle to stop the jungle claiming them. The village must have had a school as there were kids just spilling out of it onto the road. Most people in the village gave me a small half hearted wave if I waved at them, but most just stared and must have wondered what on earth I was doing. The village had a good variety of crops with rice on the valley floor, maize and cassava on the sloping fields and banana groves around the houses. There were a few mango trees too but it was too low for avocado and pineapple. I passed one house where an animal, a goat I think, was getting butchered after it was slaughtered. I guess this village had to be quite self-sufficient as it was really isolated in the jungle with only this narrow steep seasonal track as its connection with the world. There was no electricity in the village but there were power lines being put in nearby.

647. Before it reached the flatter lands to the east around Taweta it passed through a very poor village lost in jungle and only connected to the outside world by this rough track.

As I left the village 4 kids from school followed me. They were transfixed by me and the bike, but said nothing. They followed me for about 3 kilometres, sprinting after me when I went down hill and then easily catching me when I had two arduous pushes up very steep hills. I tried to communicate with them and gave one an empty bottle of water and another empty bottle of soda. They eagerly took them but there was no smile or acknowledgement. I think they just didn’t know what to make of me. Occasionally a motorbike came the other way and waved and tooted at me and seeing the adults greet and accept me put them a little at ease but they were still cautious and never really took their eyes off me. When the older sister stopped her brother walked straight into the back of her as he was looking at me. Eventually they were gone and I looked round to see them heading up a path to a cluster of simple brick and thatch cottages.

648. Once the track had descended out of the hills it passed a couple of small hamlets in the flatter valleys before reaching the Mnyera River and the very small town of Taweta.

From leaving them the climbs had just about finished and I initially had a steep run down to a valley. The floor of the valley was flat and there was a small stream running through it. Frequently the stream was diverted across the valley floor to irrigate some rice fields before the channels merged again and it flowed as one down to the next widening. There was another village here but it was much more developed and the houses had corrugated iron roofs and were arranged down each side of the street. There were even a few small grocers but still no electricity. I followed the track down alternating between rice and maize fields and then sections of jungle for a good hour. It was predominantly a gentle downhill cruise for which I was thankful as it had been a strenuous day so far. Suddenly I came to a large river. It was the Mnyera River and it seemed to drain the area to the north of where I had cycled for the last 3 days. It eventually joins the Kilombero which I will follow to Ifakara town. I followed the muddy waters of this sluggish but determined river for a few kilometres over a final thigh-killing rise to descend into Taweta.

649. The Mnyera River drained the area to the north of the ridges i had been following for the last 3 days since Njombe. It was one of 4 large rivers which flowed onto the flat Kilombero flood plain where I would be for the next 4 days.

I did not go all the way in because I found the lodge which Sam and Will had stayed at. It was run by a characterful young wife and her husband. Their rooms were just 12000 (£3) but there was no hot water or furniture in the room except the bed. However the water was lukewarm and it was warm down here at about 400 metres altitude so the shower, although invigorating, was refreshing. There was no food here so I went the half kilometre into town to find a small local restaurant. There was one run by a strong lady. I asked for a meal and she gave me boiled beef stew, cooked beans in a sauce, rice and the green vegetables. It is the standard fare at all the restaurants and this is the menu, take it or leave it. Occasionally there is fish or chicken instead of the beef but the meat or fish dish is the smallest of all the bowls. It filled me up even after having skipped lunch. I walked back to the JS lodge just as the secondary school was released at about 1800 in the evening. The teenagers were eager to see me and walked fast to catch up or those in front lingered so I caught up but very few engaged in conversation other than how are you. I think Tanzanians so far are very respectful and quite shy. It is perhaps the most traditional and polite of all the countries I have been to so far in Africa. Nobody asks for money or sweeties and the greetings are calm and respectful. Back at the lodge I tried to write but the day had been a long one and I was too tired.

650. The very small town of Taweta had a couple of local restaurants on the main street, a secondary school and two lodges, one being attached to the mission station. One restaurant is on the extreme left.

Day 107. 24 August. Lupembe to Madeke. 33 km. 5.5 Hours. 600m up. 1020m down. I woke early, did the blog and then packed up and left the lodge at 0900. They did not have break fast and I could not do today without a meal first so went back a few hundred metres into town where there were some rustic restaurants. I found one with the sweet fried rolls which also served tea and had 6 rolls and enough black sweet teas to wash them down. It was now about 1000 and I was ready to go out on this overcast morning. However, unlike yesterday, there was no wind.

633. Looking back up the hill to Lupembe after leaving it on the way to Madeke.

There were lots of people going to church. Even the youngest in the families were dressed up and there were toddlers who could barely walk in suits and small girls in meringue dresses. The small girls looked at me with great fear and then quickly ran to their parents and grabbed their hands. I think many of the people I met were going to a splendid church which had a great tower. It looked like it was from the colonial era and when I looked it up I found out it was the ELCT Lutheran Church bilt by missionaries in 1890. It was apparently the oldest church in Njombe Region. With no aesthetic thought there was a large telecoms mast built just 100 metres from it.

634. The Lutheran Church at Lupembe was built in 1890 and is the oldest church in the whole Njombe Region.

I passed the church and then descended past tea plots owned by local farmers to the village of Igombola where there was another church, a Catholic one above the small village. On the other side was a large tea factory called The Lupembe Tea Factory. It was surrounded by large tea fields which looked like they were professionally managed by the Factory. The tea factory was long and quite squat and not like the tall 5 story tea factories of India or Sri Lanka. In those factories the fresh tea leaf entered the top floor to wither and then descended floors to ferment before it reached the ground floor where it was crushed and then fired. Here it seemed the withering must be done in one building and then it is taken over to an adjacent one for further processing. The factory did not look that well maintained and the corrugated iron sheets were quite rusty. I wonder if this was a legacy of the German colonial period or whether it was planted in the last 80 years.

635. The village of Igombola with the Lupembe Tea Factory located on the hill above it.

636. Passing a small cash-croppers tea garden and a recently harvested and planked in situation eucalyptus patch between Igombola and Mfrika.

There were lots of small farms beside the road especially near the tea factory where there were many vegetable plots on the damp valley floor. As I left Igombola on a steeper track I saw other large areas of tea growing. I am sure these are individuals who then sell there plucked leaves to the Lupembe Tea Factory to process. There were also more and more maize fields on these steeper slopes. The forests of eucalyptus were plentiful here also but they were mainly just isolated copses as large areas had already been felled. At the end of the longish climb up from Igombola village was the village of Mfrika. It looked quite idyllic perched on a hilltop where a few ridges met. Its neat steep fields where radiant in the sun and its buildings looked well made and possiblily from the colonial era also. Unfortunatelty I had to turn off before I got into the heart of the village.

637. Looking north down one of the side valleys from the ridgetop between Igombola and Mfrika which the track tries to follow.

638. Some of the individually owner tea garden plots at Mfrika which are grown as a cash crop to sell to the Lupembe Tea Factory. These buildings looked like they were from the colonial era.

I now followed the track to the NE for nearly 20 kilometres. It was quite wild with very few homesteads en route. Those that were there had a pioneer feel to them and were clearing the land to plant maize and tea. I also saw a few avacado trees planted in plots some with a hundred trees of so. The road followed the crest of the ridges, which were a confused jumble and not really running in any particular direction. On each side of these ridges were deep valleys. Occasionally the track dropped down into a saddle and then climbed up another ridge. It was frequently steep, both up and down, and I pushed on a few ascents. As I neared Madeke I saw more and more avocado plots and also a few steep fields of pineapple. They were far too many for local consumption and I wondered how they could get them out to market on this track without them being bashed to a pulp in the back of a lorry.

639. Looking back down to a hamlet beside Mfrika with the track winding along the hilltop ridge back to Igombola and Lupembe.

After a couple of hours climbing and descending knolls and hilltops on this network of ridges I finally saw the village of Madeke on a hilltop in the distance with its corrugated iron roofs shining in the sun. There were still a few saddles I could see I would have to drop into and climb back out of. There were at least 2 signs in English for “Avacado Farms” and they were signposted at 4 and 5 kilometres away so they must be significant operations. I climbed the final hill and entered the mayhem at Madeke. In the main square was a crowd and a man on a loudspeaker. He was shouting into a microphone giving some sort of Pentacostal service. The volume of the speakers was at the maximum and his shouting sounded like a madman’s rant. I cycled through the crowd and past him and on to where I heard there was a guesthouse.

640. On the ridgetop track between Mfrika and Madeke. Virtually none of this track was flat. It was either steep up or steep down.

There was a guesthouse but it was very simnple. It was only 7000 schillings (£2) but for that all you got was a concrete room with a bed with a bottom sheet and a well used nylon blanket. There was a washroom with a bucket of cold water, and another cubicle with a cracked squat toilet and a large container of water and a small jug. It was marginally better than a tent because there was a table I could use to write on so I took the room and would sleep in my sleeping bag.

As I was settling in Branson appeared. He was a long term boarder in another adjacent building and he spoke good English. He was a young, upstanding, likable man initially from Dar es Salem and had finished high school. His father had bought an avocado farm here and sent Branson up here to develop it and make it profitable. Branson was dutifully doing this and had been here for a year now. He was working in cahoots with another white avacado farmer, who had transport, in getting his fruits out to market. He offered to walk me back to the village and show me where I could get some food, soft drinks and oil for my chain. En route he pointed out his farm a couple of kilometres away on a ridge. He has something like 60 acres but just a fraction of that was planted. Just 5 acres in all but that had over 600 avocado trees on it. In town he seemed to know everyone and he was warmly greeted by all. We walked past the Pentecostalist ranter who was still going strong now with beads of sweat running down his face and went to a simple resturant where I had beans and rice, and Branson had chips. I noticed he said grace and later I asked him which of the three churches here he went to and he said the Catholic one. Back at the lodge I felt exhausted and collapsed onto the bed. I dont know if it was the altitude or the heat but I needed to lie down. I woke at 1900 and then went and found the table in the other building and wrote for 2 hours until I was done. I went to bed afterwards as tomorrow is a long day with no water, and no villages or hamlets, as I go over more isolated ridges for 45 kilometres to Taweta but with over 1300 metres of ascent and 1900 of descent.

Day 106. 23 August. Njombe to Lupembe. 72 km. 8 Hours. 780m up. 1040m down. I had a huge breakfast again at the Hillside Hotel as I knew it would be a long day. I set off at 0900 on a slightly overcast morning. Initially I had to freewheel back down the steep hill to the river on the north side of town where the Ruhuji Waterfalls are. I crossed the top of the falls, now small in the dry season, and then started the steep climb up the other side of this small valley. The road here was very steep and the verge non-existent, and there were quite a few vehicles so after cycling some of it I decided to push. About 5 trucks passed me barely going any faster as they were fully loaded and this slope was their limit in first gear. It took about 15 minutes to get to the top. Here I noticed that with the torque I had put on the back sprocket the wheel had moved forwards and the chain had come off. It was because I had not done the axle nuts up as much as I liked, as one had slipped the thread. I thought about going back into town and taking a day off while a metal worker tried to fix it for me. As a last resort I swapped the nuts over and tightened them up again and they seemed to bite on the thread. Hopefully that has fixed the problem for the time being.

Soon afterwards I left this busy road, which went to Iringa on the very busy T1 road which I was avoiding, and headed off to the east on a smaller quiet earth and gravel road. It was initially busy with small tuk-tuks which are the shape of taxis and local buses here. These corrugated boxes could take about 4 people and they bounced along this dusty road with their small wheels trying to cushion the bumps. After a few kilometres though most had dropped off their passengers in the small villages which crowded the road at the start and were heading back into Njombe again and the road quickly emptied. It was a bumpy, washboarded road and not great for bikes. I then noticed a few other cyclists on a small path beside the earth track and went over and looked at it. It was a perfect and and quite smooth and it went parallel to the earth track for a good 15 kilometers. It was narrow and when a cyclist came the other way someone would have to give way but it was much easier in all.

627. Passing the large tree plantation after leaving Njombe on the road to Lupembe. The trees were mainly eucalyptus like this dense stand, but also Bhutan Pines and Grevillia

Much of these first 15 kilometres were through a huge tree plantation. It was a limited company which had probably taken over running a state owned project from long ago. The trees grown here were eucalyptus, grevellia and Bhutan pine, with eucalyptus being the most popular. There were some tall stands of it which looked ready for harvest soon. It was very dense with large straight trunks packing the forest and many smaller shoots coming from the base so it was almost impenetrable. Various parts of this estate were continually being harvested and I noticed that even the eucalyptus were being turned into planks and building lumber. There were a few loggers camps beside the road where the cutters stayed in simple shacks with their families. I could hear chairsaws in the forest as the trees were felled. As I cycled I passed a few lorries loading up with planks to take them off to a merchant to stack and dry out.

The trouble with this forest was it was on a flat landscape, quite dusty and totally uninspiring. It was not for some 20 kilometres or so that small hills started to appear again and there was something to look at. There was no farming or even villages in the forest plantation at all. However it was fast to cycle through given the lack of hills. When I did eventually get to a village it was dusty and windswept. The red dust from the road coated all the houses, and their yards if they were near the road, and I am sure the insides of the houses would have a coating to this fine dust over everything. It looked like a very uninviting place to stay, especially on this overcast morning with a strong wind which was lifting the dust and blowing it in clouds down the road.

629. The road was packed red earth with a lot of rubble type stones embein it. It was quite dusty and not as smooth as it looks.

Soon I got to the small town of Kidegembe. It had some large buildings in it which must have been for local government business. I was also surprised to see quite a few guesthouses and lodges here and some looked quite new. In fact the whole town looked like it was having something of a boom and I was surprised to see brighter grocery shops and even a petrol station. I later learnt that there were many Njombe district council offices here. It was far too early to stop at though so I freewheeled out of the east side of town and continued towards Matembwe where I hoped to stay in another 20-25 kilometres.

628. After the dull plantation on the flat plain east of Njombe the landscape started to have a bit of character from Kidegembe village eastwards.

The road to Matembwe was the same with stones and rubble mixed with red dust and then graded into the road and packed with rollers and hundreds of lorry tyres. The trouble was much of the red earth had turned to dust and got blown away or washed away in the rainy season leaving the stones protruding. It was a bumpy ride and even on the downhill sections I could not let the brakes go otherwise the bike and I would have rattled to destruction. There were some larger hills where I thought it easier to push, especially as I did not want to stress the back sprocket and chain. From the tops of these hills I often then followed a ridge before dropping down into another valley and starting over again. The landscape here was more pleasant and the villages nicer but the overcast day and wind sucked the light and joy out of it. The landscape was also heavily logged and there were large patches of brown brash where trees had been felled in the last 5 years and nothing had yet replaced them. It was only around the villages where there were some maize fields but the rest of the area would take a decade to recover and even then it would not look pretty, but probably a mono tree forest, probably of eucalyptus. I also passed some rough looking large sheds which I think were a plywood factory where pallets of veneer were stacked up waiting to be taken somewhere and glued together to form sheets. A few lorries were heading towards this factory with round logs 2 metres long. These logs were destined to go onto a spindle and be spun round while a sharp blade shaved off a millimetre thick layer like a sheet of paper. This would be folded and stacked on the pallets.

630. The large village of Matembwe was where I intended to stay but I could not see and I liked so decided to carry on to Lupembe.

After some 5 hours I reached a rise and could see the town of Matembwe across the valley. There was a drop down into it and then a steep climb up the other side which I pushed up. The town itself was very scruffy with plenty of dirty shops, mechanics garages spilling onto the street and blackened restaurants. I did not see any lodges or signs for them. The wind was lifting rubbish and dust and I found the whole place unappealing. To be fair to Matembwe it was a T shaped town I just cycled across the top of the T which was its more working side beside the road and I think the nicer part was the stem of the T which I missed. Suddenly I was out of the town near a large outdoor bar. I went in to ask if there was a lodge and the owner, who was called Bryson and had a perfect English accent, said there were no lodges but a few rustic guesthouses. I did not want to go back up the hill so I asked him about the next town, Lupembe in about 10 kilometres. He said there was a lodge there, the Macash lodge. It was only 1600 so I cycled off to Lupembe.

631. Between Matembwe and Lupembe the road passed quite a few small tea fields which the farmers grew as a cash crop. The trees are grevillia and are for shade.

The road was much nicer now. I think largely on account of it being sunny and the wind having diminished. It was perhaps even hillier but there was now more rural farming and less harvested forest, although I did pass another veneer factory. On some of the ridges after the climbs I came across small plots of tea bushes and looked at the map to see there was a tea estate near Lupembe. These farmers must have grown tea as a cash crop to sell to the estate. It took me nearly 2 hours to cover the 12 kilometres but at last I had climbed the final hill and was following the twisted ridgetop road past houses and homesteads which lined the road. There were a few churches here and I had not seen any mosques for a while now. One church had a belltower which was almost in miniature and was only perhaps 3-4 metres high. As I reached the centre of the small town the road became tarmac, presumably to keep the mud and dust down for the residents. I asked a man, who was dressed as a muslim, about the guesthouse and he gave me clear, helpful directions on how to get there. Some 5 minutes later I was there. It was 12000 shillings for the night (£3) and the room even had a hot shower. The water was heated in a large tank outside covered in soot and tar from the logs which burnt under it. They had no food but the owner offered to get me some. An hour later it was dark and I was showered and eating cold chicken and chips from a plastic bag. It was what I needed as I had not had lunch. I tried to do the blog but fell asleep on the comfortable clean bed at about 2030 promising myself to get up early and do it then.

632. One of the many churches in Lupembe. This simple one will no doubt be a beacon of happy singing on Sundays.

Day 105. 22 August. Njombe Rest Day. 0 km. 0 Hours. 0m up. 0m down. I slept well in the comfortable bed and had a late breakfast at 0830. It was a buffet breakfast and I fell upon it like a hungry labrador. I should have felt embarrassed by the amount of times I went up to help myself to another plate or glass of juice, but I was not. After an hour I was replete and knew I could skip lunch. I then went up to the room to write a bit of the blog and that took most of the morning.

By early afternoon I had a pause as I needed to go into the city to do a few errands. It was a short half hour walk to the bustling market place which I had cycled through late yesterday afternoon looking for a lodge. The first thing I did was to go to a Vodacom shop where I could top up my data package for my phone with another 30 GB which should easily see me through Tanzania. It is always stressful running out so I perhaps over bought the amount I needed but I would rather pay extra and not have the stress of running out when I needed google maps to find my way about. The guy in the shop was extremely helpful as I am finding most Tanzanians are. They are friendly, easy going, not at all pushy or inflating their price because I am a tourist. I am finding them as warm hearted as the Zambians.

624. In Njombe I saw a few saws like this one which are attached to a diesel engine with a belt to turn a circular saw blade. It was undoubtedly similar to the portable sawmilIs heard in the forest making the lumber.

The next thing was a haircut. I was unkept with a ring of wild hair and a bald patch poking out of the top of it. The guy at the phone shop pointed to a barber and within 10 minutes I had very short hair and a tidy head again.

I also needed to buy some soap and toothpaste, two things I am constantly running out of. The main street was just wall to wall hardware shops with no groceries even. I have never seen such a concentration of hardware shops and it would have been very easy to buy a spanner or spade on the main street but there was no soap. In the end I found a small household shop in a side street and bought soap and toothpaste.

625. Njombe had a few covered markets. This one was selling a large variety of vegetables and dried beans. There misy have been 5-7 different type of fresh vegetable in this dry season.

There was a covered market nearby and I went into it just to see what they had. It was a bustling atmosphere with traders, men and women, at their stalls selling vegetables, dried fish, and beans. There was not that much variety in the way of vegetable and I suppose that was because it was the dry season and not much was growing. There were fruits like bananas, papaya and oranges, and then the usual tomatoes, aubergines, potatoes, okra and peas. However there were many bags of beans and other pulses like lentils. There were sacks and sacks of beans of all sizes and colours.

626. In the same covered vegetable market there were many different types of beans and pulses. There were perhaps 15-20 different varieties of beans.

I returned to the hotel where I noticed I had yet another puncture on my back tyre. This time I decided to put on the new spare tyre and also a new inner tube just in case there was something embedded in the old tyre which I could not feel. When I tested the old inner tube in my basin in the room I discovered that I was at fault and the patch I put on yesterday had not entirely sealed the previous puncture. When I put the back wheel back on I noticed that the thread on the axle bolt was not gripping that well, as if the thread on the both or the nut was stripped. This was a bit worrying as I could not tighten the wheel up on that side as much as I would like for fear of completely stripping it. I agonised about spending another day here as this would be the place to get another nut or rethread the bolt, but thought it would be OK for a while until I got through the next remote stretch which would take 3-4 days. That evening after the meal I finished the blog and sent a few emails before returning well rested to my comfortable bed.

Day 104. 21 August. Ikonda to Njombe. 84 km. 9 Hours. 1400m up. 1470m down. I had another small breakfast quite early at 0700 as I had potentially a long day. The lodge was now empty as all the Germans had left in the very early morning. I was just about to pack up the bike when I noticed I had a rear wheel puncture. This time however I could not find anything on the inside of the wheel. I then repaired the inner tube hoping whatever caused the puncture was not still there. I eventually left around 0900. Initially I cycled up the track to reach the road where I joined the climb I had paused yesterday.

614. The guesthouse at Udiakonia was arranged around a lovely internal courtyard with all the rooms facing off it. This is a view in the early morning.

It was 500 meters of ascent I had to make in all and it took me up to just below 2500 meters. It was all on the superb new road which the Chinese had built with the wide verges – but it was steep. It was so steep in places that I really thought it was easier to push rather than risk hurting myself cycling up. It was not significantly slower pushing. On and on I climbed and it took nearly two hours from leaving the lodge when at last the gradient eased a bit and I could get on the bike and cycle to the top. It was something of a pass, like a saddle on the ridge and it was distinctly colder up here. I noticed a few of the giant lobelia growing beside the road and many more on each side of the ridge I was crossing. These giant lobelia are slow growing but once in a while they produce a large spike or flowers. They are found in a few higher almost sub alpine places in Africa and I have previously seen them in Ethiopian Mountains, the Ruwenzori Mountains, My Kenya and on the slopes of Kilimanjaro. These isolated vegetative areas on mountains are sometimes called Sky Islands.

615. The giant lobelia were a seldom seen sight today at some of the higher passes. The two in the foreground with purple tinged leaves are ready to flower while the tall spike is the flower.

616. A view down one of the valleys from one of the passes near Ikonda. A lot of the hillsides here were covered in forestry plantations of Bhutan Pine.

From here there were some great views down the valleys to distant hills. They were not alpine in nature but there were certainly montane and the imported Bhutan Pines seemed to thrive on their slopes. It was really quite extraordinary that I was in the middle of Africa and not really that far from the Equator. Certainly the mountains here were similar looking in size and nature to the mountains of Central Scotland. From this lofty pass which I had struggled to climb I now had a descent. Unfortunately the descent was equally steep and it was completely wasted as I had to go down with the brakes on for most of the time except when it levelled out. I dropped a good few hundred meters until I reached a lower ridge which the road followed along its apex. Each side of the road here were a string of hamlets and homesteads who farmed the upper slopes of the ridge. The main crop now seemed to be the maize again and I saw little sign of potatoes which had been so dominant just a few hundred metres higher in altitude. There were also fields of wheat which were starting to ripen into a golden grass with a heavy seed head. The fields were too steep for machinery and I doubt the farmers could afford them, so the few wheat fields which were harvested were all done by hand. Many of the homesteads here had the purple blossom of apricot trees. They were in flower now and the fruit would soon start to form and they would become juicy when the rains arrived in a few months time.

617. Between the higher passes were saddles and ridges were the was a lot of farming. It was mostly maize but there were also many fields of wheat.

618. Nearly every homestead had a tree in blossom. I think they were apricot trees, but there are also apples in the area

As I got closer to Njombe there was more and more lumber stacked up on frames drying in the wind. There were some very large yards with perhaps a million dollars worth of planks stacked up. I noticed the forests here were more exploited and indeed at least half of them had been harvested and were being replanted. It was not sustainable forestry and it seemed there was a bit of a frenzied plunder of the forest and in the near future it would run out and the newly planted trees would not be available for another 25 years or so. I passed a couple of portable sawmills and they were operating. They were a small diesel engine which would drive a wheel with belts attached to it. There was a wheel on the saw table also and these belts would drive this and spin the wheel which had a circular saw attached to it. The logs were fed onto the table and the 4 sides with bark were taken off leaving a square log. This was then passed through the saw multiple times and each time a plank or bit of construction timber was produced. The sides were discarded beside the saw and the cut planks were stacked waiting to be taken to the road. From here they would go to the lumber yards to be stacked. Once the sawmill had done all the logs in a 30 meter radius it would be dismantled and taken 60 meters or so and then reassembled to create another pile of offcuts and sawdust on one side and a neat stack of cut lumber on the other. I spoke to a couple of the men stacking lumber once a lorry had dropped it off and they said that the price of lumber fluctuated throughout the year and it was more expensive in the rainy season as the sawmills were not operating then. I guess the businessmen in the villages would buy the timber now when it was cheap and would try and sell it in 6 months when they could get a good price and handsome profit for it.

619. Throughout the day there were many yards of lumber drying and the hillsides nearer Njombe I felt were in danger of being over harvested.

620. At many of the lumber yards men were restacking and loading or unloading lorries. The price of the lumber rises in the rainy season as harvesting is minimal then.

I had done the more significant climbs and was starting to feel quite drained by early afternoon. I had already done 1000 metres of ascent and not much less in descent and needed something to eat. I passed a couple of villages with what could have been restaurants but decided to cycle on. At last with hunger starting to gnaw at my stomach I could procrastinate no more and at the village of Kipengele I saw another restaurant. I crossed the road and parked outside and went into the kitchen to see what the lady was cooking. She had a large pot of rice, some green vegetables, bean stew and a little beef stew. It was perfect for me so I asked her to plate it up and sat on the bench inside. It was a simple but tasty and healthy meal and by the time I was finished I felt well nourished again. I had not gone very far at all and still had about 40-50 kilometres left but I had done most of the climbing. From here it was an undulating descent.

621. At the larger roadside village of Kepengele I stopped in a local restaurant for rice, vegetables and a bean stew. It usually costs about 3000 shillings or £1 and is simple and healthy.

There were so many lumber yards on the road now, and there were some very large houses getting built here and there. I guess these were for the new timber and grain merchants who had struck gold in the last decade. The rate of change along here now was quite significant and everyone was busy with the lumber and farming. There were no ox carts here but 3 wheeled motorbikes with a tipping trailer. They looked like they were from China and I am sure there are millions there doing the same job as here, and that was being the means by which to move lumber and farm produce around from the farmer to the merchant. They looked very suitable for the task and looked like they could carry half a ton or so. As I neared Njombe there were more and more of them.

622. The 3 wheeled motorbikes with a tipping trailer behind the driver are a common form of transport and are frequently moving sacks and goods around. Here is one having the tipping trailer cleaned

Just before I reached Njombe I was stopped at a police roadblock. The police only wanted to hear my story and were keen to know where I had been and where I was going. I then remembered that Sam and Will, who I met at the Mushroom Farm, had been this way too and had also been stopped at a police road block here. Their policeman was so interested that Sam even let him have a shot on his bike. My policeman could have been the same as theirs and he was very good natured. We chatted for about 10 minutes in all. A bit beyond him I started the final descent to Njombe which was now visible. It was much larger than I anticipated and I later found out it had a population of about 200,000. Large enough to be a city really. It was a steep descent into a small deep valley and then a thigh bursting climb up the other side into the heart of the city.

623. The town of Njombe was capital of the region with the same name. It was much bigger than I expected with a population of about 200,000.

I went straight for the Princess Hotel which was a budget option 1 star hotel favoured by the bikers and overland backpackers. However it was full. I tried a few others but they all looked very tired and some did not have hot water. One said they did but there was no pressure in the system so no hot water flowed. I was getting more and more frustrated so I went a bit more upmarket, but both of those were full. In the end I decided just to go to the best hotel in Njombe which was the Hillside. They had a room for US$35 which had everything I needed and as it was now dusk I decided to stay there. I checked in, had a shower with copious amounts of hot water, washed my clothes and then ate in their restaurant downstairs. I did a little blog in the evening but I was quite tired and had all of tomorrow to do it as I would have a day off.

Day 103. 20 August. Iwawa to Ikondo. 29 km. 3.5 Hours. 500m up. 740m down. I had the small breakfast and then packed up and left by 0900. It was still 110 km with at least 1600 metres of ascent to Njombe, which was too far for me to go in a day even on the tarmac road. I say at least 1600 metres of ascent because that is what the apps say, but in reality it is more as the apps do not account for every up and down and miss a lot out. I returned 500 metres to the main road and then turned east, or right, and cruised down to a large but empty roundabout going round 270 degrees to start the descent to Ikonda. The road was superb with a wide verge on each side and a line of yellow dots separating the empty main carriage way from the verge. These yellow dots would cause the car tyre to vibrate if a car strayed into the area. The tarmac was smooth from the edge of one verge and right across the road to the edge of the other verge. Even without the wide verge the road was very safe as there were hardly any vehicles on it.

605. The view to the hills around Iwawa. The land is cultivated right up the hillside and between the stands of pines grown for lumber.

I started to freewheel down the hill and picked up quite a bit of pace and was doing well over 60 km per hour. The only problem with the road were the rumble strips and the road builders were obsessed with them and I passed at least 50 of them today. They were not high at all and if I went over them at speed they seemed much less. There were about 5 on this first descent which was long. At the bottom there was a bridge over the stream and then a steep climb. The descents and the climbs were quite steep and each was at least a kilometre long. There was virtually no flat cycling all day. Whenever I did a freewheeling descent I knew, and could often see, that there was an equal climb coming up. I would have much rather just had a flat cycle without the wasted descent with brakes on and then the slow laborious climb which tested my thighs and knees. In the course of the day there were about 6-8 of these drops and climbs and it made for slow progress as my momentum, even at 60 km per hour only carried me a fraction of the way up the climb, and then it was into the lowest gear.

606. A good view of some of the homesteads showing the house architecture and how the homes are surrounded by maize fields.

While descending it was all eyes on the road just to make sure there were no surprises coming. On the climbs however I was going slowly and could look around. It was a very nice landscape indeed. There were rolling hills, some of which rose up into small angular mountains. All the higher slopes were planted up in Bhutan Pines, which might even be self seeding now. I noticed many growing on the steeper road cuttings which were self seeded. Occasionally a patch of pines had been harvested. The areas were obvious as the cut area had regular patches of narrow off cut planks with the bark on, lying in a heap and then an adjacent area of sawdust where perhaps 30-50 trees had been cut into planks on a portable saw mill. All the cut planks were removed and taken down to the track side and then on the villages to dry. Sometimes I saw people collecting the lengths of off cuts, which were no use as lumber, and taking it back to their homesteads for firewood. The harvested areas actually made up very little of the total planted areas and one had to look for them. They were a slight blemish but all in all the landscape here was very beautiful. It was like the foothills of the Alps and not at all what I was expecting. If someone told me these valleys were called the Switzerland of Tanzania I would not have been surprised.

607. Looking down the valley from below Iwawa towards Ikonda where I was heading. You can see how much lumber is grown here.

The lumber industry here must be a big employer. Apart from the portable saw mills, which might be owned by local contractors, there was a lot of work in getting the timber to the road. I suspect the planks were bundled up and then sent down on a wire but they might have been carried out also. They then had to be transported from the forest track to the roadside. This was done in small lorries. Once they were at the road side they were either stacked in a square with overlapping corners and this would have prevented the wood from warping as it dried. The other method was to lay them against a high rail with a plank coming from alternate sides so it formed a V shaped arch. There were frequently men unloading small lorries, stacking wood or loading large lorries which would take them away. There were very few pubs and bottleshops here with aimless men listening to loud music as in Zambia, or Malawi to an extent. Here all the men had found themselves something to do.

608. At Kisinga there were large stacks of lumber. Every roadside village had huge stacks of lumber drying. None was locked and secured showing how Tanzania is relatively crime free.

I passed hundreds of homesteads, all with the distinctive architecture of 3 or 4 rooms under a tall pointed roof covered in corrugated iron. In many places the houses looked new and it was as if this area of Tanzania, and the one around Tukuyu north of Lake Malawi, were enjoying something of a boom. I think it is often the case that society moves from one level of development to another in stages rather than in a gradual climb. In this area of Tanzania the culture has moved from peasant, subsistence farmer of say 20 years ago living from hand to mouth and living in mud huts, to a more professional commercially savvy farmer who sells his surplus and invests their money in lumber or trades. Certainly the areas I have passed through seem very egalitarian and there seem to be very few mansions, or hovels, in these rural areas.

609. As I descended below 2000 metres potatoes pretty much vanished and maize returned as the staple crop.

I continued to drop and climb from valley to ridge. It was largely on the flatter ridges where the hamlets and villages were and this is where the lumber was also. Usually outside people’s houses or homesteads. I noticed there was very little security around the stacks of timber. I am sure they would be difficult to surreptitiously load into a lorry and disappear without being noticed, but there must be a lot of wealth stacked up here. In the UK and Europe this would all be locked up in merchants yards with CCTV. I think crime in rural Tanzania, and indeed Malawi and Zambia, is quite rare. They are old fashioned and conservative societies and crime is really frowned upon. Shoplifters are usually dealt with by the locals who will beat the culprit. No doubt this will change as the old values diminish in a generation or three but at the moment rural society in Southern Central Africa is blessed.

610. It is difficult to overestimate just how much lumber is stacked up in the villages. This was one of many piles in the village of Lupalilo near Ikonda. It was all plantation grown.

Eventually this roller coaster of a road dropped down into Ikonda after some 25 kilometres. Here a huge 650 meter climb started but I had decided to stay here as there was not much afterwards and I would probably need to camp and it was still above 2000 metres and cold at night. I cycled up through the small town noticing a few scruffy lodges. However I had read that all of them are plagued by exceptionally loud music from a couple of pubs until midnight at least. All the reviews pointed towards a lodge on the edge of the town called the Udiakonia Lodge which had a Christian influence, but was considered expensive. I found some quiet roads which meant I did not have to continue to climb the hill and drop down the other side. It was the long flat side of a triangle basically. There were a few schools here as there were hundreds of primary school children, all in their distinctive red jerseys, on the road. They were not as excitable as the Malawi kids and some were even wary of me and moved to the side. If I waved or gave a thumbs up they reciprocated but they would never initiate it and would just stare as I cycled past.

611. The view from the peaceful garden of the Udiakonia Lodge. It was part of a Lutheran charity which helped disabled people to aquire skills to practice in the villages around here.

The lodge was nice and there were about 20 Germans staying here too. The manageress showed me a small room for 25,000 shillings (£8) and assured me there was hot water. We tested it and there was a lukewarm dribble, but I was not going somewhere else. When I came back to the bike quite a few of the Germans were admiring it, especially the Rohloff gear hub. Especially one called Fidus. It turned out Fidus had done a lot of cycle touring and once cycled from Germany to Togo as a young man with his then girlfriend now wife and had also cycled a lot in Africa, especially Tanzania and Malawi. They were a very friendly and gregarious crowd and they invited me for super which was generous of them. I thought little more of it, and wrote my blog in the afternoon while they went into Ikondo to look at a project. Later some of the Germans explained the lodge and the adjacent buildings to me. The lodge and the buildings were all run by the Lutheran Church. It was essentially a charity that helped the local disabled people. Some, about 10, were here full time and others came to get trained in various crafts like carpentry or sewing and then they could take those skills back to their village and earn a living from it.

As dinner approached I chatted to more of the Germans and was quite in awe of what I learnt. It turned out that Fidus was a quite extraordinary character. After his cycle touring trip to Africa, which involved crossing the Sahara, Fidus had worked with handicapped people in South Germany. Initially he was part of a very small team but as his career unfolded he became quite senior until he was responsible for 500 staff and 1000 disabled clients. At the same time he was a member of the Lutheran Church in Neuhausen near Stuttgart. With his love for Africa and his experience and competence he was able to establish a small charity in Ikonda helping the disabled people in the community here. This charity was called Udiakonia. This has grown over the last 25 years into what it is now. It has trained hundreds of disabled people in the area to learn skills which means they can return to their villages and become an active member. It has a small residential unit here where some disabled people live and participate in the running of the organization. It has this guesthouse where most European visitors to the region stay and the accommodation charge goes some way to help fund the project. It has a 440 kilowatt hour hydro electric plant to help develop the region. It also sponsors 500 children to go to school and have their meals with sponsorship from Germany. It really was making a huge difference to the community here. And all of this can be attributed to Fidus and his vision and service and also the Lutheran congregation of Neuhausen for fundraising. It was a remarkable success story.

612. The brass band and the choir at the Udiakonia Centre at Ikonda at the celebratory meal I was invited to.

The meal that evening was in the main hall of the organization and it was a way that the local people involved in the project in Tanzania could thank the visiting people from Neuhausen, all of whom belonged to the Neuhausen congregation. Many had been here quite a few times and I think Fidus had been here 25 times. Some of the Tanzanian side of the operation had also visited Germany through the years. The celebration in the hall started with the local brass band and then a choir. The brass band was pretty good but the choir was exceptional and their singing made my arms tingle. Then there was a long series of speeches in Swahili and German where people were thanked and prayers said. The local deacon at the church also gave a talk and you could see she was an exceptionally warm and kind person. After an hour we all had the meal, which was something of a communal feast as the 50 people in the hall all lined up to serve themselves to the simple but healthy dishes. I was sitting next to one of the German congregation, a lady called Heike, who explained everything to me as the celebration unfolded. After the meal there was more singing and then a long series of heartfelt goodbyes as the German congregation were all leaving at 0400 in the morning for a week’s hiking. It was quite a privilege to be invited to the celebration and be part of it. Back at the adjacent lodge I had a chat with Fidus and was quite in awe of what he had achieved here. Many people have a dream to establish a charity like this but few have the social entrepreneurship and acumen and warmth to actually create it and make a real difference to peoples lives, and Fidus had these skills in abundance.

613. The whole Udiakonia Centre and project was due to the warm-hearted Fidus, with help from the congregation of the Neuhausen Lutheran church near Stuttgart.

Day 102. 19 August. Iwawa Rest Day. 0 km. 0 Hours. 0m up. 0m down. I was tired in the morning. My legs had peddled my 20 kg bike, 40 kg of luggage and 100 kg of me up some 4000 metres in the last 3 days and needed a rest. Especially as there was a lot more to come on this hilly section in West Tanzania. So it was some relief to wake up with stiff legs, see the sun was already shining through the window and then roll over and go back to sleep for another hour. I eventually got up at 0800 and went down for breakfast. It was just 4 slices of bread, an omelette and a thermos of ginger tea. I saw the accountant had potatoes, so I asked for two of them also.

604. The town of Iwawa was pleasant with wide, clean streets and a variety of shops for many trades. It had a planned feel to it.

After breakfast I moved a table to the window so I could have a view and then brought a chair up from the restaurant as there was none in the room. I then spent the entire morning and early afternoon writing the blog. By mid afternoon I was nearly finished but thought I better have another shower and wash my clothes while there was still some time and sun to dry them. In the shower I heard some really loud bass music and hoped they were not going to have a party for the rest of the day in the function room.

Once out of the shower I looked out of the window and saw a small lorry full of loudspeakers playing some nice music but very, very loudly. I have seen a few of these in the last 10 days and it is usually a wedding and this one also seemed to be. There were about 50 people, all well dressed and with the women all in one dress or another as if they belonged either to the brides or the groom’s family. They looked happy and relaxed and either chatted of danced to the music. The music was very good, a gospel type singer with a chorus and some instruments like a synthesizer or slide guitar. I looked a few of the songs up and a couple were sung by Atosha Kissava, a well loved Tanzanian singer. The DJ hopped through a list of artists for an hour. Then the music stopped and the small truck drove away and everybody got into two waiting buses and drove off leaving the place quiet and deserted again.

In the evening I just relaxed, read some news and did a bit of research on the route ahead. My next goal is Njombe where I will have a day off. It is just 110 km away, but involves a further 1700 metres up and 2000 metres down. However the accountant at breakfast told me it was tarmac all the way so this will make the descents much faster and easier.

Day 101. 18 August. Kikondo to Iwawa. 60 km. 9 Hours. 920m up. 1470m down. I slept well and was warm in my sleeping bag under an enormously thick blanket. I was woken in the night twice with severe cramps in my thighs which were painful. But in the morning I was hungry and the younger brother showed me a tea shop where I could get some fried buns and a mug of tea. It seemed many people in this village came to these tea shops and the 3 or 4 in a row were very busy. The village was shrouded in mist on the way to the tea shop and it was cold and damp. Everyone else were dressed in thick jackets but I had shipped my home months ago. Everywhere in the village were huge sacks of potatoes. Every shop, tea shop, and the yards of house had piles of 100 kilo sacks piled up waiting to be sold or stored. This village was built on potatoes with huge terraces around the entire hilltop so it looked like an iron age fort. On each terrace there were no fields or demarcations, the whole terrace was cultivated as one and now with the harvest done the entire rings of terraces were turned over and bare earth waiting for another crop to be planted. It was one of the friendliest and liveliest villages I had stopped in and there was a lot of banter in the tea shop with me and each other.

596. Looking south of the main ridge on the lip of the Kitulo Plateau down the escarpment slope to the Rift Valley some 2500 metres below.

By the time I came out the mist had burnt off and it was bright sunshine. It was still cold though and as I set off in a single shirt and cycling shorts I worried I was unnderdressed. However pretty soon I was climbing again and warming up as I entered the Kitulo Plateau National Park. This park covers the large plateau and I was going to cycle along the southern edge of it along the top of the escarpment before it dropped off to the south down the steep slope into the Rift Valley. As I cycled up the warm moist air from the Rift Valley was rising and condensing and the whole section was in the mist. It was cold again and quite eerie and I could easily imagine I was in some sub alpine temperate climate like Scandinavia or New Zealand and not in the heart of Africa. The Kitolu National Park is known primarily for its flowers and it is sometimes called the Serengeti of Flowers. I saw quite a few including a Giant Groundsel, Dendrosenico, some proteas, and lots of ericacious ground plants. There were not a lot of other flowers at the moment but in the rainy season from December to March, Kitolu is a kaleidoscope of colour apparently.I cycled across this predominantly treeless plateau for a couple of hours reaching nearly 3000 meters at one point, twice the height of anywhere else on the tour so far. The road was poor and it was very stony but it was quiet and peaceful.

597. The Giant Groundsel, Dendrosenecio, spieces I saw at about 3000 metres in the mist. They are prolific on the bigger mountains of East Africa like Mt Kenya, Kilimanjaro and Ruwenzori.

By midmorning I started to descend slightly and entered into extensive eucalyptus forests. It was alarming to see how prolifically they were spreading, and in places there was a red hue to the hillside where their new leaves were emerging from buds. As I descended more they were the dominant tree with some large specimens and I would say there will be little stopping their spread. They are an invasive species, an Australian weed, in this environment and one can only hope they do not blanket the whole of the flower-filled plateau in 30-50 years. As I descended further I crossed a few small streams and then came across a large dairy farm. It was spread out along each side of the road for about 5 kilometres and there must have been about 500-1000 Holstein-Friesian cattle, which are primarily milking cows. I was surprised to see them and with the open plains, rolling hills, large eucalyptus trees and these dairy cattle I could easily have thought I was in Australia.

598. A protea species on the top of the Kitulo Plateau. This Plateau is sometimes called the Serrengetti of Flowers and is ablaze with 350 types in the rainy season from November to March.

Beyond the grazing fields on the lower slopes of the hills surrounding the plain I saw hundreds of white dots on brown areas. It took me a while to realize these were potato bags, either with a harvest or with seed potatos for an upcoming planting. As I dropped down the ridge more and more the cultivated areas of potatoes covered everything. There were fields as far as the eye could see and white bags everywhere. There must have been thousands of hectares of potato fields up here and every bit of land was cultivated except for the higher slopes. As I came down into a valley which was completely covered in potato fields I noticed that some farmers were already planting. The farmers here had the same digging hoe as I have seen since Zambia but with a much longer handle, almost 1.5 metres long. With these they make troughs and ridges. In one field I saw 4 men in a diagonal line with furrows full of potatoes every 10 centimetres. The 4 men were busy pulling the ridge of earth on the other side of the potatoes from where they stood onto the potatoes burying them. They were staggered each pulling a ridge so they were covering 4 lines of potato at once. The whole operation looked very organized.

599. On the way down the east side from the Kitulo Plateau I came a Ross a large ranch with 500-1000 Holstein-Fresian cows. In the distance are white potato bags on the hillsides.

The bumpy track then reached a section of tarmac at the village of Ujuni and I sped down the road loving the silence from the rattling panniers. There were some very simple cafes in Ujuni so I had a meal here. The only thing the lady had was rice, a bean stew and a beef stew for I had a portion of all for 3000 shilling and then continued down the tarmac road, past the other villages of Kitulo and Nkenja. The houses here were all the typical brick houses with the tall corrugated iron roofs but there were also larger timber sheds with corrugated iron roofs and I think this would be where they stored the potatoes. I have never seen such an all encompassing potato growing area. There were no other crops, it was just potatoes and if there was a disease like blight there were no other crops to eke the farmers out over for a year. Eventually this lovely tarmac stretch came to an end and then it was back to the bumpy stony road as I descended steeply to a junction.

600. On the hillsides and valley floor around the villages of Ujeni, Kitulo and Nkenga every piece of land was devoted to the potato.

Here I had a choice of ways. The preplanned route which went up a steep stony road to Makete village and then on to Iwana in 20 kilometres, or up a less steep hill on a rocky road which I thought would have less up and down for 20 kilometers. I abandoned the preplanned route and threw caution to the wind and took the latter, which was the left fork. It was a mistake and it turned out to be much hillier as it went through extensive Bhutan pine plantations. It seemed to be a well managed forest with lots of different growth ages. Between the patches of forestry were maize fields still full of dried standing maize with the cobs still on. It looked a poor harvest unless most of the cobs had already been picked and what was left were the ones left to ripen a bit more. This forest and maize went on for about 10 kilometers until I got to the village of Ivalali. It was thriving with potatoes, the maize I had just past and timber.

601. Looking across the segmented Bhutan Pine plantations interspersed with maize fields to the distant village of Makete, where I should have been.

In the forest the timber was cut and turned into lumber as where it was felled I presume by a small portable sawmill. There were planks along the road before Ivalili waiting to be picked up by truck and then transported back in a lorry to be stacked at Ivalali and also at Iwawa where I was going. There were huge racks of the timber curing in both places and the main use for them seemed to be roof trusses for the tall roofs. It must have taken considerable effort by the lorry drivers to bring the timber down to Njombe and out to Iringa and then to the rest of Tanzania and onto Malawi.

602. The trees are cut where the grow and then are planted into lumber where the fell before being carried to transported to the roadside for a small lorry to collect them.

From Ivalali there was a bumpy descent for 5-6 kilometres down to Iwawa past small hamlets which were really just a part of that town. The tracks here were steep and it was really just suitable for motorbikes. It took a good half hour to negotiate my way down with the brakes frequently applied until I got to the bottom of the valley, where there were extensive stacks of lumber drying. I then had a exhausting steep push up roads to meet another segment of tarmac road and merge back with my preplanned route. I think my detour cost me at least an hour and prossibily and extra 200 metres of climbing.

603. One a small lorry picks up the lumber and planks it is taken to a village like Ivalali or town like Iwawa and stacked as part of the curing and drying process.

Iwawa was not like any other town I had seen on my trip. The main street was very wide and the shops were back from that again. There were stationary shops, electrical shops, plumbing shops and even a couple of 2 story shopping centres. It was also clean and tidy and not at all chaotic. It felt as if were planned and the planners had sought to create a feeling of space and openness. I cycled down through the town on the main street passing a couple of rough looking lodges hoping the one I earmarked had a room and I would not have to return. I then took a side road to the Madihani Villas Lodge some 500 metres away. When I got there it was very quiet and I feared it had closed when I heard someone shout ‘You are Welcome”. They had a room but no food or even drinks. She showed me a cardboard box with various bottles of spirit jumbled in it, but I explained soft drinks and she had none. There was one other guest, an accountant from Njombe, and he helped translate and he said I could order a takeway which I asked the manageress to do and she did. I arrived quickly and after I ate it I went up to the room to have a shower. However there was no hotwater so I went into the clean sheets with 2 days of sweat on. I woke in the night and tried the water again but still none, so I tried the neighbouring room, which still had the key in the lock. There was hot water here so I took a shower in the middle of the night. Such are the foibles of plumbing and maintenance in most lodges.

Day 100. 17 August. Kiwira to Kikondo. 47 km. 8.5 Hours. 1740m up. 300m down. Peter, one of the lodge managers, gave me a great breakfast with eggs and coffee. I needed it as today was just an ascent as far as I managed to go up towards the Kitulo Plateau. I had been aware of this climb for months and anticipated it. I set off at 0930, a little late, and cycled the 200 meters to the T junction and turned right north up through the rest of the town and then into the countryside again. The climbing started straight away and the road was a bit busier than I would have liked given the pitiful size and state of the verge. However I could stay on the road and move on the verge when traffic came up behind me and I could usually hear it as it was roaring up in a low gear. There were many motorbikes on the road and very few cycles. In fact I hardly see any bikes at all. The motorbikes are the beasts of burden and they frequently are loaded down with sacks of agricultural produce or 2-3 passengers in addition to the rider. Most of the bikes were extremely noisy and I am sure a lot of them had special mufflers on their exhausts to enhance their noise, and supposed masculinity. In addition to the motorbikes were the buses which could seat about 20 at a push, and a few returning petrol tankers heading back to the terminal from dropping their load in Malawi. As I cycled out of the town the noise seemed to ease a bit and the climb was never desperately steep.

587. On the way up the endless climb from Kiwira to Isyonje i passed many banana groves at the beginning some with a lower tier of crop like coffee here.

It was Sunday morning as I climbed up through the series of villages with one following as soon as the previous one ended. There was some great singing coming from the churches I passed. Some were exceptionally happy and powerful gospel anthems with choirs of women belting out songs. I would have loved to have peeked inside them as some of the singing almost gave me goosebumps. I also passed one church, The Evangelistics Assemblies of God, where the pastor was berating the congregation, shouting fire, brimstone and pools of burning sulphur at them. I had a pause from the climb outside this church and he was still going some 10 minutes later, bellowing until his voice was coarse. I wondered why anyone would go to him and not one of the jolly services with the ladies choirs. His audience must be the religious masochists who believe everyone is born into sin and wearing a hairy shirt, cold bathing and his sermons are the only redemption.

588. The homesteads were all surrounded by banana groves, potatoes plots and bean fields. Beyond the homesteads was green forest on the hillsides

As I climbed, the farming and vegetation changed. Bananas were everywhere and all of the homestead houses were smothered by them with just the tops of the tall pointed roofs poking out. I even saw a few plantations where bananas were the overstory crop and beans and coffee grew on the ground. However the banana leaves were so large that they blotted most of the light and the beans and coffee grew slowly in the shade. There were also many avocado trees appearing, and some homesteads were covered in them while others just had a few trees. Beside the road I also saw the first of the potato fields and soon they were everywhere with small fields full of them and many were now being harvested. There were large white sacks of potatoes, probably 100 kilo sacks, everywhere in the fields. They were also on the backs of motorbikes as they were getting driven from the fields to the homestead. There were more and more beside the road for sale and they were soon as common a sight as tomatoes in Malawi.

589. Halfway between Kiwira and Isgonje there were more and more farmers with potatoes and many were harvesting them.

The trees changed too and soon there was eucalyptus everywhere and the air was full of the aroma of their resin. I am not sure if they are used for their their wood or used as firewood. Many people beside the road were selling bundles of sticks which would be used for firewood. I think these replaced the sacks of charcoal which lie along the road in Malawi, and Zambia especially. There were more and more pines appearing too. However what really stuck me was outside this farmed strip on each side of the road were green forests which covered the hillsides and stretched away into the distance. To my east the distant hills were big and their great rounded shapes loomed large over the forest from which they gently rose from. Their rounded summits were often covered in mists as the warm air in the Rift Valley rose up in the winds cooling and condensing

590. The village of Idweli was just before Isyonje and you can see the roof designs clearly with the tall roofs

As I was on the verge for much of the time I was vulnerable to get a puncture from either from the copious amounts of broken glass or other fragments. I had not had one since Zambia with these new Schawalbe Mondial tyres so I was overdue and got one at Ntokela. I pulled over into the forecourt area of a few shops well off the road, and started to take the paniers off. The shopkeepers looked up and knew what was happening and went back to their work but soon the kids in the neighbourhood found out and they all came to watch. There were about 20 of them in the end all sitting about 10 meters away watching respectfully and calmly. It was a piece of wire from the reinforcing from a tyre which had gone right through the Schwable’s. I managed to find it and pull it out with the pliers and then patch the inner and refit it. It took about 20 minutes, as it was the back wheels and that is always more fiddly. Once I finished I felt I should give a bow to the kids, but gave them a wave and they all waved back in unison as I headed up the hill.

591. On the climb between Kiwara and Isgonje the road had a small verge. Motorbikes are the common mode of transport, here with two baskets of chickens.

After many hours and having climbed from 1350 to 2350 I at last reached the Isyonje. I was tired and stopped here for some biscuits and sugar water. The shop keeper said they did not have a fridge because they did not need one as the nights were so cold. I had been looking forward to leaving this road which I had essentially been on since coming down from Livingstonia a week ago. It was not unpleasant but the culture along it was not that rural and veered towards commercial. This was where I would turn off from it and go across country on small roads for a good 2 weeks until I got to Mikumi 650 kilometres to the east. However as soon as I turned it off my heart sank as instead of a beautiful packed earth road which I could cruise along I found myself on an incredibly stony road. It was like cycling over rubble and the bike was bouncing every 20 cm as it had to go over a dust covered rock.

592. As I cycled up to Isyonje potatoes became not only the dominant crop but the only crop.

It was a bumpy 10 kilometres to the high village of Ngoma. On each side of me were extensive views, especially to the south where the land stretched away down to the Rift Valley and the end of Lake Malawi now some 2000 metres below me. The road was very rough though but the motorbikes still managed it well with their suspension and bounced along with large sacks of potatoes or 3 people on each one. There were fields of potatoes everywhere now and it seemed nothing else was grown.

593. After the T junction at Isyonje I took the small bumpy dirt road up the crest only the ridge to Igoma (pictured) and beyond onto the Kitulo Plateau.

I had set my sights on Ngoma and when I climbed the last steep section to the town I was hoping for a lodge or somewhere to fill my water bottles so I could camp. The town was bigger than I thought with perhaps 20,000 inhabitants and it did have a lodge. Some ladies directed me to it and I met the manager. From the outside it looked promising. But the manager was the most apathetic young man I had seen in a long time and seemed to think being extremely slow at everything, walking and talking, was cool, so much so I began to wonder if he was 100%. He showed me a room for 15,000 shillings. I would not have stayed in it if it was free. The room was filthy, the unmade bed looked like the sheets had not been changed for months and the pillows looked like they were impregnated with human grease. There was an attached bathroom and it smelled like the urinals in a working man’s pub in the north of England. I left the town and continued east along the ridge top looking for somewhere to fill my bottles so I could camp.

594. The penultimate climb from Igoma to Kikondo was about 400m of ascent on a rough dirt road in the forest.

After another hour I bounced my way along to Kimondo. It was now about 1500 and I thought I would go through this hamlet and into the forest a bit and then find water at a pump or someone’s house. However, just after the hamlet was a steep hill. I knew it was coming but was thinking it can’t be that bad. However, it was worse than I feared. The road climbed a further 400 metres on the stony, bumpy track which was so steep I had to get off and push. It took me about 2 hours to heave the bike up. There were a few lorries and many motorbikes on this climb and some of the bikes were making their passengers walk. One lorry was in the middle of the road up on jacks and chocked up on stones with a broken leaf spring. It was having major surgery and I guess it would be there for a few days.

On and on the track climbed with a few discarded motorbike passengers chatting to me as we walked up to the waiting bikes. I kept hoping for a hamlet but there were none and no water source either. One person told me the next place “was far”. This was alarming as usually “it is near” translates to less than 10 km. I checked my maps and there was a village called Kikondo in 10 km. It was further along the ridge with a fair bit of up and down before I got to it. At last I reached the top and could get back on the bike and bounce along for another hour until Kikondo appeared beyond the next deep dip some 4 km away. I gingerly descended into the dip passing two more broken down cars and then started the 2 km climb up to the village. I was now shattered and there was no way I could cycle even in lowest gear so I just pushed the bike. It was getting cold now the sun was on the horizon to the west and I was at about 2750m.

595. The final push up the last hill at the end of the day to reach the potato fields and village of Kikondo where I spent the night.

I was parched and hungry so I went into the first shop. It was run by a large cheerful lady. I had two packets of biscuits and some soda water and asked her about somewhere to stay. This prompted a flurry of phone calls from the other 3-4 middle-aged ladies outside. I guess these were some of the matriarchs of the village. Pretty soon a younger man appeared in overalls and spoke great English. He had been to university and studied engineering. He and his brother had a guesthouse, mechanic workshop and flour mill, and although just 25 was quite an entrepreneur. We walked over to his large guesthouse and he showed me a small clean room with new sheets. It was perfect. There was just a bucket shower in a communal washroom but there was no hot water. He could get his brother to boil some while he went back to the mill but it was dark now and getting very cold and the thought of drip drying in a freezing bathroom did not entice me so I skipped any form of hygiene and went to bed at 1930.

Day 99. 16 August. Kasumulu to Kiwira. 58 km. 7 Hours. 1220m up. 420m down. The hotel gave me a great breakfast and I was ready to go at 0900. I had decided to go straight up the main road, The B345, to Tukuyu instead of taking the longer, smaller way, as it looked very steep towards the end. The traffic also did not look that bad after all as I watched it while having breakfast. As soon as I left I started to climb but it was quite gentle. There was a verge to the road but it was really quite narrow and often destroyed by erosion. I cycled on it and frequently made the jump up the 5 cm tarmac lip when I got to bad potholes or where it simply vanished.

580. Climbing up the ridge towards Tukuyu on the main road quickly took me out of the valleys below and I got great views of the distant forested hills.

As I climbed I was astounded at how green and forested it was. After the arid time in Zambia and the treeless slopes of Malawi this was lush forest. The homesteads were surrounded by trees and the fields were full of them. Beyond the homesteads were forest clad ridges with almost a jungle like cover with vines growing up the tall trees. I noticed that some of the homesteads were growing 10 or 20 teak trees, easily identifiable by their huge leaves. The houses here on the homesteads were much more substantial than their Malawi counterparts and virtually all had tin roofs. The tin roofs were quite striking as they had a very steep pitch which made them very tall. I don’t know if there was a practical reason or whether it was simply to make the houses look more grand and imposing. Certainly it would have cost more as there was perhaps 50% more corrugated iron used and there had to be many more roof trusses. I don’t think the roof space was used to store any produce and I don’t think it was used as a living space either.

581. The homesteads were much more substantial here with high corrugated iron roofs and productive vegetable gardens around the house.

After a few hours where I climbed gently I was really starting to gain some height and I could see down the tree-clad slopes to the valleys on each side. They were covered in fields at the bottom but at the moment they were fallow. Beyond them the ridges rose up again and were covered in forest as far as the eye could see. Had I gone the other way this morning, further to the east, I would be on the other side of these ridges and in a valley which continued north from Lake Malawi. In this valley were a number of crater lakes as this was part of the rift valley where Africa is splitting in two. At this split there is sometimes volcanic activity every 1000 or 10,000 years and craters are formed and then when redundant they fill with water.

As I climbed I reached a tea estate. I think it was called the Chivanjee Estate. It was quite large but it was the scruffiest and most neglected tea estate I have ever seen – and I have seen a few. The bushes were all at the same height and were being plucked but the fields were full of weeds and creeping vines and these were smothering the bushes. I don’t think there was any weeding done by the estate owners. It seemed though they did give permission for locals to go into the fields and collect fodder by collecting the weeds and I saw many farmers carrying sacks of weeds along the road returning home. The company running this estate was called “Mohamed Enterprises” and it looked like they were running it into the ground. I did not see the factory but there was a sign for one. There were also many homesteads which grew tea and these looked in much better shape with vibrant green bushes all neatly plucked and no weeds coming through at all. I think Mohamed Enterprises would have bought this tea from the local farmers to supplement their own production and process both at the Chivanjee Tea Factory.

582. Many of the homesteads also grew tea in addition to cassava, maize beans and bananas. They would sell the tea to the tea factory supplement their income.

There was little let up in the climb and as soon as one finished there was a small downhill run and then the next slope started. One of these slopes involved a 500 meter ascent on its own. As I climbed I saw the homesteads were all well organised and productive. There was quite a bit of tea grown on them but the main crop now seemed to be beans and they were in many of the fields. Sometimes there were nets over young seedlings which were being propagated in small plastic tubes before being taken to the prepared fields and planted out. There were thousands of seedlings under each net. There was also a bit of cassava and some maize, but tea, beans and bananas were the main crop. I stopped and bought some 20 small bananas for 1000 shillings (£0.30p). For the first time I also saw that the farmers had planted some ornamental shrubs and flowers around their houses and some looked quite vivid.

583. Near Tukuyu was the Kyimbila Tea Estate which looked like it was well managed, especially compared to the neighbouring Chivanjee Estate.

Towards the top of this long 500 metre climb I came across another tea estate. This one was called the Kyimbila Estate and it was managed by the Wakulima Tea Company. It was in complete contrast to the previous one and the fields were bright green with new growth on the well ordered bushes which were all the same size. I think the Wakulima Tea Company was in it for the long term and were probably fertilizing their fields to increase their yield and profit. Their tea factory was near Tukuyu and looked relatively small compared to the Sri Lanka ones. There was no one in the fields at all but then it was a Saturday and perhaps this was a workers day off.

584. Between Tukuyu and Kiwira there were near continuous homesteads and clusters of hamlets. This is the scene just leaving the outskirts of Tukuyu.

I reached Tukuyu but could not see anywhere nice to stay. I had only done 40 kilometres and it was just 1430. I looked at the map and saw there was another small town 18 kilometres away, and it had a couple of simple guest houses. The road to it was flat so I decided to continue to it. Up to Tukuyu the hamlets had been quite spread out and it was not that densely populated, but after this town it was very busy with an almost continuous suburban spread of homesteads crammed together. They were all surrounded by banana plants which almost enveloped them and just the tip on the tall corrugated clad roofs stuck out. Beneath the bananas were beans. It was still very lush and green on this stretch but all the big trees had gone from around the farms, but they still clad the hillsides. There were many timber merchants here and even house builders putting the roofing frames together for the tall roof structures. It was a busy, vibrant active community and everyone seemed busy. There were no ox carts now but a curious 3 wheeled motorbike with a large trailer on the back which even had a hydraulic tipping function. The trailers were easily big enough for two cows.

585. Many homesteads also grew tea between Tukuyu and Kiwira but there were larger areas growing bananas and beans.

Tired and hot I eventually reached the bustling large village of Kiwira which was at a T junction and right at the foot of the first climb tomorrow which was 650 metres. Here there was a simple lodge which cyclists used and I checked it out. The caretaker was called Peter and he showed me a room with a large bed with clean sheets. There was a bathroom with a squat toilet which I am well used to from Asia. It even had hot water. With Peter’s help we rigged up a table from 4 stools and a sheet of plastic so I could write and I was all set. I wasted a bit of time as I fell onto the bed and snoozed a bit before the shower which is always a fatal thing to do. After the shower I went out to eat but there was nothing except for a local bar which just did grilled kebabs and plantains. There was no rice or nshima or vegetables. I had a few small kebabs and plantains and then went back to my room to write just as a power cut started. I was done by 2100 and was tired after the climb. Unfortunately it is the same tomorrow and the day after too, as I continue to climb out of the rift valley.

586. The beans which seemed to grow everywhere were similar to kidney beans.

Back

June 27, 2025

Day 069. 17 July. Rufensa to Luangwa Bridge. 79 km. 7 Hours. 660m up. 1080m down. I had already bought some milkshakes for breakfast so had them at 0630 and then left soon afterwards. I was glad to be leaving Rufunsa and could see no charm in the place at all. It was cold in the morning as the sun was just breaking over the horizon. I crossed to face the oncoming traffic again as I had done yesterday and also because the sun was directly into my eyes and therefore would also be in the drivers eyes, blinding them, if I stayed on the correct side. The road was never that flat and quite undulating; however I saw that there were some quite big hills on each side of the road especially to the north. It was very green here and the forest looked healthy. I climbed over one small ridge to freewheel down the other side into the next valley which was hazy with the smoke from the morning fires.

370. It was cold leaving Rufunsa in the early morning. Already by 0700 there were school children walking to school.

In the valleys between the ridges there were hamlets, some with a few shops but mostly old traditional homesteads with idyllic traditional buildings on them. It was a very pleasant cycle despite the hills and the occasional truck, which seemed to arrive in convoys of 3 or 5 vehicles. Eventually I reached the village of Kaloma, which was the start of the climb which my gadget had warned me was coming. It was a 300 meter ascent over 5 kilometres. I thought about stopping in Kaloma for something to eat but it looked quite scruffy and there was nowhere I thought I could eat without the bike on full display and attracting attention, so I carried on.

371. The homesteads were still very traditional between Rufunsa and Luangwa Bridge.

It was a serious hill and I was soon in the lowest year going up some steep inclines at 4 km per hour. At such a slow speed it was difficult to keep the bike in a straight line, especially if there were potholes about. I cycled up the conventional side as the trucks coming up behind me were barely moving faster than I was, while the trucks coming down were roaring as their engines in low gear prevented them running away and their brakes would have been hot with friction. I managed to cycle up the whole hill without getting off and pushing but I had to keep in a low gear. On and on I cycled past a dubious looking zip line and a boarding school in the middle of nowhere, slowly gaining ground. My thighs were pumping relentlessly and tired, but they were still coping and after a good hour I finally reached the top of the climb with green bush on each side.

373. All the way from Rufunsa to Luangwa Bridge the road was quite hilly and seldom flat. The verge was always quite dubious.

The descent down the east side was quite steep and I sped down for about 5 km passing charcoal sellers and then getting into more homesteads and maize fields. Again some of the homesteads here were very pretty. The hamlets of shops, every 5 km or so now, were not pretty at all and were quite scruffy, noisy and busy. I passed one after the other looking for somewhere to eat until I thought I was just being too picky and stopped at an older lady who advertised food. She had none but directed up a small side street where there was a simple clean restaurant which did the usual nshima and greens and with either fish or sausage. I had been going for nearly 5 hours and the tank was empty so this was a much needed pit stop. As I sat in the shaded concrete area in front of the restaurant I could see the village hand pump. It was constantly busy mostly with women coming to get water in large 20 litre buckets which they managed to place on top of their heads and walk home. Occasionally young boys or older men came also and they carried the buckets away more awkwardly with their handles while it bashing into their legs.

374. The village borehole and handpump was always a busy place. There must be tens of thousands of such pumps in Zambia enabling people to live where it was not possible before.

After the meal I felt much better but the roller coaster ride continued with some vicious short uphills which I was not expecting. After yesterday and then the monster climb this morning my legs were tired. At the top of a few of the hills the verge widened out a bit where people had stopped over the years, and now this served as a place to sell charcoal in bags. I must have passed perhaps 100 charcoal sellers today and the same yesterday. The bags were much larger here and went for 200 kwacha. There were small groups, perhaps families, involved in each venture and the whole area around them was blackened with dust. I did not see the fires burning to make the charcoal but assumed they were nearby in the bush. I don’t know if the charcoal sellers were local farmers who had branched out into this side line or whether they were displaced or opportunistic families from poorer areas who had moved here and this was the only way they could find to make a living. Either way it looked an unpleasant business and the people were often grubby with their clothes covered in soot.

372. The homesteads were also in the forest sections on a couple of the larger ridges I had to cross .

At last the hills eased off and it was now a more sustained descent down for 5 km to the Luangwa River. The roadside got a bit more built up as I approached the town called Luangwa Bridge. It looked as if it was worse than Rufunsa and I cycled right through it without stopping. There were a few lodges here apparently but judging from the rest of the town I guess they would be unsavoury and charmless. Just before I reached the large arterial Luangwa River I took a road to the south which led me down to the river bank and I followed this road for nearly 2 kilometres to Luangwa Bridge Camp. It was a campsite with chalets sometimes used by safari travellers going from one National Park to another. It was a well known rest place and in its hey day was quite cherished.

375. There was frequently charcoal for sale in 200 kwacha bags beside the road and this seemed one of the few ways farmers or villagers could get cash.

Bridge Camp was now run by Mulenga and her husband and had been for the last 3 years. It sat on a slight prow overlooking the Luangwa River which was one of Zambia’s largest rivers and drained the entire east side of the country. Sitting in its reception area I could relax in a slight cooling breeze while the river slowly flowed past beneath. Now it was quite low and the river bed was braided with the water flowing between large sandbanks. On the far (eastern) side was Mozambique and there were a few homesteads here and children were playing near the water while some fishermen were casting nets into the shallows to get small fish which were dried. It was a superb, quiet, peaceful location. The chalet was quite over priced, especially when compared to the chalets at Sinazongwe and Chirundu in the last 10 days, but looking at the alternatives here I had no quibble with it. The food was good and Mulenga was a delightful lady who was very knowledgeable, entertaining and had spent years working within hospitality in the UK. I will have a day off here to catch up with the blog and rest my legs before crossing the river and starting the next Section 06. South East Zambia.

376. Looking across the Luangwa River from Luangwa Bridge Camp. It is one of the major rivers of Zambia and drains the entire east side of the country. On the far bank is Mozambique.

The last Section 05. South Zambia which was essentially from the Livingstone area to here at Luangwa Bridge was probably the best of the 5 sections so far. It was the hardest and most challenging, both physically and also socially, but I had survived both and it was therefore the most rewarding. During this bicycle expedition I had wanted to experience Africa as unsullied by the all-encompassing commercial mono culture, from sophisticated coiture to grubby transactions, which is consuming all other culture before it, and my 2 weeks in the rural hamlets north of Lake Kariba had certainly done that and I will cherish it.

Day 068. 16 July. Chongwe to Rufunsa. 114 km. 9.5 Hours. 930m up. 1250m down. I was up early but waited a while for the breakfast, which was perfunctory but would save me stopping soon. I left just before 0800 and later than I wanted for this huge day. I weaved through the pedestrians in the side streets and then made it onto the chaotic main road with people, large wheelbarrows, cars and trucks everywhere as people were setting up their stalls. It was the most chaotic I had seen anywhere in Africa on this trip, but it was still a long way off Nepal or the rest of Asia for that matter. As all the traffic was going very slowly it was easy for me to sit behind a small truck and go the same speed as it.

Eventually the chaos started to thin as the market disappeared behind us and the traffic started to speed up a bit, but I could still keep up with it on the long downhill stretch out of town for 4 km, down to the Bridge over the Chongwe River. However, up from here it was different. The road was relatively narrow and the verges were dreadful. They were not really part of the road at all but were the stony base of what was the road before the tarmac was laid. It was essentially compacted rubble. To make matters worse there was a lip at the faded yellow line at the edge tarmac and this verge and it was between 5 and sometimes 30 centimetres depending on how eroded the gravel verge was. So it was either one or the other as I could not chop and change as required. It made sense to go on the verge as the road was narrow and when two vehicles met there was no room for them to give me any berth, let alone a wide one, especially if they were trucks. However, the verge was an unpleasant place. There was occasional rubbish, including broken bottles, the surface was bumpy and thorn bushes frequently encroached from the side. I could do a third of the speed that if I was on the road.

365. The Great East Road, the T4, heading east out of Chongwe. This arterial road connects Lusaka with Chipata and then Malawi. Note the typical verge.

Then I noticed that all the other local cyclists were using the other side of the road, the south side and so I crossed over. Here the verge was still packed rubble but it was smoother and much much wider and there was hardly any lip. As usual there were cyclists with large bags of charcoal and these were stacked horizontally across the luggage racks so the bike was well over a meter wide. They were all using the side I was on but as the kilometres started rolling by I noticed more and more heading into town on the other side of the road so they were facing the traffic. Indeed everyone on my side of the road was also heading east and facing the traffic. It was totally contrary to the rules of the road as I knew them from Europe. I then realized that there was almost an understanding between the truck drivers and cyclists as they approached each other. If the truckdriver could pull out he would, but if he could not then he would blow his horn and flash his lights and that was the signal to get off the road and onto the verge. The truck drivers were actually very able drivers but their trucks were large and heavy and if they had momentum, especially going up a hill, they were loath to lose it. Hence the flashing if they could not pull over. The one group of cars which were not accommodating were the 4×4’s either with Zambians driving one with the blue writing of an NGO on the side or White locals or tourists on their way to a game park. As a rule they always drove too fast. And so it continued all day with me riding into the oncoming traffic and occasionally having to drop down onto the verge and this seemed to work. I also had to be wary of 4×4’s overtaking a truck going in the same direction as me so I was always glancing at my mirror if I heard a truck coming.

The road was not a pleasant cycle though and I was always on alert and could not enjoy the countryside as I had done in the last 2 weeks. In the first 20 kilometres it seemed much more built up with small businesses and factories, and also houses behind concrete block walls. I am not sure if this was an extension of Chongwe, or even Lusaka, which was only 50-60 km behind me. However pretty soon these petered out and the maize fields of the plateau and small rural hamlets took their place. Despite being close to the road some of the hamlets were very traditional with all the buildings in the compound made of mud and under thatch.

367. Despite the road there was still many rural homesteads each side of it away from the towns

The road was very undulating with some significant climbs and descents and I was quickly racking up the meters I had ascended. The trouble was the ascents and the descents were too steep for a cyclist to enjoy and after labouring up a hill I had to freewheel down the other side frequently applying the brakes and wasting the momentum. Around Chinyunyu I passed quite a few signs for accommodation with the headman. I assumed this was the headman of the village or community and he was offering camping places or even simple rooms to Zambians and tourists alike, although the signs were old and faded. Also in this area there was a plethora of fringe denominations, perhaps all with a charismatic Pentecostal pastor. Some of the churches looked very rustic and others dilapidated, as the charisma of the pastor waned and the collections dried up. In one 20 kilometer stretch I must have passed 20 of these and that was in addition to the more accepted common denominations like the Seventh Day Adventists, The New Apostolic and Catholic. Some of the fringe ones had magnificent names.

366. On one 2 kilometre stretch there were perhaps 20 eccentric and unique churches in addition to the more established ones.

I passed through many homesteads and a few hamlets but I had my mind set on reaching Shingela where there was a restaurant. I had been going for about 4.5 hours now and the breakfast was long gone. The road was still very undulating so progress was slow and there was a head wind as usual but at last I reached the large village. The restaurant I wanted was closed so I found another and it had the usual: nshima, green stewed vegetables quite similar to mustard greens, and an interchangeable meat, in this case goat. I was beginning to accept this meal as it was all that is available and is the staple. I sat outside the restaurant and watched the vibrant trade of this commercial village unfold.

368. My lunch stop in Shingela where I had nshima (maize meal), spinach and goat, which is very much the staple.

I still had about 55 km to cycle and I could see that after a hill it was largely flat or even downhill. As I left Shingela the landscape got very green as if this area got more rain. To my south was the large Lower Zambezi National Park, a large park with many ecological zones from the river itself to these higher green hillocks. But what was flat on the apps and my map turned out to be more undulating hills and was very taxing. I cycled on and on all afternoon and was never that confident I would make Rufunsa by dusk. However there were places to stay enroute including one forestry camp with green chalets on the south side of the road which almost had me stopping to enquire. But my heart was set on Rufunsa as I wanted to reach the Luangwa Bridge the next day. Thankfully the downhill run into Rufunsa was just what I needed. It went on for almost 10 km and took me from the rolling green forested hills down to the flat plain where Rufunsa sat and I got there about 1730.

369. The descent down the long hill onto the plain where the town of Rufunsa lay. This descent was exactly what I needed after the long day.

I had read about the 4 places to stay and all seemed quite grim, with one in particular to avoid called JB’s. I cycled past the market, concrete shops and the truck stop to the one I had singled out called the Gambit. However when I got there it was dull and there was no one about so I went back to one I had noticed on the way in. They had a room. It was rough and scruffy with a concrete floor, a double bed as the only furniture, and an attached concrete outhouse with a toilet and bucket shower. There was no sink. But I took the room as I was so tired. After I handed the 250 Kwacha over I asked the lady what was the name of this lodging. She said “JB’s”.

The write ups about this lodge on google and Ioverlander were scathing about the place, but I still think they were far too generous. It was filthy, so filthy I didn’t go into the bathroom except to pee. I was not going to have a shower. The whole ceiling had collapsed leaving just the rafters and then the corrugated iron above that. Between the rafters and the roofing sheets were so many cobwebs you could barely see the corrugated iron sheets in some places. She did have the time to change the pillow case but not the sheets or covers. In addition to that there was extremely loud music coming from the attached bar.

The door was just a metal grate and curtain. As I did not bother with a cold bucket wash in the cold bathroom I went out to find something to eat. I passed through the large very noisy bar area which only had 3 bored customers sipping beer from a bottle. It was too loud to talk. In the main market area, where about 30 trucks were also parked, I found a restaurant which did nshima had a chicken, vegetable and maize meal, washed down by sugary drinks. Back at the room I took off my cycling shorts and put on long trousers and kept my cycling top on and crawled into bed. I was too tired to worry about the unwashed sheets and was grateful my head was on clean linen anyway. The music was incredibly loud and it was a good 100 metres away but I soon fell asleep. I woke at midnight and the music was still going but it was more melodic now. How I longed for the rural villages of the last fortnight instead of this low echelon commercialism.

Day 067. 15 July. Katoba to Chongwe. 53 km. 5.5 Hours. 320m up. 340m down. I had a breakfast of granola in the room and then left at 0830 cycling down to the shops and the T junction. Unfortunately the road I had to take was the only one which was not tarmac, as the other direction went to Lusaka. The road was not really gravel but powdered earth and small rocks. It was not pleasant to cycle on as the rocks made it very bumpy and occasionally the powdered dry earth was 5 centimetres deep and this made it almost as bad as sand. However there were always routes through the most rocky or dusty sections and these were usually at the side and this is where all the cycle tracks were. I could only average 10 km per hour at the most and this was despite the fact it was a very gentle downhill slope.

359. The road from Katoba to Lwiimba was about 20 kilometres and very bumpy due to embedded stones

There were homesteads pretty much the whole way here to Mulalika. They were better off than their equivalents on the arid plain beside the Zambesi I had cycled through last week and they had a mix of traditional and newer buildings in their compounds. Occasionally some of them must have had a bore hole because there were vegetable patches beside some of them with small fields under cabbage or mustard greens. I also noticed how a few had the red or purple bougainvillea trees near the huts and buildings, something I never saw in the Zambezi area on homesteads. There were also many more fences here, primarily to keep cattle and goats out I think but it also served to mark off a plot in this slightly more individual and commercial society up here.

360. I passed about 6 depots with hundreds of sacks of corn at each. Apparently the government was buying the maize kernels at 350 kwacha per 50 kg sack.

At Mulalika I saw a huge pile of sacks. I thought they were cotton and it was a cotton buyer. However I asked someone and they said it was maize. The government was buying maize and paying 350 kwacha (£10) for a 50 kilo sack. There must have been over 1000 sacks piled up waiting for lorries to take them off somewhere. In the photo you can just see a small part of the pile. I guess this area produces a surplus and other areas like the Copper Belt north west of Lusaka produces very little as everyone is involved in mining. During the course of today’s cycle I passed another 5 or 6 depots each with around 1000 sacks.

361. Near Lwiimba I spotted a perfect mutual hut or rondavel. It this area the traditional was giving way to modern.

From Mulalika to Lwiimba the road got slightly better but after the Lwiimba it improved significantly all the way to Chilyabale and at last I could go a bit faster across the virtually flat plateau. The closer I got to Chongwe the more built up the homesteads became with virtually every one having a 2-3 room brick or even concrete block house under a shiny corrugated roof. There were still the traditional buildings in the compound and some were very beautiful and well constructed. After some 25 odd kilometres on the earth road I reached the tarmac road at Chilyabale just at the primary school. It was break as I passed and perhaps 100 kids yelled and shouted as I passed which was quite rousing and I made sure I gave them a long wave.

362. The plateau was now expansive and undulating and virtually all of it was potentially good farming but only for a crop a year without irrigation.

I had forgotten just how easy good smooth tarmac is and soon I was flying along the very gentle downhill slope for nearly 20 kilometres to a dry riverbed. There was a steep drop into it and a climb up the other side to take me to Chalimbana which was really a small town with a University and a Government Training School. There were lots of students all over the road and many signs for lodgings, and quite a few fast food outlets. It was quite a vibrant town and it really marked the end of the rural countryside. There were still farms occasionally for the last 10 km but there was a lot of house building going on with many being built inside large gardens completely surrounded by a concrete block wall. The traffic increased also and I had to watch out for people walking 2 or 3 abreast at the side of the road until I reached the main Great East Road, the T4, which went from Lusaka to Malawi.

363. Chongwe market was in the centre of town and at least the size of a football fields. The vegetables section was the biggest but there was also, dried fish, metalwork and even various charcoals.

The T4 was busy and at this point it was narrow. There was a stony verge at the side but this was occasionally 20 centimeters below the tarmac so I had to decide where I was going to ride. As the traffic was going quite slowly I chose the road however after a kilometre or so when I reached the centre of Chongwe it was quite chaotic so I dropped down onto the stony verge with all the pedestrians and the other local cyclists with large sacks strapped to their bikes. Suddenly I burst into a large market area where there were hundreds and hundreds of stalls on the north side of the road. They were mostly selling vegetables and as I cycled past I saw there were lots of different sections, like dried fish and seaweed I think, another had metal work with welders fabricating window frames, wheelbarrows and stoves. Wherever I looked there was the flash of welders rods. There was also a large area of charcoal with huge bags for 300 kwacha right down to shopping bags for 15 kwacha. In amongst all this vibrant activity were the barrow boys with special wheelbarrows locally made at the market. They were very big with a car wheel as the fulcrum point and a large platform at least a meter long to the front of the wheel for carrying a few large sacks. I wove through here to reach the Backpackers.

364. In the metalwork section there were large wheelbarrow with a car tyre as wheels, window and door frames and these various sized charcoal stoves.

The Backpackers were in name only. I was a row of broken bedrooms in a dusty compound with not a bit of greenery or soul. I looked and then sat on the wall outside the reception to find something else. I did and it was three times the price but it had everything the backpackers did not, like hot water and electricity. It was called the Chimthunzi Executive Lodge, but executive it was not. However it was certainly comfortable enough. I settled in and then went for a wander round the market and finally went to the supermarket to get dinner. Choppies always had a counter of cooked food so I got chicken, chips and an aubergine stew and took it back to my room to eat it there and start writing.

That was pretty much the end of this rural deviation which I started in Zimba 14 days ago. It was not the easy option with 650 km and some 6000 metres of ascent and descent. I am sure I could have halved all those figures had I come up the T1 main road to Lusaka and then the T4 to Chongwe but I am sure it would not have been as pleasant or rewarding. This detour, shall we call it the “Lusaka Bypass” took me through the heart of Africa where old values still exist and they have not got eroded by the commercial culture which is now emanating out of the cities and towns, as it did in Europe 50-100 years ago. It was exactly the reason I came to Africa. If I wanted a comfortable and predictable journey I could have just hired a landcruiser and gone from one tourist hotspot to the next, but that would not be in the spirit of this bicycle expedition. I have a few more rural diversions planned but even with this one, The Lusaka Bypass, under my belt I feel my expedition has been a success.

Day 066. 14 July. Mufundeshi on D481 to Katoba. 23 km. 4.5 Hours. 670m up. 210m down. At 0400 the 3 cockerels, two in different tents and one in an elevated chicken house, started crowning. And they did not shut up until Joe let them out around 0630. The one in the tent beside me was especially tiresome. I was already up in my sleeping bag sitting up having granola and more milk when Joe got up to let the cockerels out and then started the fire. After my granola I got up and started to pack and Joe came over and we chatted. To me the farming up here made little sense as he was from the flatlands near Chirundu. I asked him about it and he said it was so dry down there it was not good for farming, whereas up here they get more rain. However I asked him specifically if he got 2 crops a year here and he said no just the one. I didn’t ask if he had livestock or not. Their granary was half full but the quality of the cobs was poor, and many had missing kernels. Soon his brother and the wives were up and they were making breakfast while I and Joe chatted. He was a nice guy and in the end I felt it right to give him 200 kwacha which was over the odds but of great significance to him and small for me. However the whole time I was wondering if the farming was a ruse and basically he and his brother were prospecting up here. There was certainly gold in the area and there was a Chinese gold mine somewhere. Over the course of the day after leaving them I came across a few small abandoned mines and also a couple of local prospectors with hammers and chisels.

350. At Mufundeshi stream I met Joe, his brother and their two wives. They were farming here and allowed me to camp in their compound.

351. They had been farming here for a couple of years and had dug a water source nearby. They lived in tents rather that mud huts and cooked and gathered under this shelter.

I left them at 0730 and immediately started up the next climb. Joe said it was not as bad as yesterday’s, and that was the case. There were a couple of sections where I had to really heave, but not to the extent of straining every sinew. As I climbed it got warm when the sun broke over the ridges and started to beat down on me. On the climb I passed perhaps 3-4 abandoned mines. They had been exploited with an excavator as the tooth marks of the bucket were still visible in the hard earth. There was also another farmer half way up the slope who was a tall lighter skinned man who I am sure was not from these parts or a Tongo of Soli tribeman and must have been a surreptitious prospector. I also passed another man with a large hammer and chisel hidden in a bag and he got very excited when I thought I might be a gold buyer. Eventually after an hour and a half I reached the top of the climb where there were some farms.

352. The climb up on the north side of Mufundeshi Stream was about 280 metres but although brutal was not as bad as yesterday’s climb.

353. At the top of the climb there was good views across the top of the Zambezi Escarpment to where the plateau started.

From here I was essentially at the top of the escarpment and about to reach the plateau above it. To the east the hills continued to rise and the land stretched away with wild forested ridge after the next where I should imagine humans rarely venture, even the hardiest prospector. Luckily I was going north where the landscape was more gentle and there were just a couple of smaller less steep climbs to reach the plateau and 3 hours after leaving Joe and his brother in the depths of the side valley I was finally on flatter ground and reaching villages and hamlets more continuously. This was the same type of farming I had seen around Zimba and Luyaba when I was last on the plateau before descending to the amethyst rich village of Mapatizya 10 days ago. The homesteads were now less traditional and in better shape than those down in the arid plains north of the Zambezi River. It was much more pleasant on the eye and most of the land was cultivated.

354. Just some 4-5 kilometres from the remote Mufundeshi Stream I started to reach the plateau and came across the first farms and a few abandoned exploratory mines. The road improved with every kilometre.

355. The top of the Zambezi Escarpment continued across wild remote hills to the east, but to the north it became gentler farmland.

I had about 5 kilometres of this on a much improved large gravel road until I reached a tarmac road. It was quiet and smooth and easy to cycle on. There were still some significant rolling ridges to climb but then there was often a wonderful run down the other side on the smooth tarmac without the bike rattling like hell over the stony gravel road. I was parched and stopped at a small shop for a drink and then learnt that it was just about 3 kilometres to the junction at Katoba beside Leopard Hill. I had already noticed there was accommodation here and after the difficult day yesterday and the hard morning decided I would throw in the towel here despite it just being midday. I cycled past a lovely simple thatched church and then up a slight hill to reach the junction and a sign for the Kankonongo Lodge.

356. Up on the plateau the farms looked less poor. Joe said it was because it rained more than the arid landscape I had been in for the last week.

357. The were all sorts of denominations in South Zambia, notably Pentecostal, Seventh Day Adventist and New Apostolic – which is pictured above.

The lady, who had hair extensions down to her knees, had a room. It was 300 Kwacha or £10 and it had a ramshackle bathroom but with hot water heated by solar pipes and a tank. These were the first I had seen in Zambia. The lodge also had a great view over Leopard Hill. There are 4 such rocky hills at Katoba and leopards used to have their lairs in them up to the 1960’s. However since then Zambia’s population has grown significantly and more and more land was taken up by agriculture around here and the leopards withdrew into the deeper forest and down to the Lower Zambezi National Park. I had a magnificent hot shower and washed all my stinking clothes, despite it just dribbling out of the roseless shower head. The lodge had no food so I went down to the row of shops at the junction and had chicken and nshima in a restaurant run by 3 characterful battleaxes. It was fun watching them chase a very drunk man out who had obviously come in because I was there. After that I went back to the lodge mid afternoon and wrote the blog for the last two days and then had a great sleep. Tomorrow I would cycle the 50-60 km to Chongwe where I would reach The Great Eastern Road, the T4, and follow it east for 2-3 days to the arterial Luangwa River and complete Section 05, South Zambia.

358. The view from my rustic lodge over to Leopard Hill. Leopards used to inhabit the hill until the 1960’s when the population significantly increased.

Day 065. 13 July. Chirundu to Mufundeshi on D481. 41 km. 8 Hours. 910m up. 610m down. The elephants did not come back in the night and I did not see any hippopotamus either when I heard a sound around 0400. The ladies made me a nice breakfast and even got bacon from the shop specially for me. I eventually left at 0900 and was sorry to leave this hidden gem. I cycled up the steep road, wary that I might encounter the elephants at the start near the forest beside the river. However there was none and after 20 minutes I made it to the main gravel road leading north. I looked for the house Harry and Hilary stayed in as directed by James to say goodbye but could not find it so headed north.

There were quite a few people on the road and many were well dressed. Then it dawned on me it was Sunday morning and many were off to church services. I passed a few and there were joyful gospel hymns coming out of the windows. There were many denominations here but Pentecostal, Seventh Day Adventist, Jehovah’s Witness, Catholic and New Apostilic were the most common. Not all were off to church though and at a few bottleshops/bars I saw younger men already with beer in hand at 1000 in the morning.

It was a bumpy dusty road for about 10 km passing hamlet after hamlet the whole way. It was almost a continuous homestead, cultivated land and occasional shops the whole way. The road was not busy but there were a few lorries taking villagers up to the flat agricultural lands between the Zambezi river and the start of the escarpment, but west of the Lower Zambezi National Park. This park blocked my way east and was a totally wild area full of animals. Just at the bridge over the Kafue River there was a rare section of smooth tarmac.

344. Some 10 km north of Chirundu I reached the Kafue River. It had a bream or tilapia farm on it near the bridge. I think it was Chinese owned.

The Kafue River is a major river in Zambia but it pales into insignificance next to the vast Zambezi just below the bridge, but out of sight round the corner. There was a large bream or tilapia fish farm here which seemed to be quite well organized. I think it was Chinese. On the other bank, the north bank there were also some ponds which had been dug, and water pumped up to them. I cycled on to the start of some vast irrigated crop circles again similar to the ones I saw in Sinazongwe, but I don’t know who operated these ones. If someone had said it was the Chinese I would not have been surprised. Interestingly there was also a Zambeef feedlot cattle farm here but I only saw the entrance. I turned off the larger gravel road to a minor one which went along the north side of the Kafue River to the village of Gota-Gota and beyond. Just here I got a puncture. The second on my new tyres since Livingstone 600 rough kilometres behind me.

345. The good people of Gota-Gota returning from church in their finest. I passed many churches this Sunday morning and most seemed to be singing gospel type hymns although I also passed a fire and brimstone sermon.

Gota-Gota was just 4 km up the road. When I got there people were just coming out of church. The Catholic one I think. People looked remarkably well dressed and tidy for a typical village with the women looking very smart and many of the men in suits with ties on. It was hot now and I needed a drink. I was sure it would be my last for a while so I found a small shop with a chest fridge full of them. Inevitably some young men came in and asked if I could buy them a drink. I again said I only give money to women as men just spend it on alcohol. This created raptures of laughter from the 3-4 women crowded into the shop and the men left almost as if admonished by the woman’s laughter.

At Gota-Gota I found the track I needed using the Tracks4Africa app, which is remarkably good for me on these smaller roads. It led north through the village and then down into rural hamlets near low lying stream beds. There must have been some irrigation holes dug here as there were green vegetable gardens occasionally. It was a fascinating area as between the stream beds was denser bush which was almost jungle-like. The only problem was the steam beds and the adjacent areas were very sandy and although I could still cycle it was hard work and difficult to keep the front wheel from skidding to one side. I was soon sweating a lot.

346. From Gota-Gota I headed north on a small, slow village road for about 20 km to meet the infamous D481 just before the start of the steep climb.

After a good 5 km of this, these rural hamlets stopped and the track, which was only used by infrequent motorbikes, rose up out of the sandy areas to a series of small ridges. It was steep down to one and then a hard climb up to the next. I was starting to question whether this short cut on the track was worth it, but it did save me about 30 kilometres going via Kiambi. I passed a sign for Headman Tigere and then the going got easier. It was now hard packed earth on a flatter surface and I could go from 5-6 km per hour to 8-10 km per hour and not work as hard doing so. This easier cycle continued for the second half of this track for about 10 km out of the total 20 km. There were two more larger hamlets to pass through until after about 3 hours on the track I reached the infamous D481 gravel road just as the flat lands met the foot of the escarpment and at the base of the climb.

347. The extremely steep 350 metre climb up the Zambezi Escarpment on the D481 was loose, rough and very taxing to push a 70 kg bike up for 2 hours

This climb was significant and I had been dreading it for a good week. It climbed steeply from here at about 550 metres altitude up the Zambezi Escarpment to about 1200 metres in the course of 20 kilometres. However there were two large climbs of 400 metres and 300 metres. My plan was to do the first today and camp, and then do the second tomorrow.

I set off up the very rough track on foot pushing the bike. There was no way I could cycle this, even in the lowest gear and not even if it was smooth tarmac let alone this rubble and bare rock. There were some extremely steep bits, perhaps 15 degrees occasionally, and I could just not get the purchase on my feet to heave the bike up. The bike itself was 20 kilos, with 40 kilos of baggage, with nearly another 10 kilos of water. So 70 kilos in all. At some sections I was straining with every sinew just to move it half a meter, then slam on the brakes to hold it while I took a step and repeated the process and thereby just make 100 horizontal metres in 15 minutes. Then there would be some respite where I could go at perhaps 2 km per hour before I was at another steep section heavy for all I could. It was very slow work and I was sweating profusely despite the fact it was overcast above the Escarpment. In all it took me well over 2 hours to do the 3 kilometres and climb the 400 metres by which time I was exhausted. It was probably the hardest I had worked all trip and on a par with the wrong turning I took a week ago. My arms were especially tired but my whole body had had a severe workout.

348. It was a joy to meet Blyth and John near the top of the climb when I was exhausted. They had set off from Chongwe at 0200 in the morning with a 50 kg sack of maize each and hoped to get to Chirundu. We applauded each other.

Just as I got to the top on this remote route I met Blythe and John. They were as surprised to see me as I was them. They both had 20 kilo bikes and each had a 50 kilo sack of maize kernel strapped to the back. They had just finished a climb as I had with a similar load. There was a fair bit of banter between us and we applauded each other. Then I learnt that they had actually started at 0200 in the morning from Chongwe and had been going for 14 hours already and still hoped to get to Chirundu that night. These were strong lads which any mother would be pleased if their daughter brought home, instead of the lacklustre dullards outside a bottleshop.

After a 10 minute chat we parted, with them trying to stop their bikes running away from them and me gingerly descending the rough track for 250 vertical metres. I stayed in the saddle most of the time but the brakes were constantly employed and must have gotten very hot. Frequently I had one leg out, off the pedal waiting for the inevitable skid and on the 5 odd occasions it came I was ready and just let the bike fall over once. I was descending into a side stream called the Mufundeshi, which drained this section of the Escarpment. Ahead of me on the other side of the valley I could see tomorrow’s climb up, which was only 300 metres and not 400 as today. It took the best part of an hour to make it down to the bottom bouncing slowly over the bare bedrock and the rubble. By the time I got to the bottom it was after 1700. I crossed the stream bed which was dry and went 200 metres further and saw some tents used by road gangs. There was a superb patch of bare earth to camp on here and no one was about except a small dog, so I started to put the tent up.

349. At the top of the climb there was a very steep 250 meter descent down to a side valley, with the Mufundeshi stream at the bottom. Tomorrow’s 280 metre climb up the other side can be seen ahead.

Just as I started, two men appeared after returning from a day in the fields. They said it was no problem to camp but insisted I come down to their tents. I did and they showed me a place between their 5 large tents and the granary, which was full of maize. They were two brothers of 38 and 50 and their wives. The elder brother was Joe and he spoke great English and was very intelligent and entrepreneurial. He had spent years working in a mine up in the copper belt north of Lusaka. They helped me put the tent up and then soon afterwards I said good night and went in. I was too shattered to chat with them under their thatched opensided cooking and chatting area. I had a cold dehydrated meal which was still a bit crunchy after 15 minutes and 3 litres of thick creamy powdered milk. I was too tired to even bother taking my clothes off let alone writing anything. It was a mistake as the sweaty cycling shorts meant my crotch area festered in a salty, moist environment all night and meant I got badly chaffed the next day.

Day 064. 12 July. Chirundu Rest Day. 0 km. 0 Hours. 0m up. 0m down. I was excited about seeing the hippopotamus grazing on the lawn last night. It was too dark to get a photo but I described it. James and the breakfast lady said it was very common and they came out most nights. After the cooked breakfast I went over to my chalet to write the blog and do some emails. There was a nice verandah with a table under it. It was perfect and I could look out across the parched lawn and see the Zambezi River gently flow past and even see Zimbabwe on the other side.

As soon as I started one of the gardeners/handymen came along and told me there were elephants just at the edge of the forest. I went down to have a look and there just 100 metres away were about 7 large elephants and no young. I asked where they came from and he said they had been in the forest here for a while but probably before that came from Zimbabwe. He said they would just wade across the river which was not that deep at just 1-2 meters. We stood looking at them for ages as they tentatively inched their way forwards reaching high up with their trunks to pull branches down and then stripping them of leaves, or breaking the small ones off and eating the whole lot. I was captivated by the spectacle and soon the other workers and Harry and Hilary and some of their grandchildren came to have a look. They seemed to think it happened every other day and that they would soon venture onto his lawn and start on some of the trees there.

338. In the morning a herd of 7 adult elephants emerged out of the forest along the riverbank next to Machembere Lodge.

There were plenty of branches with leaves hanging down for them to spend time where they were, but they kept looking in our direction, hesitant to come further. In the end the workers and Harry, Hilary and family eventually left as they had seen it all before and I slightly hid behind a tree. Sensing the humans had retreated, three of them started to wander into the trees at the edge of the lawn. One however was determined to get to a tree on the river bank at the edge of the lawn where I had seen the hippopotamus last night. I retreated back a bit and then went round to the bottom of the slope up to my chalet where there was a great escape up the slope and into the cabin. Another one joined it and they were now only 50 meters away. I watched them for a while but they were quite stationary.

339. The elephants stood on a clear bit of land on the border of Machembere Lodge before the ventured in.

So I went up the slope to the cabin and then went along it where I could see the other 5. One was a very large male. They carried on pulling tree branches down and devouring them but a couple seemed to have found some vegetation on the ground and were busy scooping that up with their trunks. They were only about 50 metres away and I was about 30 from the safety of my cabin, but there was a big slope they would have to climb up. I spent about half an hour watching them and noticed how trimmed the bottoms of the trees were becoming. I took loads of videos and photos as this was quite a bonus for a rest day to watch these magnificent beasts in such close quarters. I am sure they could see me and knew exactly what I was doing. The gardner did say that a couple of weeks ago an elephant had killed someone locally after she threw stones at it to try and chase it off her maize plantation. I could imagine a herd of 10 elephants could decimate a quarter hectare (half acre) of maize within half an hour.

340. Some of the 7 elephants started breaking palm fronds off on Machembere Lodge lawn and devoured them.

When I went back to the verandah the two by the riverbank had obviously spotted tastier trees on the lawn and one came up and was not about 40 metres away devouring the fronds from a palm. After it had eaten about 5, stripping all the leaves off the central stalk and cramming them into its mouth it started coming up towards me. I made sure the door of the chalet was open and watched it come to within 30 metres and then 25 metres until it got to the branches which drooped down. Up went its trunk and it brought the branch down and broke some off. It then started twisting bits of it and putting it on his pointed lower lip. before it disappeared between great sets of molars which reduced all the pulp – small branches and twigs along with the leaves.

341. One elephant came within 15 metres of where I sat on the verandah writing the blog as it pulled branches down right in front of me for half an hour.

As the canopy he was easting was devoured he had to move towards me, moving a metre with every step. I double checked the door was open and watched him until he was just 15 metres away. There was a significant slope still between us and he would not get up that in one bound. As he reached up, with one eye on me and the other on the next acacia branch he was intending to pull down, I could see right up into his mouth. We sat and watched each other for about 20 minutes until he left the acacia and moved on to a coconut tree which Harry had planted. He just broke one frond off that and started to devour it but then walked backwards leaving the frond hanging and half chewed and went round the side of another shrub. It is amazing how such a big animal could vanish behind a small shrub. When he reappeared he saw me again and this time was not happy. With ears flared he took a few steps towards me and stopped. I was already half way into the chalet but he stopped and turned and went quickly after the other 6 who had already left the lawn area and were heading away. And that was the end of quite an exciting and intense two hour encounter with this herd. It was perhaps the wildlife encounter of the trip so far, along with the surprise of seeing the lions feeding on the buffalo carcass in Chobe national park.

342. The verandah on my chalet where I was writing when the elephant came within 15 metres to eat the lighter green leaves hanging down.

By now it was midday and I still had all the blog and paperwork to do. So I sat on the verandah all afternoon typing away until 1700 when I managed to upload all the photos with the weak signal and then had just about finished typing when someone came over to the chalet and said have you seen the elephants. I said “Yes! I saw them this morning. Hopefully they will be back”.To which she replied “They are just over there now” and I looked where she was pointing and saw two large males. Then the whole show started again but this time all 7 elephants, all males, came onto the lawn. Everybody came to watch on my verandah as it was a safe spot. Harry and Hillary were there and a bit worried about their palms. 3 of them were attacking one of her cherished palms and another was sniffing around Harry’s coconut tree. They milled around just 30 metres away from us, but down on the lawn below us. One or two went along towards the swimming pool with the tan coloured Zambezi water where there were more acacia trees by the water and also more palms. We all left my verandah and went down to the pool area to monitor those down there. Harry was very philosophical about the potential carnage but Hilary was more concerned. “They were here before we were,” said Harry. It was getting dark now at 1800 and the carnage looked like it was in the early days and Harry thought they might settle here for the night. However I was not really comfortable going to my chalet and also did not want them on my door step all night. They might start on the roof. So I went back to my cabin the long way and went out with my powerful headtorch and airhorn. I let out a half second blast and they all turned to the forest and then let out another and they all walked quickly away. The security guard thought they might come back now they had seen the goodies on offer.

343. The inside of the chalet with the bathroom and storage room at the far end. It had a very high roof.

I then went in to finish off all the paperwork before returning to the bar area hoping to find Harry still there but he had gone. It had been a fascinating day, one of the most exciting days of the trip on what was essentially a rest day.

Day 063. 11 July. Changa to Chirundu. 67 km. 7 Hours. 430m up. 600m down. It was hot in the room in the early part of the night so I did not sleep well but eventually the cool of the night permeated through the corrugated roof and chilled the air. In the morning I was up early as I wanted to get to Chirundu early. I gave the sweet lady running the place a good tip and then left the dusty village and headed off on the tarmac road to the east. It was just 42 kilometres along the road to the T junction where this road, the D500, met the larger M15. Pretty much the whole time I cycled on this road there was a line of hills to the north. It was the Zambezi Escarpment, a ramp leading from the lower flat lands on each side of the Zambezi River up to the plateau. I am not sure if the escarpment was caused by the relentless erosive force of the Zambezi River over the last hundreds of millennia, or if it was a natural tectonic rift which the Zambezi River exploited on its course to the ocean. It was probably a mix of the two.

330. On the northside of the road after leaving Changa heading east I passed below the Zambezi Escarpment.

As usual there was a strong headwind and it was blowing dust up into the air and some of the shrubs were getting a little buffeted. The villages kept on coming and there were perhaps 5 of them in total between Changa and the T junction 42 km later at a place called Sikoongo. I had noticed in the last few days as I come further east a lot of the granaries now have the same structure as in they are elevated from the ground, are usually round and are constructed from sticks and then reeds. Not all seem to have a thatched grass roof any more. However the biggest change seemed to be that the walls were sealed with a layer of mud daubed on them. Rarely the mud was even painted. I could not work out the reason for this

331. Many of the graneries now seemed to be daubed with mud and some painted even. I could not work out whu this became more prevalent over the course of the last 10 days.

I had seen that more and more of the thatched houses now had a small overhang on them. It was perhaps too much to call it a verandah. I assumed this was to help keep the houses cool as the sun would shine less on the mud brick walls. There was no other shade to speak of really as this was back in charcoal production country and most things which could be made into charcoal had been chopped down. There were two sizes of sack now; the usual small one for 70 kwacha and then giant ones for 150. I think most of it was used, if not locally, certainly in the district as it seems everybody cooks on charcoal in the villages. Even at the guest room in Changa the lady cooked on charcoal on a small round stove about the size of a saucepan with holes in the side. As it was charcoal she could also cook inside with hardly any smoke being produced.

332. More and more of the houses had large overhangs on them and I assume it was to keep them cooler.

Occasionally, I would pass a cyclist on the road. Often a younger boy taking maize kernels to the flour mill. There were still no electricity poles beside the road so the kernels had to go to the electric blue shed flour mills, with the array of solar panels. I also saw a few men making charcoal and packing it into sacks and men driving the ox teams, pulling carts or logs. Perhaps it was the men who did the ploughing in a few months, before the planting started. However currently, these were the only men I ever saw working. While the women were constantly on the go. I frequently passed them on the way to or from the community borehole with buckets on their heads. The women were the only ones in the vegetable patches irrigating their tomatoes, they were the only ones at the market selling things, frequently they were the ones in the small shops. I am sure a lot of the agricultural work falls on their shoulders also. By far the majority of the work seems to fall to them. Perhaps I am just seeing a snapshot of the working year and that men in fact do the ploughing, tending, harvesting and transporting the produce home, and this takes up a lot of their time, and I am just seeing them during their annual break as it were.

333. The was plenty of charcoal production, on a cottage industry scale around Changa and further east, to the detriment of the scrub.

I am sure though I am being overly charitable towards them here because at the moment they seem to congregate around a couple of the small shops in every village and just hang out in their fashionably ripped jeans and cheap sunglasses. If they had the misfortune to have money in their pockets it is all spent on drink. I do not see anyone blind drunk and staggering as in a UK city during the weekend nights, but just enough to alleviate the boredom of hanging out. I am sure they are convinced they are as cool as one gets, and an indispensable mainstay of the community, but in reality they were a burden and a totally wasted resource. One of their highlights of the afternoon was probably spotting me cycling past, then waving in the hope I would join them and ply them with ethanol all afternoon. For them the loud music and alcohol was the opium of the bored. Although the women were always busy, they were always joking, chatting and laughing while the younger men are essentially predictable dullards. This dichotomy seems to become more pronounced the further east I travel since Livingstone.

334. Women seemed to do the lion’s share of the work in Tongo society, but were happier and more cheerful than the disenfranchised men.

There was not much wildlife around here, and what there was, was limited to birds. I think any larger animal would have been poached for the pot generations ago. Around the villages the goats and cattle would have foraged everything bare so there would be no food anyway. However, there were occasional doves and hornbills and a lot of smaller passerine type birds. I saw a flock of hornbills on one occasion but they all flew off bar one when I got the camera out.

335. Although there was little wildlife life on the ground birds seemed to survive. However eventually they has to be careful as there were always catapults about to help them into the cooking pot.

Eventually after about 3 hours battling into the decreasing wind I reached the village of Sikoongo and the T junction. I had 2 choices here: either go north to the large T2 main road, which would inevitably be full of trucks. Alternatively I could go south for a bit and then find the gravel road, R143, which would take me into Chirundu from the south. I chose the latter and was heading down towards it when people kept asking where I was going. I said “Chirundu” and they all seemed perplexed and tried to redirect me back north again onto the T2. Eventually I said “small roads” and then one knowledgeable older man on a bike said follow me and led me down a small track. After a few hundred metres he stopped at a junction and said “Follow that in a straight line all the way and you will reach Chirundu”. It was not quite as south as the gravel road I was wanting on the Tracks4Africa map but it looked like a short cut towards this gravel road.

As it turned out it was a path in itself and did not reach the road I wanted until just before Chirundu. However it took me through the most remarkable countryside and a couple of small villages where this was the only to reach them. The path generally went due east and was quite level and generally firm. It had been formed by generations of pedestrians and then later bicycles, so it was easy to follow. I could never go fast but then it was a great way to savour the landscape. In a little under an hour I reached a village which I think was called Matavista. It was an idyllic village with perhaps 50 homesteads all under thatched roofs. There was also a small row of solid mud built shops but they were all closed. In the middle of the village was a vast open area with a couple of large trees. All the homesteads were arranged around this bare open area, the size of two football fields. On the far side there was rhythmic music emanating from a house and drifting across the open area. It was more gentle than the high energy rap coming from the pubs where the disenfranchised youth gathered to drink. Under one of the large tree’s shade were about 20 women all gathered with their tiny market stalls, some with just 50 tomatoes. I asked them the way to Chirundu and then they all pointed in the same direction. One grandmother spotted a teenage boy and dispatched him to show me the way for a few kilometres. After weaving through the scattered bush and across large areas of sugar cane, which had all been harvested, for around 15 kilometres I came to the D road I wanted to be on. It was just a few kilometres south of Chirundu and I was there soon afterwards after following the vast Zambezi downstream. I had said to the guy 2 hours ago I wanted small roads and he certainly showed me them, but it was a delightful cycle.

336. The village of Matavista was only reachable by bicycle after a 6-7 kilometre journey on paths through fields.

Chirundu was large and busy and like nothing I had encountered since Livingstone. I found a shop with cold drinks and went in and sat in a chair in the shop. Here I spent half an hour on my phone searching for a place to stay. It seemed there were cheap perfunctory places to stay for visiting officials and Zambia travellers. Even cheaper places for truck drivers to overnight in as this was a major border point with a bridge over the Zambezi into Zimbabwe. Or finally very expensive safari lodges at $200 a night outside town on the banks of the Zambezi. Then at last I found Machembere Lodge which seemed like a high end tourist lodge without the superfluous luxuries and without the price. I cycled down the road north for 3 km to reach it passing a lot of elephant dung at the gate.

337. At the Machembere Lodge there was a great view across the 500 metre wide Zambezi to Zimbabwe. Apparently it was only a metre or two deep.

The lodge was very quiet but I met the characterful Harry who was the owner and James his softly spoken Zambian manager. They had a room and it was 850 kwacha or £25. It was an enormous chalet with a thatched roof looking across a shaded sparse lawn to the gently flowing Zambezi River just 50 metres away. The only problem was there was no power due to an outage. So it was dark inside and there was no hot water. There was also no wifi on the premises and the mobile signal was very poor. However the location and ambience were great. I spent the evening chatting to Harry and Hilary who owned the place. They had both grown up and gone to school in Southern Africa, mostly Rhodesia as it was then. The land was Harry’s old family land and he used to grow bananas on it until Hilary thought it possible to build a lodge here to cater for the aid workers, notably World Vision. However with covid and a change in NGO policy and internet conferences that market had diminished and this tranquil place was somewhat wasted. When the substation fault was rectified and the power came back on I could see how nice the chalet was and the water was soon hot for a shower. I slept well but woke at 0300 with a noise outside. Curious I went for a look and saw there was a large hippopotamus on the lawn just outside my thatched chalet.

Day 062. 10 July. Munyumbwe to Changa. 90 km. 8 Hours. 640m up. 730m down. I was ready to set off early when I noticed I had a puncture on the front wheel. After the amount of acacia thorns I had ridden through on the last day I was not at all surprised. I was grateful it did not happen on that day. After I changed that I went back to the bakery where I bought a loaf of bread and something like a cornish pastie. I had the latter for breakfast and kept the loaf for later. I said my goodbyes to the staff at the council guest house who were trying to look busy, like council workers all over the world. I set off on the tarmac road which people assured me would be quiet. At the eastern edge of the small town was a petrol station and just before it was a bed and breakfast behind big security gates.

323. These guys easily kept up with me for 2 km on their bike with no gears and no brakes. Zambians are strong and fit.

The road was surprisingly good and I was surprised it existed. In the course of the day perhaps 20 motorbikes, 10 cars and about 4 buses and 4 lorries passed me. So I could use the whole road and often needed to in the potholed sections. One thing I did notice on the first stretch to the village of Katete, after some 25 km, was how poor it was. There were no electricity poles and so no electricity anywhere. Also all the kids seemed to be barefoot. It seemed an odd juxtaposition to have this road and yet no electricity. The road was also full of ladies in groups going to or returning from the borehole pump with water for the household. There were plenty of pumps amongst the hamlets beside the road. I could have found plenty of water here and now cycle with all my water bottles empty, save for a litre. The landscape was very dry and quite rocky and not really great for agriculture. The only thing which thrived were the baobab trees.

324. None of the villages today had electricity and everyone had to fetch water from a borehole in this arid landscape.

After Katete the landscape became even more harsh and arid. it was almost sahel-like with nothing on the ground and just shrubs and trees growing from it. There were more and more cacti. I was still passing herds of goats and cows and I could just not see what the cattle could eat at the moment. Perhaps in the rainy season all this bursts into life, but there was just not the ground cover or the roots of grasses around to use any rain. I think this place is extremely vulnerable to climate change because if the rains don’t come it would easily become uninhabitable and all these thousands of people would be displaced.

325. There were a few irrigated experiment areas where an Irish charity was trying drought resistant maize.

In the last half of the day I did pass a few villages. They were the most traditional villages I had seen so far with about 50-100 households in small compounds, with virtually every house or hut under a thatched roof. However, I also noticed that the agriculture here was quite well organized as if it was a cooperative venture. The fields were large, perhaps too large for a single household to plough and harvest. There were also many small vegetable gardens beside the rivers where pools had been dug and the vegetables were then watered by bucket. An Irish charity had various projects in the valley growing drought resistant maize. But even drought resistant maize needs some rain.

326. Some of the villages today were exceptionally arid and almost Sahel-like. There was no ground cover whatsoever.

The kids here were the most excitable of the entire trip so far and spotted me a mile off and came running out of the compounds and often ran alongside the bike. Two young boys managed to keep up with me going very slightly uphill for a good kilometre running fast without becoming short of breath. The women here were also the most confident so far with all waving even single girls walking towards me, who are usually shy. If they were in groups they were shouting and waving. Most of the men were also friendly but on the two occasions I stopped I was plagued by middle aged men asking for money or to buy them a drink, meaning an alcoholic drink. I told the second lot I would only give money to women and never to men to buy drink with. I might make it sound worse than it is, as it was just a tiny fraction of men who are drink pests and the majority are upstanding and polite.

327. A large field of harvested sugar cane. I think this feild with its sentinel baobab trees was too big for one family to plough, sow, tend and harvest and must have been communal.

Towards the end of the day and in the last 15 kilometres I passed some small mines. There were no signs on the gates and this led me to believe they were Chinese operated. It seemed they were mining in an area with a lot of orange coloured rocks and much of what was produced seemed to be stored in the meter cube white industrial sacks waiting to be taken away by lorry to be processed. These mines, and there were about 6 of them, all seemed to be in the test or exploratory stage rather than full blown production.

328. There were many vegetable patches beside the dry stream beds where the vegetables were watered by bucket from holes dug in the sand. Note the animal exclusion fence.

As I neared Changa the landscape became even more arid and cactus was rife. There were not many trees save for the large baobab, as charcoal production was rife. I noticed large areas where anything bigger than an arm was cut down leaving a stump. I doubt this would have a benefit of clearing the land for agriculture. The prevailing crop now seemed to be sugarcane as a cash crop, with fields of maize also as the subsistence stable. A few kilometres before Changa I ran into a sports competition. There were perhaps 300 spectators and 200 competitors. It was mostly girls volleyball and boys football, someone told me there were scouts looking for talent to train professionally. I don’t think I saw one overweight person in the entire crowd of spectators or competitors. Indeed the only fat Africans I see are urban ones and there are usually merchants or those working for the government. I would have liked to have stayed and watched but it was just an hour before dusk. However, a few people said there were guest rooms in Changa and to ask at the market.

329. My room in Changa was perfectly adequate for what I wanted. The toilet was a long drop in a separate shed.

In 2 km I reached the market. It was basically 20 brightly dressed respectable ladies all sitting with stalls of vegetables and tomatoes. Some had sweet potatoes and a few had fish. I asked one about rooms and she beckoned a man over who led me to a building behind the stalls. He asked a gentle, older man in front of a longer concrete building. Yes they had a room and it was 100 kwacha (£3). Of course I took it as it was a great alternative to camping. The man’s daughters spoke good English and were very hospitable and welcoming. The room had just 4 bare walls and a double bed with sheets and blankets. I would use my sleeping bag again. For dinner a daughter gave me a litre of hot water for a dehydrated meal and I had the rest of the excellent bread from the morning. I wrote the blog as the sun set and rhythmic music drifted between the simple houses, most still thatched even in this village. About 1930 the sports competition spectators and competitors returned to the market and the whole place erupted into joyful singing. The massed voices of the girls and women easily drowning out the music from all the man caves.

Day 061. 09 July. Munyumbwe Rest Day. 0 km. 0 Hours. 0m up. 0m down. I was tired from the long day yesterday and I had work to do on the blog. These combined to make it sensible to take a day off. I could probably have cycled as I noticed how my legs can keep going all day now as long as the gears were low enough. Long distance hikers get something called “Hikers Legs” where they suddenly become fit enough they can hike all day, like a young spaniel dog, without feeling it too much. If there is a cycling equivalent then I must be on the threshold of it.

However the blog, that never ending deadline, needed a few hours of attention. If I did not do it today I would have to catch up sometime in the future and live under a black cloud until then. So it made sense to combine the two. I spent the entire morning doing it in the guesthouse’s perfunctory dining room and then returned to my room for a long siesta.

322. The Gwembe council guesthouse in Munyumbwe where I spent a rest day. It still worked but needed some maintenance.

In the late afternoon and early evening I returned to the dining room which was now full of Zambians cheering on their women’s football team in an African tournament. I went out to eat after dark to the simple bakery/restaurant across the street which did a take-it-or-leave-it sausage, greens and shima dish but could replace the nshima with macaroni. It was much nicer than last night’s and had a window. There were cheers outside from time to time as at least 20 people pressed their noses against the window of a pub which had a television showing the same Zambian ladies soccer team. They were passionate about football here. I had an early night and was in bed by 2000 after the lazy day.

Day 060. 08 July. River Njongola Estuary to Munyumbwe. 62 km. 10 Hours. 920m up. 770m down. I slept well in the yard beside the small mud brick house. If there were ticks on the ground they would have been short lived as there were chickens, guinea fowl and even doves patrolling the earth constantly scouring the ground. The doves lived in the rainy season kitchen which was shunned now in favour of a fire in the open. There were also three small pigs wandering about the yard who would head off soon into the bush to forage for the day. I took my own breakfast of granola over to the newly lit fire and ate it there. The day was well underway already at 0630 as the sun had already risen.

People were coming and going on the track and two younger men were already taking dried manure to the fields from Minister’s cattle corral where about 10 cattle spent the night. They were shovelling the pile into a large box sitting on a sled with wooden runners and then this sled was pulled by two oxen. I had seen more and more teams of oxen pulling carts, ploughs, trunks of trees and sledges, yesterday and this morning now I was in this relatively poor area without roads or electricity.

314. In the morning I managed to get a picture of my hosts. Minister is in the middle with the red and yellow shirt and his daughters to the right. The others were close neighbours.

I packed after my granola, with everyone turning to watch me, especially Minister. I was packed up quite quickly and by 0730 I was ready to go. I was not sure if Minister was the headman of this hamlet or not. He seemed to have a few daughters but no wife, and was 39 years old. I am guessing his wife had previously died. I thought if I gave him money he would use it wisely rather than drink it so I found a brand new 200 kwacha note and gave it to him. It was more than needed but his family had shown me kindness. He was delighted. It also meant I could get a photo of the whole homestead and the men who had come down to Minister’s morning fire before I finally set off.

315. The concrete causeway over the Njongola River was partially destroyed. It would have been unparalleled after a moderate amount of rain. The ox team were pulling a heavy log.

I cycled through the rest of the village passing fields with piles of manure and then reached the bridge. It was a concrete weir which had been laid across the river to allow traffic. However it was maybe 10-15 years old and without any maintenance, like the road through the village, it had fallen into disrepair and a few floods had washed sections away. As I cycled down to it a pair of oxen were pulling a couple of large logs up the hill. I had to push the bike over the river, which I guess would have been nearly impossible in the rainy season, especially when in spate. Once over I had to continue pushing the bike up a steeper hill for nearly half an hour as the road was essentially now just a footpath. I climbed some 100 metres, toiling hard pushing the bike, sometimes over very stony ground or bare rock. Eventually I reached the top and the footpath turned into a track again and levelled off passing through a small hamlet where children ran out to meet me.

316. The long steep footpath on the east side of the Njongola River. It was also impassable to 4X4 vehicles.

When I plan a route I usually do it on Strava, a mapping app, and confirm it with google maps. I then plot the route so it follows the way I want to go along the roads shown on Strava and Google maps, especially the satellite view, which shows the roads. I then create a GPX of the intended route and send it to my gadgets. When I am cycling I simply follow the gadget which indicates all the twists and turns of the route and also all the ups and downs. The route I was following now was created months ago in the comfort of my study. The trouble is sometimes the view of Google maps satellite view and the information on roads on Strava can be very out of date, rarely by as much as a decade, and often new roads are not shown. But this system has always worked well for me and I had no reason to suspect any difference now. I don’t even remember passing a junction about 4-5 km after the river crossing but there must have been one.

317. After the first hamlet on the north side of the Njongola River I should have gone down into the flat valley but by mistake did not see the junction and my preplanned route went to the right.

Instead I just followed the route on my gadgets and it directed me on the right fork of the unnoticed junction on a narrowing track which eventually became a footpath. However there were bike tracks here so all was well. As predicted by my gadgets the route now started to climb and I had to climb another 100 metres over a ridge in the Sikolqinzala Hills which is where I was cycling. The track however became worse and worse, and it was frequently steep, rocky and totally overgrown. The previous bike tracks had also completely disappeared. It was a bloodsome slog going up the hills and I was frequently getting scratched by the small acacia bushes. Occasionally I passed a section where I recognized a road had been and another where a culvert had been washed away leaving a couple of concrete pipes in the forest. I thought Googlemaps and Strava had just not updated for a decade when this road was abandoned and the village I passed through used the road to the south through Ministers hamlet to get to the rest of the world.

318. My preplanned route took me up through some horrendous, overgrown terrain where the old road was destroyed by torrents and abandoned. It took a while for me to work my mistake out.

At the top of the hill after the very taxing push which left me tired and scratched there was at last a nice run down the NE side. I thought I was free and it would now be a nice coast down the other side of the hill. But the relief was short lived as soon the track became very overgrown and destroyed by floods of water leaving rocks and bedrock. This just could not be right even through I was still on my pre planned GPX route. I had my drone so I launched it and flew down over the preplanned route but it just seemed to get worse and then dissapear. I then flew higher and panned around and I could see a large area of cultivated fields about 2 kilometres to the north around a village. The village lay in an open valley within the Sikolquinzala Hills. There seemed to be footpaths leading from my position through the bush to this village. I then remembered I had downloaded another map app called Tracks4Africa, which showed all the 4 wheel drive tracks in Southern Africa. I checked with this and saw I was on a small track which went nowhere and there was a track 5 km to the north which went from the broken concrete sill across the Njongola River I crossed previously to the road up to Munyumbwe. It was definately the road I wanted to be on. I must have been on it but at the junction I could not recognize or see I must have left it to follow this godforsaken dead end road by slavishly following the GPX route on my gadgets. This GPX route I created 3-4 months ago contained the error.

Now I knew my predicament I had two ways to solve it, either return the way I had come or go down through the bush for 2 km on one of the footpaths to the vicinity of the village and its fields. I chose the latter as I knew the way I came was hellish. The footpath was not really a path leading like a twig from the top of a tree down the small branches and then bigger branches to the trunk and then finally the bole of the tree, which is where the village was, but rather a criss-cross network of footpaths across the bush. The ones I took were always small and there were numerous junctions where I always had to pick the one I thought went to the village. Generally they were OK but I was getting scratched pushing through bushes. However, once I got to a steeper boulder field and had to negotiate the heavy bike through this which took half an hour for 200 metres and a lot of heaving.

319. After my descent through the bush I came across this gorgeous, traditional and remote hamlet with perhaps 10 households which was 4-5 km south of the gravel road on a footpath.

At last I came to a long since harvested maize field and I could now follow the access paths to the fields which were now like the branches of a tree leading to the trunk and bole of the village. Occasionally I caught sight of it. It was gorgeous with the pointed roofs of perhaps 25 small huts emerging from the the low scrub which surrounded it. I knew If I got to the village there would be an access path from the village to the gravel road I wanted to be on. Slowly I twisted my way down to the base of the village which was raised up on a shallow knoll. I did not go up to the village. I would certainly have been the first Musungo on a bicycle to arrive there, but found the access path below the knoll. It was at least a meter wide, well trodden and had numerous bike tracks on it. I started following it to the north crossing two deep sandy river beds. In the second one I came across a boy on a bike taking a sack of maize kernels to the mill. It was about 3-4 km along this path until at last I reached the gravel road just at the village of Siabbamba. This was the road I should have been on all along and should never have left for my inadvertent detour which cost me perhaps 3 hours in total and a lot of effort. It was already 1230 and I had been on the go for 5 hours. I still had a demanding 45 km to go to Munyumbwe.

320. The gravel road from Siabbamba village to the T junction with the bigger road was about 30 km and passed a few villages. It was quite hilly.

I started North East along the road which was quite stony as it did not get the traffic here to pack it down. I think the road was destroyed in places in the direction I was going and this cut these villages off. There was also no electricity anywhere here. Virtually all the buildings were the round mud huts under a straw roof and there were very few of the newer style mud brick buildings under a corrugated tin roof. These very traditional villagers had immense simplicity and charm, and the villagers all waved and then put their hands together in a single clapping motion indicating a respectful greeting. I cycled here for a couple of hours climbing steeply and dropping down into a dry stream bed only to climb again. Most of the track was firm but there were frequent shorter sandy bits in the dips. I passed a few motorbikes and cycles but no vehicles. I also passed an ox drawn cart with biscuits, drinks, provisions and some hardware for a shop in Siabbamba, which must have been up a lane in that village, as I heard it but did not see it.

Eventually I reached Sinayala. I was tired, thirsty and hot. Here there were two rustic shops, electricity and although I did not see any vehicles there were tyre tracks. I stopped here for biscuits and some sugar water and felt my energy surge. It needed to be as I still had a way to go. The next stretch was relatively short and it took me past arid homesteads with the new style mud brick 2 room houses and many baobab trees. I noticed a few had been cut down, and cut with an axe. I can only imagine this is for firewood, but I am sure it would be a huge effort for relatively little reward as the trees were massive and to get them into firewood would have taken considerable chopping. The road was now smoother, but still with its ups and downs and at 1600 I arrived at the T junction with the larger gravel road. There was still 15 km to go north on it to Munyumbwe.

321. As the road approached the larger gravel road it became very arid again with dusty bare hamlets and large baobab trees.

The last 15 km was hard. There were 3 sustained climbs, each of about 60 metres and quite steep. It does not sound much but with tired legs, and 60 kg of bike and baggage it was taxing. I thought I had good time to make it but suddenly I noticed the sun was dipping below the ridgeline illuminating the Sikolqinzala Hills with a warm orange glow. Since I left Namibia I have been in the same timezone although I have travelled some 1800 kilometres due east, so the sun sets much earlier here than Namibia and it takes me by surprise. By the same token it rises much earlier. I did not stop for photos now but just pressed on with set determination grinding up the hills in the lowest gear. At last with dusk approaching I reached the T junction in Munyumbwe.

Just to the east of the junction was a council run guesthouse I had hoped to stay at. They had room and even one with an attached bathroom. Everything was a bit ramshackle with broken tiles on the floor and the bathroom due to them being laid on an uneven floor. I was tired and would invariably spend tomorrow here recuperating but just took it for a night. It was dark now but I was hungry. The maintenance man at the guesthouse showed me where I could eat nshima and took me to the “restaurant” at the junction. It was pitch dark inside but with a torch I could see she had chicken pieces, greens, gravy and the maize meal or shima. I had a plate of it, bought some drinks in a shop and returned to the guesthouse room. I was tempted just to have a dirty dive and head to bed at once but forced myself to have a shower. I took 2 sets of dirty clothes into the bathroom with me with the intention of washing them one at a time until the water ran out but 40 minutes later it was all washed and rinsed and I was sparkling. I at last went to bed at 2100 and slept well. The blog would wait until tomorrow.

Day 059. 07 July. Sinazongwe to River Njongola Estuary. 61 km. 8 Hours. 450m up. 440m down. I was up for breakfast and was packed and away by 0830. Before I went I wrote a favourable review of the Lake View Lodge and especially the two ladies who worked there. I then cycled back up the rough track to a cluster of shops which might have even been the centre of Sinazongwe, but it was a very expansive village, if not town, and there could have been another centre. Just here I should have taken a road to the east but it was being dug up for the new road. I asked a grader driver who I thought would know the way but he directed me back the way I came and told me to go east. I did that but ended up on a cul de sac to a couple of other lodges. He must have misunderstood me. I asked someone with good English this time and he directed me back to the grader driver and beyond until I could go back onto the new road. As I passed the grader driver again he looked perplexed but I was on a sandy patch and did not wave or stop. I went round the detour and then back onto the road which was blocked off with tape but was hard packed earth beyond the tape. It was too good to resist so I went under the tape and cycled fast on the beautiful smooth earth for a few kilometres until the detour and the new road merged again.

304. Hollowing out a large log with an adze to make a dugout canoe to be used for fishing on Lake Kariba.

I was now joined by a young man who was going to the electric mill up the road to turn his sack of maize into flour. We chatted and he told me a bit about the huge irrigation circles which we were passing. He said it was a Chinese farm and they had 24 such circles and each one was at least a kilometer in diameter. The one we were passing was paprikas and it was all destined for the Chinese market and none was sold locally. The water for the irrigation was pumped from the lake. I saw workers in a field and they looked like they were harvesting a vegetable crop. The whole operation reminded me of East European workers on a giant vegetable farm in East Anglia. We got to his electric mill and we parted at a cluster of shops, which could also have been the centre of Sinazongwe. A bit further I reached the Zambian Cattle Company. It was a feed lot where cattle were raised in dry dusty pens and fed soya or perhaps even the waste from the vegetables. It was a vast site and there must have been about 40 pens each with about 50 cattle. I got the impression it was not Chinese owned as there were no signs, but it just seemed too much of a coincidence this industrial beef factory was right next to the Chinese vegetable fields. The whole place stunck of manure and I was glad to be past it.

305. The road to Sinamalima was generally quite good with a few sandy patches. There was fields on each side and these ones were cotton.

Just at my turn off to the east on a small D road I came across a man with a makeshift adze swinging it into a log. He was making a dugout canoe and the amount of work involved to hollow out the entire log was phenomenal. Just after him I turned off to the east and cycled along a rural road for almost 2 hours passing a few villages with markets and also the small row of dingy concrete shops. For much of the start of this rural D road I was passing along the north side of the vast irrigation circles which were on my south. However the land to the north was also partially irrigated and entrepreneurial local farmers were growing maize and other vegetables like squash and beans. The homesteads here looked better off with a solid 3 room house in every compound. Near Sikaputa I passed a small welding yard where a team of welders were fabricating pontoons and then joining 2 pontoons together to make a frame for a boat. I think they were houseboats, which are popular on the lake with tourists. I now turned northwest for about 5-7 km to head up to get the gravel D499 to the east. It was warm now as I cruised along on the stony road. Virtually the whole time since my turn off by the cattle lots I had been going through subsistence farming except for the huge irrigation circles at the start. There was also a large scale fish farm here, also Chinese owned, but it was down a road with no exit near the lake shore.

306. Where a dry river bed crossed the road holes were dug in the bed to for a pool of water which was pumped up to the adjacent field to irrigate.

Once I was on the D499 very little changed except it was now subsistence farming on both sides, and there seemed to be some small scale irrigation at the start from the Nangobe River, which although was dry had some deep machine dug pools in the middle and a petrol pump beside these pools to draw the water into the fields. I passed a few clusters of shops, one perhaps every 5 kilometres and there was plenty of scope for a snack. I was going to wait until the larger village of Sinamalima to stop for a drink, but passed a nice hamlet of shops and called in at one of these for some cold sugar soda. The kids all clustered round and were excitable so I took a photo of them all in their joyful mood.

307. Just before Sinamalima I came across a hamlet of shops where I stopped for a drink and was surrounded by excited children.

Sinamalima was quite a big village and definitely the biggest on this road. It had barbers and shoe shops along with the rows of dingy grocers. It also had its fair share of pubs who were already blasting out loud music for the benefit of a small handful of clients who were starting to drink. There was nothing of interest for me in this village at all except for the health clinic which was quite big and well maintained.There was also a Pilgrim Wesleyan church here as there had been in a number of smaller villages. They are certainly the most prolific missionaries in this area. As I cycled further west the road got more and more sandy but I could still skid through the worst bits. It also got a bit hillier in contrast to the very flat morning. To the south it was flat fields, some now with cotton bushes and then the plains leading down to the lake, while to the north were fields and then a line of forested hills which rose up at least 500 metres above me. The villages now started to get sparse and poorer again until I got to a fork in the now track near a pond.

308. After Sinamalima the homesteads became more traditional and slightly poorer as I headed east.

I did not know which way to take. The obvious way led down to a village and stopped, while the way on my map and GPS say the left fork was the road through to Munyunbwe but it had no tire tracks and was only used by cycles. I took the one to the left as my GPS indicated and soon realized it might once have been a road but was now destroyed by heavy rains which had rutted the track. It was also overgrown. I thought perhaps a new road was built and that was the right fork and it would eventually come round and meet the left fork. I persevered and found myself on a small twisting track, almost a footpath in places going through thicker jungle which was encroaching on the track in many places. I don’t know if a Toyota Landcruiser could have made it through this section. I think not. In the end I climbed over a ridge with the lake below me and no sign of a village below and then started the descent down the other side. The whole time I was on my preplanned route which was a comfort. As I descended down the other side I came across a young boy leading a young blind man.

309. As I neared the Njongola River the rough gravel road quickly deteriorated into a track and then a footpath where rainy season torrents had rendered parts impassable in a 4X4.

A bit further I came to a very small hamlet of just 2 homesteads. No one spoke English at the first homestead so I went to the second. There was a grandmother and about 5 young women there and again no-one spoke English. I asked about the way but got little response. I was going to ask if I could camp with them but decided to go on a bit as I understood they said there were more houses later. I cycled about 500 metres over a small hill and was coasting down the other side when someone shouted Hello as I went past. I glanced in that direction but only saw a bit of collapsed road where a small landslide had occurred. Then something caught my eye. It was a man with blood over his head. I stopped and realized that this man was also blind and had been walking along the road and had fallen off the edge. He could not get up as it was 3 metres down and steep on all sides. I stopped the bike and spoke to him. “Musungo” I said which meant white person. He put his arms out but I could not reach him. Then he extended his cane and I managed to heave him up on that until I could grab his arm. It was then easy to haul him out as he was a lot lighter than I thought. I gave him some water to drink and wash the blood off his head. I could not leave him as he was a bit shaken so I decided to walk him back to the homestead I had just left. The chances were he was related to the other blind person I had seen. I pushed the bike holding one end of the cane against the handle bars while he held the other. In 10 minutes we were at the homesteads and he indicated which one to go to and it was the one with the grandmother.

310. The treacherous eroded edge of the track the poor young blind man fell down 3 metres and hit his head on the concrete pipe. He could not climb back out so I helped him.

When we walked in there was a bit of indifference. Until I explained a tumbling motion and pointed to the gash on his head, now bloody again. They brought a chair for him and I think he told them what had happened. I thought this is great, I will now be their hero for rescuing him and can stay at this idyllic homestead after all. When I suggested it there was again indifference and puzzlement. Then one of the young girls managed to get enough English together to say in 10 minutes there is a better place. I did not feel unwelcome but I felt there was little gratitude. Perhaps it was a cultural misunderstanding.

I said goodbye and they all cheerily waved me off and I cycled past the landslip that claimed the blind man and went on another 10 minutes until the track climbed more steeply. En route I passed a couple of homesteads but they were empty. As I pushed up the hill and neared the top I passed another. They waved me over. I needed no further invitation and came into their compound with my bike and noticed a great place to put the tent.

311. My tent beside Minister’s house in his compound in the hamlet just before the Njongola River. I think Minister might have been the hamlet’s headman.

They were very welcoming. His name was Minister and his daughter brought me a cup of water. I suspected it was river water but drank it anyway from the dirty cup, trusting my cast iron constitution from 6 decades of travel in the tropics. He said I could stay and soon a few men arrived and the tent was up in a jiff. Then the women all went to get more water from the river in buckets and Minister brought me a big bucket of water and a cup. Then all the men left to bring in the animals leaving me on my own at the homestead. I used the cup to fill 2 containers of water and put some purification tablets in them and then photographed the place.

312. The three legged cooking pot on the three stone fireplace. It was around this everybody gathered and all the cooking was done.

When Minister returned he put a chair beside the fire and beckoned me over. His English was as bad as my Tongo, but other men came and went and spoke a smattering of English. His daughter gave me some hot water for a dehydrated meal and 2 packets of noodles and that was my supper. It got dark as I finished and before they had eaten. There were about 4 men, a daughter and 3 small kids around the fire. In the end I thought I was making them a bit uneasy as I think Minister was quite shy. So I thanked them and retreated to my tent to write the blog. They went to bed at 2030 just as I finished. It had been a very interesting day and I was delighted to at last have spent a night in a compound in Zambia and also to have helped the poor blind teenager. I don’t think a 4×4 could ever make it to this hamlet so it is still very traditional.

313. One of Minister’s neighbours had a charming son who was very interested in the phone and camera on it.

Day 058. 06 July. Sinazongwe Rest Day. 0 km. 0 Hours. 0m up. 0m down. It was nice not having to rush off from this beautiful spot in the morning now I decided to stay an extra day. After a surprisingly good breakfast I went out to a table on the verandah of the lodge’s dining and reception area. It was a cool shaded spot and I could see the lake through the trees. There was a troop of the small vervet monkeys which sauntered around the complex occasionally wandering along the tops of the railings. Had I been eating and left the table they would have cleared the plate in a flash. It was very peaceful sitting there looking over the water from time to time. It took me about 4 hours to collate everything but at last I was done by midday.

301. The reception and dining area of the Lake View Lodge where I sat on the verandah all morning and wrote the blog for the last few days.

Just as I finished a group of 5 Indians turned up to spend Sunday afternoon here. I chatted with them and learnt that they all worked in Maamba at the only coal fired power station in Zambia. They said most of the power went up to the Copper Belt via Lusaka. The power station was managed by an Indian Company and its Indian workers spent 5 months here and then 1 month in India. They told me the Chinese were constructing another two power stations in Maamba to use the coal they were mining. They also told me the road to Sinazongwe which I cycled on yesterday is being funded by the Zambian Government but it is Chinese engineers overseeing the construction. They had brought a picnic with them and gave me a large plate of food which their Indian chefs had prepared in the canteen at Maamba. It was delicious, very flavoursome and spicy.

302. There was a slight beach below the lodge amongst boulders. In areas with much more reeds than this the Bilharzia snail can be found around Lake Kariba.

In the afternoon I went for a small stroll down by the lake. There were a few small beaches but above them were boulders. The level goes up and down considerably depending on rainfall. In recent years the level has been low. So low Zambia had to have power shedding to distribute the power around, as a significant proportion of Zambia’s power came from this dam and power station. However after this recent very wet rainy season in the Zambezi’s catchment area the level has risen recently.

There are crocodiles, hippopotamus and bilharzia snails in the lake. They all like shallow reeded areas but can travel about. I think the crocodiles and snails also like the reeded areas around the estuaries which flow into the lake and the hippopotamus need grazing areas nearby and return to the water by morning to wallow in it and to protect their skin from the sun. There were some subsistence fishermen in dugouts and canoes on the lake but they would have local knowledge of where the crocodiles are and would avoid them. They might have even referred to them by name and discussed with themselves when one moved. I am sure they are hated and young ones are killed if caught, as in Indonesia.

303. Despite warnings of crocodiles there were a few small dugouts and canoes on the lake fishing with nets. The fishermen knew where the crocodiles were likely to be.

I returned just as the jolly Indians were leaving after their picnic and frolic in the small pool. They all shook my hand and wished me luck. That evening I was on my own again for dinner and then spent the evening clarifying my route Chirundu about 300 km to the east and the next big place. It seemed straightforward enough.

Day 057. 05 July. Siabaswi to Sinazongwe. 45 km. 6 Hours. 260m up. 260m down. I fell asleep before the music stopped and it did not disturb me. However given the simple room, the dining facilities and especially the toilet, it scored very low. But they did make a breakfast of raw shredded cabbage, sliced tomato, a fried egg and 8 pieces of white bread, and they spared me nshima and they served it with kindness. As I set off up the small lane I saw it was the welders quarter with about 3-4 workshops fabricating large round pipes to put under the road as culverts. The welders were very skillful and were doing it all squatting on the ground, welding rod in one hand and mask in the other.

290. The main cluster of shops beside the main road in Siabeswi. The lane with the welders quarter was on my right.

I was soon on the main street which was a collection of shops, mostly grocers and general merchants, all pretty much stocking the same stuff. I passed it quickly and then went onto a good gravel road which was flat and fast. I made good time passing villagers coming and going on the road with loads leaving to go to market, others heading home from the communal bore hole with buckets of water and a few driving small herds of animals up the road. It was already warm when I set off.

291. In the early morning people flocked onto the road to start the day some with enormous loads on their heads.

There were perhaps 2 or 3 large coal lorries who passed me in the 20 kilometres and 2 hours it took me to get to the main tarred road, the D775. However they were slow and I could hear them half a kilometer away. I noticed how much greener everything was here and I don’t know if that was because of the proximity to Lake Kariba or that it was near the ground water. The road was occasionally bumpy but nothing like it had been yesterday. After two hours I rode over a small ridge of hills and then descended down to the junction. To the left (west) about 5 km away was the town of Maamba and luckily I did not need to go there. I was going to the east and towards Sinazeze. There were a few shops at the junction and I stopped at the largest which called itself a “mall”. It was much larger than the dingy shops and sold a wide range of hardware and also food. There was a freezer with cool drinks and I had one on the bench outside while the owner came and chatted to me while his mother cooked a large pot of nshima beside us, throwing in handfuls of maize flour to thicken it up. The owner said there were nice lodges at Sinazongwe which is where I was heading in just 30 kilometres.

292. Where the gravel road from Siabaswi met the tarmac road near Maamba was a larger shop. Here the owner’s mother made up some nshima from maize flour on a charcoal stove.

293. The tarmac road out of Maamba was busy with people heading between hamlets. We all had ro dodge the occasional slow coal truck.

When I left the junction I felt elated, it was a great temperature, the road was tarmac and pretty empty and there were lots of cyclists and pedestrians on the road and they all greeted me as I went past. I was waving back so much I virtually had one hand on the handlebar. Although the tarmac road was more of an imposition through the landscape, as opposed to the dirt roads which probably followed ancient paths, it still felt rural. I passed a coal mine just after the junction but it was well hidden by trees despite its large piles of coal. I cycled along this vibrant road for about 15 kilometres in all until I got to two bridges over two rivers, they were still flowing and there were pools of water in them. I think the first river was the Kenzine River and the second larger one was the Zongwe River. They both merged just after the second one in a wide open sandy braided river bed. On each side of the river any flat land was green with maize and here with the help of irrigation they could get two crops a year. This green fertile valley was in complete contrast to the dry parched landscape elsewhere. There were many potholers on the road and this forced the cars and lorries to slow down often to a crawl. At these areas there was a thriving business of road side ladies selling fresh boiled maize to the slow traffic. I stopped and bought one, but it was full of starch and not that sweet. A little further I reached a junction where there were road works. The main branch went up to Sinazeze and the arterial T1 road at Batoka and the other went down to Sinazongwe where I wanted to go.

294. The Kenzinze and Zongwe Rivers met in a wide sandy valley. On each side water was used to irrigate a second harvest of corn.

295. Where the traffic had to slow down to negotiate the large pot holes younger women sold boiled maize to the almost stationary traffic and passers-by.

Curiously, they were building a new road to this small town and it was going to be a superb road for a relatively small community. It did not make sense and I thought there must be more to it; like a yet unpublished grand Chinese plan to transport minerals. At the junction was a small covered market with perhaps 30 women sitting at small stalls selling vegetables and lengths of sugar cane. I had noticed a few of these lately. I went over to them to confirm it was the way to Sinazongwe and they all pointed and confirmed in unison. I should imagine nothing happens in the community around here without these market trading ladies knowing about it first. As I set off down the road I was delighted to see it was hard packed earth which had been rollered so it was very smooth. I sped along at well over 30 km per hour, the fastest I had been for a week. However it was not to last as I soon met the construction team where the road deteriorated into piles of loose materials and I was diverted onto the old road which was narrow and sandy.

However the old road went through villages and it was full of interest. The houses here were much more substantial with many homesteads having a 2 room mud brick building and a couple of other brick buildings on the compound and most under a tin roof. The soil here did not look more fertile and it was still a parched landscape with many baobab trees, so I guessed the slight increase in wealth was due to cultural reasons where people were more industrious in the fallow dry season. It could also be that when the Tonga tribe which inhabited the area now underwater on the Zambian side of Lake Kariba and also the lands around Sinazongwe were given a lot of financial help and agricultural expertise 3 generations ago when they were displaced by the flooding of Lake Kariba and this has increased their productivity.

296. The avenue of baobab trees leading down to a cluster of shops and the load bottle store/pub near Sinazongwe.

I passed one village through an avenue of baobab trees leading to a neat row of shops and a junction. Across the road from the shops was a building with large portable solar panels strewn about but all connected to the building which had an enormous speaker pumping out very loud music. There were about 5-6 young men here already dancing and gesticulating, some with bottle in hand. It was only about 1300 in the day. The other shops across the road looked relatively clean and were recently whitewashed and were small grocers. I should imagine the shop keepers were quite conservative and upstanding and would have looked down on the bottleshop owner and wastrels whose music dominated the whole junction like Americans view crystal meth addicts.

297. On the sandy tracks through the dispersed village of Sinazongwe there were frequently cattle and goats on the road.

I continued down small roads for another 5 km through the spread out Sinazongwe passing many nurses in blue uniforms almost looking like nuns with their heads covered. There was a lot going on with cows and children all over the road. Although I did not go past a centre or market, there still seemed to be a lot going on. Curiously the roads here were also a bit wet. It was either water seeping out of the high ground water or it was a truck which had filled up from the lake and was spreading it on the sandy mud to keep the dust down. I passed the turn off to the Zambian Special Forces Marine Division, who must patrol Lake Kariba and its long border with Zimbabwe which ran down the middle of the lake for 200 km and then took a small rocky track to two lodges which were right on the edge of the lake. I had already noted the Lake View Lodge which was at the end of the stony track.

298. The tracks of Sinazongwe where also busy with people, from nurses returning from clinics and health posts to excited children.

The lodge was very quiet with two older ladies who ran the place sitting in the reception. There was no one else around. I think it had the main reception area and then 4 chalets under thatched roofs. 3 were large “executive” chalets and 1 “standard” The whole place was very photogenic and the chalets looked great but two of the “executive” chalets I could see were out of action due to maintained issues like a broken water heater and the other was occupied, So I got the standard. It was like a hobbit’s house but was much larger inside and with a functioning bathroom. It was a considerable step up from Enedge’s in Siabeswi last night.

299. My small chalet at Lake View Lodge. It was deceptively big with a attached bathroom at the back.

I went for a short stroll in the late afternoon along the shore of the lodge, which was a 2 star hotel. It was rocky with big boulders and the occasional pocket of sand and grassy area. I noticed the signs “Beware of Crocodiles” but there were a few fishermen in small craft cruising just off shore. The lake itself is huge, about 200 km long and 20-40 wide. It is the biggest man made lake in the world and was formed in the 1950’s when the Zambezi River was dammed at the Kariba Gorge. The ladies at the lodge said it was much lower a few months ago but has been rising since the heavy rainfall in this recent rainy season in its catchment area in the Angolan Highlands 4-5 months ago has swollen the river. It was the same river I was rafting on a week ago and the water on those waves and rapids would now be in the lake. The ladies made me a great dinner but there was no sign of anyone else at all here except for a team of gardeners who lived in two perfunctory bungalows and were perhaps part of the ladies families. I don’t know who owns the place but it seems like a wasted resource. I made a start on the blog but had already decided to spend a rest day here tomorrow so postponed the effort.

300. The view from Lake View Lodge looking across the lake which was about 20 km wide here to Zimbabwe on the other side.

Day 056. 04 July. Mapatizya to Siabaswi. 64 km. 8 Hours. 550m up. 1090m down. Again I slept long and well in the simple room. I got up at 0630 as the village was coming to life and the sun was about to rise. There was nothing to eat so early in town so I sat outside my room and had another large helping of granola and powdered milk. It was my staple at the moment. I was finished and packed by 0800 and set off after Corbett, a stone buyer, came for a chat. I met him yesterday and he showed me the restaurant. He was setting off round all the small artisanal mines, legal and illegal, to buy amethyst.

282. From Mapatizya the road deteriorated and descended quite steeply in places for a good 5-6 km to reach the village of Siwaza.

Once I left it did not take long to leave the village and descend into quite green bush. It did not last and soon it was brown and parched. The track climbed up past a mast and then descended steeply. Before me I could see the landscape stretching out to the south with ridges getting more hazy and blue as then went down to the vast Lake Kariba, which I could just see perhaps 30-40 kilometres away. The descent was very steep and my brakes were working hard on the very rough road. I could see it would be a real struggle for lorries to get up here to supply Mapatizya. It was not just down, there were some vindictive short steep climbs too. There was even poor quality amythyst lying on the road, used to fill in some of the potholes. It was too steep and I think too dry for any farming and there weren’t even goats on this stretch. In 5 km I dropped some 300 metres and then came across the first homesteads. One was particularly idyllic on a small saddle on a minor ridge. It looked like an extended family stayed there as there were a few huts on stilts packed with maize and about 5 round huts for sleeping in. I have noticed a lot of daily socialising seems to take place under the shade of the maize stores.

283. The idyllic homestead, probably for and extended family on the steep descent from Mapatizya to Siwaza.

After a few more homesteads I came to a junction near the village of Siwaza. There was an army checkpost here but the female soldier barely looked up as I cycled past. In complete contrast I also passed a gang working on the road. There were about 40 of them and most were women. There was lots of banter when I cycled past them with confident greetings and much gleeful shouting. I would have loved to have photographed them but am sure this would have spoiled the mood. They were filling in potholes and I am sure they were being paid by the Chinese as many further down the road near a Chinese coal mine were.

From Siwaza the road was a bit better but it was rough on the cycle with many stones and some severe washboarding. It continued to descend but more gently, however with the rough surface it was completely wasted and I could not release the brakes and let fly. It seemed a bit poorer down here than up on the plateau where I had been for the last couple of days on each side of Luyaba. However down here people seemed very cheerful and the women more confident. After a good 15 km from Mapatizya I came across the side road to the Chinese mine but there seemed little to indicate there was anything up the road, which looked small and rough. Somebody told me they had a few mines in the area and they were all coal mines and the lorries took the coal up to the copper belt north of Lusaka on the Congo border, where it was used to smelt the copper.

284. By the time I had descended even further to Siameja village the landscape had become very arid and baobab trees were becoming common.

I carried on along the bumpy road with its ups and mostly downs until I reached the market village of Siameja. By now the landscape was very arid and the baobab trees were abundant again. On the ground were parched shrubs and scant grasses. I did not see cattle in this area as it was mostly goats. However there were fields of maize which had long since been harvested and all the cobs stored in the granaries. I noticed Siameja had a Chinese funded milling shed. It was powered by a large array of solar panels and a battery bank. The bank then powered the 2 milling machines to make flour for nshima. A clever form of colonialism to win hearts and minds rather than the British “divide and conquer” or the Belgium brutal oppression. The mill was busy with women with bundles of kernels or flour in sacks.

285. Well after Siameja village and just before Muunku village I reached a large river bed which still had a few pools. I think it was called the Zhimu River.

After Siameja the road got a little easier to cycle on but I could still not go fast. It was getting very arid now and the farms looked even poorer. There were cactus all over the scrub floor and very little for even the goats to eat. The baobab trees grew well here. Someone once told me it looked like a tree which was planted upside down with the roots in the air and the crown buried in the ground. Now they had shed their leaves for the dry season I could easily see how that description came about. I passed a large dry river with a few pools of water in it and some thirsty cattle in the river bed. A few kilometres further I came to a small village called Muunka. I was tired, hot and thirsty as I had been in the saddle for about 6 hours non stop. I saw the only shop here and despite the music blaring outside it went in. It was both a grocers with biscuits, cold drinks and bike parts, but also a pub with about 4 younger men in it. I bought some biscuits and cold drinks and then retreated outside where some primary school children were playing draughts on a board made from cardboard and different coloured bottle tops as pieces. Two older men approached who had obviously been at a political rally as they both had T-shirts with a candidate on. They were quite charming and well spoken and said it was still 40 km to Maamba town and I would not make it before dark. It would be better to go 20 km to Siabaswi and ask for Enedge who had a lodge. It was a great plan and I set off eagerly. It was only 1400 so I had good time.

286. Between Muunka and Siabaswi the road became quite sandy as it went over a arid sand strewn shallow ridge for 20 km.

The road climbed slowly up a gentle hill for 10 km through dry scrub. There were some homesteads here but not many. It was just inhospitable and arid and the growing season must be very short for maize. The few small subsistence farms that were here probably relied on goats to provide a living. At the highest point the road got very sandy but still just manageable to cycle on. I noticed now there was nothing on the ground which was bare sand with scrub growing out of it. Anything a metre from the ground was eaten by goats so uniformly it almost had a manicured look. I struggled through the sand noticing the other cyclists kept veering off the road onto harder parts which they cruised along. I joined them and it was much easier on these bike paths. The Zambians of this area belonged to a certain tribe but I forgot the name and they spoke a Bantu language. They were very dark and seemed very strong and lean. They powered those heavy gearless steel bikes up hills with large loads with ease.

288. Enedge’s restaurant had just a single chicken drumstick sitting in the plastic container and some sweet buns when I arrived.

287. The meal at Enedge’s restaurant with drumstick, some cabbage and the ubiquitous nshima.

At last I reached a village. I thought it was Siabaswi but it was the one before. Luckily I wrote the name of Siabaswi village and Enedge, the lodge owner, down so I could ask later. I was directed down to a junction and then left to the north over a river, which was now a trickle. Here I asked a large group of women directions and they came over and teased me with good humour about me cycling. They pointed out where I should go. It was only 300 metres and then down a lane. Enedge was there when I arrived. He also had a restaurant. Unfortunately the only thing in it was a single chicken drumstick which had been sitting all day and was the only one left, and nshima. I took it and ate it at once. Enedge then took me down to show me a simple room with an outdoor toilet. It was only £5, or 150 kwacha, and it had power to recharge my batteries. Just beside the rooms was a bar which I went too to see around. It was empty but could seat perhaps 50 on a payday or weekend. I went to my room while Enedge got a bucket of cool water from me to have an invigorating bucket shower. I then wrote the blog listening to the array of Zambian music coming from the bar. Some was aggressive, like a type of rap, and others were melodic anthems. By 2000 I was done with the blog and ready for bed.

289. My room and the bathroom and toilets at Enedge’s Lodge in Siabeswi. I was grateful for the accommodation otherwise I would have been in a tent somewhere.

Day 055. 03 July. Luyaba to Mapatizya. 57 km. 7 Hours. 380m up. 670m down. I slept extremely well and got up at 0630. There was a lot going on and the morning fires were already lit in the compound next door and the cockerels were showing off as the sun came up. I had a breakfast of granola and powdered milk. I had a lot of it, perhaps 4 kilos of both together and needed to start getting through it to gain some place in the paniers. I set off at 0800 and cycled up through the market village of Luyaba. The title market village makes it sound more quaint than it was. On each side of the street were small solid shops with heavily locked doors. Inside the shops that were open was a dingy blackened interior with sacks of staples, hardware and groceries. The facade of the shops were a lot grander than what was inside. There were about 15 shops on each side and then the countryside slowly returned. Within a kilometer I was back between the fields and the homesteads.

274. Leaving Luyaba in the morning with the sun shining on the small collection of shops in the heart of the village.

Cattle and goats wandered across the road having just got released from their corrals of log posts or thicket piles stacked in a circle. There seemed to be more cattle here now and slightly less maize although it was still prevalent. I found out what the other mystery crop was and that was sunflowers. The heads must have been pressed for oil. It was a joyous easy cycle on a good firm road which was descending slightly. Occasionally there were some pot-holed areas but largely the road was great. What really made it great for me was the homesteads and especially the round granaries and the small round kitchen huts. Initially I thought they were dilapidated mud huts for sleeping in but I saw a few in use in the morning with a fire within and the smoke coming out of the roof. It meant the family could gather round in the rainy season while the fire was going. There were some larger oval ones where the extended family might gather and eat. Many had brick patterns to let the air in at the lower levels.

275. One of the graneries at a homestead which was packed full of maize from this year’s harvest. The 3 small shelters are for chickens to roost in.

After about 24 km I reached Kabanga which was similar to Luyaba. It was also a market village with a large secondary school. I cycled the last stretch to Kabanga with a retired policeman on an old bike. His English was good enough to tell me they were building an earth dam nearby so they could keep the cattle watered through the dry season. At Kabanga itself I had intended to stop and perhaps even eat at a local restaurant but there was nothing which I liked the look of. All the shops were small, dingy and unappealing and there were men hanging around most of them. I did not want to stop amongst them to find a drunk might come over and make life difficult so I cycled on through the large village knowing I would find a hamlet with a couple of shops soon. These hamlets with a few shops were every 10 km at the most.

276. One on the many covered outdoor kitchen designs were the morning and evening meals are prepared and the family gather.

About 10 km past Kabanga I came across some large buildings and a guarded compound with trucks. There was no sign to say what it was but I knew there was a small mine here. A bit later I came to a hamlet of shops and stopped at one to buy a drink and a packet of biscuits. The owner was Ibrahim and he was a lively character. He was fascinated by my journey but thought it was just a ruse and I was really here to buy minerals. He showed me some amethyst and said I could have it. I explained I did not want to take it to Dar es Salam. He then took me round the back of his house where his wife was winnowing her way through a large pile of gravel and was sifting the chunks of tungsten out. It transpired there was a lot of tungsten in the area and that is what the previous mine was recently built for. It was owned by a Chinese company. He said a lot of people in the area produced tungsten which was sold in Lusaka by the sack load to supplement the farming.

After leaving Ibrahim’s I continued south on a deteriorating road passing fewer and fewer homestrads and more bush. There were a lot of small short climbs and then gradual descents as I traveled over a series of gentle ridges. Occasionally there were far reaching views to the south. The short climbs were quite taxing and I had to creep up in the lowest gear. After two hours of this I reached a hamlet in the almost forest like bush. There has been no charcoal production since I left Zimba otherwise I suspect these trees would be gone. I passed one homestead right on the edge of a long descent where there were many people gathered, perhaps 40 and they were all in a good mood with everyone waving at me. Perhaps it was a wedding.

277. The steep section of road leading off the rolling plateau where Kabanga lay and heading down through the bush to Mapatitzya.

From here I started a long descent on a terrible road. I think the homestead with the party was the end of one road and where I was going in 25 km was the end of another road and the next 25 km was just a track to link them up. In my favour most of it was downhill and I think I dropped about 300 metres in this section, some quite steeply with the brakes working hard. There were some good views to the south but I could not see Lake Kariba in the distance. As I dropped down the rough road it got warmer and drier and there was no habitation or farming for about 15 km. It was a wild bush area too rough for farming and perhaps too dry also as all the rain would run off quickly. It was not all down and there were a few hard climbs where I often pushed. I saw no one on this track at all for nearly an hour until I saw the first of the homesteads which were creeping up the slope. Then I got to a hamlet where there was a school. Here I met a man who said there was a market village 10 km away and he was sure there was a lodge there. He himself worked in a nearby small mine owned by an Indian.

278. Mapatizya village with the traditional homesteads on the photo’s left and then the newer commercial street with shops.

The 10 kilometres to Mapatitzya were mostly down and I was back into the rural harming homesteads again with lots of interest for me. They were still all subsistence farms, but one or two had a small old tractor and I heard a generator at another. After a demanding undulating section I reached a busy and well maintained health care clinic on the edge of the village. Here someone confirmed there was a lodge which was great news. It’s not that I mind camping but a lodge means comfort and company. At the Catholic church I finally got a view of Mapatizya on the next ridge. It was a mix of the old mud huts and homestead type buildings next to the small, dingy shops. I pushed the bike up the hill into the large thriving village.

279. The simple accommodation at the Deep Purple Lodge was adequate and had a hot water bucket shower in the yellow bathroom. The name is from amythyst rather than Rock and Roll.

A few people offered me amethyst and took me for a mineral trader as I wandered up the main street past the shops. I then saw the sign for the Deep Purple Lodge and went down to it. It was nicer than last night in Luyaba but double the price at 300 kwacha (£9). I took it and after unpacking realised I had to eat. The lady directed me to a restaurant and I was surprised when I got there just how simple and dingy it was. There was a pot of meat, a pot of greens and a bucket of nshima. I ordered and then drank a litre as the food was brought over. The meat and vegetables were surprisingly good but the nshima was tasteless and dull. The meal was exactly what I needed and it broke my fear of going into the dark gloomy shops.

280. The restaurant in Mapatizya. The pot on the left contained chunks of beef in a gravy and the one next to it salty green vegetables. The nshima was in a bucket.

281. The very tasty meat and vegetables were needed to make the bland nshima tasty.

Back at the lodge I had a bucket shower, with a huge tub of hot water the host had prepared on the fire. It was ideal and I managed to wash my cycling clothes. As I wrote the blog 2 Zambians came over to chat. They also thought I was a mineral trader. They explained that there were lots of high quality amethyst in the area and they had come down to buy some. Good quality was £30 a kilo and ordinary was £2 a kilo. They said the village was flourishing because of the amethyst found in the vicinity and there were lots of illegal and also legal mines. The illegal mines were all on a small scale. Indeed I had noticed much talk in the village was about amethyst.

Day 054. 02 July. Zimba to Luyaba. 72 km. 7 Hours. 360m up. 290m down. After the poor, but well meaning, breakfast I learnt there was a bike shop right behind the lodge. I went round to it and was surprised how good it was. It was a bit ridiculous for me to carry 5 tires and 11 inner tubes so I asked him if he wanted some. Which he surely did. An assistant helped me change the old tubeless tire at the front to a new Schwalbe with a tube. So I now had the new tyres with tubes on both wheels. I gave the assistant both the old tyres and also about 4 inner tubes and the liquid latex to put in the tubeless set up should he wish. All in n all it was about 2 kg which I managed to shed and it went to a good home. I returned to the lodge and loaded up the bike and said my goodbyes to Diana and the staff, all of whom were very nice, despite the poor food.

I cycled up the busy side street to the main road and then turned north towards Lusaka, still about 350 km away. However I only had to follow this ghastly road for 2 km until I turned off. As I left the town I saw the Pilgrim Wesleyan Mission were responsible for some of the hospital and that they were also building a “university” next to it. So this Wesleyan mission is having quite an impact on the well-being of Zimba. It did not take long to get to the turn off for the road to Kasikilis. I crossed over the main T1 road and then heard the crunch of gravel as I started east on the newly graded dirt road.

266. It was a joy to be back on the gravel roads. This one was just outside Zimba heading towards the villages of Chuundwe, Mankubu and eventually Kasikilis

It was a relief to be able to cycle with abandon all over the road. It took about half an hour before a car overtook me and all day I only saw about 3 lorries crammed with people, 4-5 cars and about 25 motorbikes, but a few hundred cyclists. So it was an exceptionally quiet road. I could stop to take photos again and wave to people when they waved. Initially there was scrub on each side of the road but that soon changed and I was into cattle stations. There were two on each side of the road and it looked like they were run by Zambian workers who all lived in the same style of house with small vegetable plots beside them. later a cyclist returning from Zimba caught up with me and confirmed they were owned by white farmers who lived somewhere else, but he did not know where. At one station they had rounded up about 200 cattle to inoculate or mark them. The cyclist was returning from Zimba where he had sold some aqua stones he had mined. I assume he meant aquamarine stones. Just before the bridge over the Kalomo river he left me and cycled off on his simple bike which had no brakes. The bridge over the river was quite new, as was the road I think they were built in the last 5 years. There was still a trickle of water in the Kalomo River and this kept its pools topped up.

267. After about 25 kilometres i reached the River Kaloma which was still just running.

After the bridge the larger farms stopped and it seemed to be much more traditional African farming with subsistence homesteads. The actual homestead houses were small but there were a few to each compound. They all had a new small rectangular house under a corrugated tin roof. These were so alike I thought it must have been part of a government initiative. There were still quite a few round thatched mud huts in the compound also and also one or two storage huts in stilts and also under a thatched roof. The storage huts were essentially for the maize and I could see most were still packed with maize, still in its sheat, and waiting to be de-cobbed and then pounded into flour for the nshima staple.

268. There were plenty of homesteads each side of the road. They all had a new square brick house with a tin roof as it were a free government issue.

The homesteads were pretty much continuous for 50 kilometres all the way to Luyaba. Around the homesteads were large fields usually of maize but there was another crop, perhaps sorghum, which I could not identify. It looked like the fields had been ploughed with oxen as the rows were often uneven. However, occasionally it looked like a tractor had been used and I saw some small older ones parked near a few of the homesteads. There were also small herds of cattle and goats foraging in the parched undergrowth between the fields. It looked like a quiet time of year in the agricultural calendar as there was no one in the fields and there was no sign anything had been ploughed recently. Most fields still had the stalks of the crops standing after they were stripped for harvest. I am sure everything will have to be ploughed before the rains start in November. The road was generally good and it was a delight to cycle through this pastoral landscape which has probably not changed for hundreds of years.

269. Often the water source or hand pump wasn’t near the homesteads and it was common to see women carrying water in buckets on their heads or transporting drums on ox carts

Occasionally there were some villages and there were lots of schools. The three villages I remember were Chuundwe, Mankubu and Kasikilis but there were a few more. Each village had a rustic primary school and a Mankubu had a secondary school, the pupils of which waved and shouted as I went past. I think education is taken seriously here but then there will be times of the year when the pupils are helping in the fields, like at harvest time. At each village there are also a row of roadside shops stocking general groceries and some hardware. In this row there is also a bottleshop, or pub, where 5-10 men seem to hang out and chat or drink. They would always call me over but I would wave and carry on. If I needed to ask a question or buy something I would head for the grocers where there were women, especially schoolgirls, outside because they spoke the best English.

270. There were occasional hamlets of shops. Usually one would be a bottle store/pub with men sitting chatting. The other shops were ofter run by or had women at them but not the bottle shop.

272. On the last 20 kilometres before Kasikilis the road became narrow and much more potholed and washboarded., but it remained a firm surface.

Between Mankubu and Kasikilis the road got narrower and more uneven. It was still easy to cycle on but slower. The surface was a bit sandy but it was large grains of sand, like sand from granite, and it was easily packed and my wheels did not cut in. Just before Kasikilis I met another gravel road which came south from the town of Kaloma and I would follow for the next two days. There was no change in the land use beside the road with lots of homesteads still, but here and there I noticed some NGOs had been developing various projects with arid tolerant seeds for maize. I thought about asking one of the prettier homesteads if I could camp in their compound, especially as I had topped up my water bottles from a communal bore hole hand pump, but soon I was approaching Luyaba.

271. All the homesteads had somewhere to store maize so rodents didn’t eat it. There were usually round and on stilts like these two – which were full of maize.

It was a larger village and certainly something of a rural hub which had a goverment secondary school and a health clinic. It looked 3-5 times bigger than anything else I had cycled past today. The problem about coming into a busier place and asking about accomodation is it is easy to be overwhelmed by information and opinions. I had intended to head to the secondary school and see if I could ask someone there who might be connected with the school for permission. However just as I entered the village I saw a sign for a lodge. I suspected there might be one as there were visiting teachers, health workers and merchants who would need somewhere when visiting Luyaba I went down the lane and at the end of it was a simple lodge with about 12 rooms in many seperate buildings. Opposite them were toilets and a wash room in concrete shed. It was all very simple and rustic. She had a room free and it was just 150 Kwacha or £6. It was easier than the tent so I took it. I sorted my pictures for the day on the concrete verandah as the sun went down in its usual blaze of orange and then went inside to write and have a cold dinner of biltong and some cans I wanted to get rid of. I finished the blog by 2030 and then got into my sleeping bag and slept on the bed as I was not sure when the sheets were last changed.

273. At Luyaba I fully expected to camp somewhere but found this small basic lodge for 150 Kwacha (£6). It had toilets in a separate rustic shed

Day 053. 01 July. Zimba Rest Day. 0 km. 0 Hours. 0m up. 0m down. I was up for the breakfast at 0730 and then wrote the blog for the rest of the morning sitting in the small reception area. People came and went but generally it was very quiet as I typed away. I was finished by midday and thought it best go for a walk round town. I assumed it would take a few hours.

I left the guesthouse and walked up the rough track to one of the side streets. It was a dirt road, as all roads were in Zimba except for the T1 main road which went through the town. It was just a 2 block walk to the main road but there was not much of interest other than the small shops. There were 3 types, general grocers, butchers and material shops. All were small and the general grocers had very limited supplies of the same non-perishable items like biscuits or hermetic food in tins. There were a few stalls of vegetable sellers and most of them slowly sold tomatoes. The town was busy though with people everywhere.

On the main road it was pretty much the same but now there were many many small booths, only about a metre by a metre and 2 metres high and they were selling sim cards, telecom money services and top up charge cards. There must have been over 100 booths in the town in all but only a third were occupied. I could not understand how there was such a demand for them. There were also a few bottle shops which doubled as pubs and they looked small and unsavoury. I don’t suppose drunks are that discerning though.

There were a few local restaurants. It seems most cooked batches of their food in the morning and then it sat in metal trays with a lid. Customers were then served chicken, goat or fish from the tray. To this was added greens and nshima, a dish found all over Africa. Nshima is made from maize flour and is quite firm and filling although it lacks much nutrition. It is known as ugali in East Africa and fufu on West Africa. It was something I was going to get used to now as it is the main carbohydrate staple in rural areas. I went into a few restaurants but most had run out of food as it was 1400. However I found one with some and had a local sausage with greens and nshima.

There was not much else of interest so I walked past the Pilgrim Wesleyan Mission where I have seen the lorry with the young white people in the back of it. But there was not much going on in the compound. There was quite a large hospital, The Zimba Mission Hospital, with perhaps 100 beds and I think the Pilgrim Wesleyan Mission had a lot to do with the funding of it.

I was back at the guesthouse in an hour and there was little to do except have a long siesta. Diana offered a steak for dinner but then when it came it was the toughest 3 chunks of rib one could imagine, full of gristle and cartilage. The rice was nice though. She said it was all she could find in the market but after seeing all the butcher shops I could not believe here. The Floating Attic Executive Lodge had comfortable accommodation but the food was poor. By the end of the day I was eager to get onto the smaller roads through the rural villages from tomorrow for 10 days, where I am sure I will have greater affinity than this small commercial town.

Day 052. 30 June. Livingstone to Zimba. 77km. 8 Hours. 660m up. 350m down. I was up early but spent a far amount of time packing. I now had 6 tyres and 11 inner tubes in all. I had the tubeless set up still on the bike and was reluctant to change it. However when they failed I would change over to the new Schwalbe Mondial tyres. It was a luxurious abundance of tyres and inner tubes but I had to pay for it in weight. I put my spare tubeless aside to give away to a local cyclist I liked. I set off around 0930 and went to the ATM again just to get a final top up for the next month or so. Then I started up the hill. The bike was very heavy with perhaps 20 large servings of granola and milk, the extra tyres and all the ready meals. However, I just put it in a lower gear than usual and slowly ground away.

There was a reasonably wide road with a clear and bright yellow line down each side of it. Outside the yellow line on each side was a good meter and often a metre and a half of rougher tarmac which was for cyclists and pedestrians. I felt quite comfortable on it. The only problem was that it occasionally had scatterings of broken glass on it and they were often difficult to avoid. I passed one older cyclist who gave me a cheery wave so I stopped and gave the spare tyre to him. It was too big for his bike but he would be able to trade it. The road was quite busy with cyclists as in Zambia many people have bikes, usually old solid steel built Chinese built bikes. On the other side of the road there were a few of these going into Livingstone piled with sacks of charcoal. On one bike I counted 7 in all. The sacks of charcoal I later learnt sell for about 60-70 Zambiam Kwacha, or about £2 or US$ 2.5. I guess a large portion of the population, perhaps 5-10% of the rural population, is connected with producing and selling charcoal.

259. As I left Livingstone cycling up the road to the north there were a few cyclists heading down with bags of charcoal to sell in the town.

As I cycled up the hills there was a considerable headwind against me and my progress was painfully slow. Meanwhile the trucks continued to go past at about 15 an hour just 1.5 metres away from me. There were also some large buses and more frequent cars. Many were slow and overloaded but there were some newer Toyota pick ups and Landscruisers which went speeding past in a hissing blur. I would be glad to get off the tarmac roads soon. I had been on them virtually since entering Botswana, and though I was being spoiled for ease of cycling it was not the slow, easy-going, rural experience I was hoping for. Although on this particular road there was also a dirt track running about 30 metres to the west of it through the bush. It was mostly for villagers on foot, small herds of goats and cattle, and also the donkey or ox carts which were made from a car’s axle and wheels with a wooden frame on top. It would have been much slower to travel on though and I was already cutting it fine to reach Zimba in the daylight with this headwind.

260. The scrub extended each side of the road for an eternity but there were not many larger trees. Occasionally goats and cattle foraged on the parched floor.

There were charcoal stalls all along the road side. They mostly all waved but a few, mostly run by women, just stared even when I waved. I think I must have passed 100 stalls during the course of the day and maybe as many as 200. In places there were so many stalls small hamlets had formed, and there were even a couple of shacks at these hamlets selling biscuits and warm sodas. After 4 hours I stopped at one of them and had a packet of biscuits, but of all of them I picked I managed to find the most indifferent and everybody pretty much ignored me. While if I stopped at others I often got overwhelmed with excited boys and young men who wanted to know everything about my trip and swap Whatsapp numbers.

261. There were also quite a lot of charcoal sellers along the roadside in the 78 km today I guess there were more than 100. 1 bag was 60-70 Kwacha (£2).

As I was going down a rare hill there was suddenly a rhythmic hissing sound and after a while I realized it was me and not a passing truck. I looked down to see the back tyre was gushing out the white latex liquid I had put in at Nata some 10 days ago at Rupert’s Eselbe Backpackers. The tyre had a catastrophic gash in it which the tubeless liquid would not fix. It was about 5-8 mm long. There was no option other than to change tyres to the new Schwalbe Marathon’s with an inner tube, so I wheeled the bike right off the road and took the paniers off. Just then a local villager, Terrance, came past on his bike. He was off with his catapult hunting birds for dinner but stopped to help. If anyone is adept at changing tyres, fixing punctures and removing wheels it is a Zambian villager. We had the wheel off and old tubeless off in no time, and then put on the inner tube and new tyre in an instant. On my own it would have taken an hour but we did it in just half that time. He was easy going, calm and helpful the whole time so I gave him a good tip which he was clearly not expecting. At the end his wife and daughter came down the road looking to see how his dinner hunting with the catapult was going and were overjoyed to find him with some crisp green kwacha notes in his hand. It meant little to me but a lot to him and I felt his kindness should be rewarded. I waved good bye to his family and started up the road again and immediately noticed how much better the rolling resistance of the new tyre was and I was going some 10 % faster with the less knobbly tyre. I would probably give the old tyre away in Zimba, but in retrospect should have given it to Terrance but his bike had 26 inch tyres.

262. When I got a catastrophic puncture and had to change the tyre Terrance, who was cycling past stopped to help.

263. Many of the charcoal makers lived in traditional mud huts near the road. It was very much a cottage industry but a prevalent one.

As I neared Zimba the climbs levelled off and the head wind eased off too so I was suddenly up to 20 km per hour after a day of 10 km per hour. It was just as well dusk was only an hour away when I reached the town. It was busy even in the evening with the main road widening out to a broad tarmac area which was lined with small shops and stalls. There were a few rustic lodges here, a mission hospital and churches of many denominations. I saw a truck of young white youth in the back, sitting on the bed, going into one church, maybe returning after a day of construction at a small development project or joining in at one of the many schools. I cycled past the stalls and shops and then went down a side street which was also busy with stalls selling vegetables, rolls of materials and sim cards. It seemed Zimba was something of a market town for the surrounding rural villages in the countryside. I at last found the guesthouse which google maps had indicated was the best in Zimba. It was called the Floating Attic Executive Lodge. I was greeted by the friendly Diana who worked here. She led me up the steep ramp where I could hardly push the heavy bike. It was a small guest house with a nice entrance and sitting area and then a small inner courtyard with 6 rooms arranged round it. The courtyard had a deep, tiny, drained pool which was surrounded by tall plants which crammed the whole courtyard filling like a postage stamp size rain forest. It was as quirky as it was friendly. I settled into the room and Diana helped me carry the panniers and bike through the congested courtyard to the room by which time it was getting dark.

264. As the main road went through Zimba it widened out with market stalls and small shops lining each side of the road.

In the entrance area I spoke to one dapper man who had the fabulous name of Pass Well. It turned out Pass Well was the owner of the lodge. He knew the district around here well and all the roads. When I quizzed him on my route to Maamba he said I would best be going on up the big road to Choma, 100 km away. This was something I was very reluctant to do. I was done with big arterial roads for the time being. There was little interest, glass strewn verges, 38 ton lorries passing just a metre away occasionally and with little to commend it other than friendly local cyclists and my curiosity of the charcoal enterprises. When I showed him my route on the map I had, passing through the villages of Ruyala and Kabanga to reach Lake Kariba, he said that it was not only possible but a nice way to go and the dirt roads were firm with no sand. He said I would be able to sleep at the local schools. It was all music to my ears and exactly what I wanted to hear. I would have 2 more km on the main road and then turn off.

265. Even the side streets leading down to thr Floating Attic Guesthouse where busy with stalls. Zimba was a market town for the surrounding rural districts.

I was tired as I sat on my bed before the dinner and realised I would want a day off here tomorrow to catch up with the blog, look around the bustling town and rest my legs after the strenuous cycle today so arranged it with the competent young Diana who seemed to run the place. She cooked a dinner which was a little dubious with grilled chicken which had come out of the freezer and while the outside was well cooked the inside was not so well done so I only ate the outer bits. After that I slept well.

Day 051. 29 June. Livingstone Rest Day. 17km. 3 Hours. 200m up. 200m down. I was up at 0600 and the backpackers had breakfast ready soon after. However, it turned out I was getting picked up at 0830 not 0720 so I had plenty of time after all. When I was picked up I was driven to a large lodge right on the edge of the river called The Waterfront. I am sure the place could sleep 200 comfortably in the large complex. Here I met the rest of the team who were some 15 younger travellers on a group overland tour, with Con-Tiki. Most were from the US but there were a few Australians too. There were also about 10 Zambians who were either river guides, drivers or porters. The Zambians were a vibrant bunch, full of jokes, which they must have told every day.

It transpired that the river was too high after all to do some of the upper rapids and they were grade 6 at the moment. Number 9 Rapid down from the Bridge was especially dangerous at this water level, and even when the river was low it was portaged round by the commercial rafting companies. There were immensely strong eddies, boils and whirlpools on this upper stretch at the moment apparently, which would suck you down, even with our extra buoyant life jackets. So we would start at Rapid 14 and go down to Rapid 25, which were mostly grade 3 or 4.

The 15 Con-Tiki overland truck clients, the 10 rafting staff and myself then set off in a couple of converted lorries with seats in the back to Rapid Number 14. It was a fascinating journey as we passed a couple of interesting villages, one of which was from where our raft guide, Melvin, hailed from. After a good half hour we then had a long descent down concrete steps to the rivers edge where the 3 raft boats were already set up and waiting for us. The Zambezi River looked considerably smaller and less violent here than it did a couple of days ago at the Boiling Pot just under the Bridge. Perhaps it was just deeper here. We then had another safety brief, met the safety kayakers who would rescue anyone who took an inadvertent swim and launched our boats just below a big drop which was either Rapid 13 or the first half of Rapid 14.

The swirls and upwellings and the whirlpools at the edge of the eddies were considerable, and while the whirlpools would not suck the raft down they would hold it for a while, spinning us round until we drifted down out of the eddy line into more stable water. The rapids were mostly big wave trains. A curved tongue of smoother water led down in a V shape to a series of large waves, all with a white crest which curled over us like a Hokusai Wave until we crashed through it and climbed up the next. Each rapid had perhaps 10-15 large waves in it. The waves were generally quite predictable and straight forward and there were no stoppers, or holes to complicate things. A stopper or hole is where the water plunges over a lip into depression but which usually has water circulating back upstream on the surface just after this depression. If the raft went into one of these it would stop and possibly flip over. One of the other rafts went over a lip caused by a submerged boulder and did in fact flip over. We all saw it in slow motion and everybody got thrown out. Their boat guide, Choogmo, managed to right the boat eventually and all but one of the rafters who were holding onto the edge of it managed to get in. But one, Jess, went for a very long swim of about 5 minutes in which she was carried down over 2 rapids hanging onto the front of the safety paddlers kayak. She was eventually pulled into our raft and looked quite shaken.

258. On my day off in Livingstone i joined a raft crew for a 15 km trip down the Zambezi River past 12 named rapids, all about class 3.

As we went down the rapids we passed the corpse of a hippopotamus which had been washed up onto the rocks when the river was a bit higher 6 weeks ago. Melvin, our boat guide, thought it had probably had a fight with a larger male above the falls. It had lost and had either been killed or injured and had been washed over the Victoria Falls and then down about 20 rapids to end up here. Apparently there were crocodiles in the river too and we saw about 3 small ones, a metre long. They also get swept over the falls and the really small ones can survive the drop and then get washed down the river where they can survive. However as they grow there is not enough food to sustain them and they slowly migrate downstream to the end of the gorge and the Kariba dam area where they can thrive.

From about Rapid 20 all the rapids were grade 3 and it became quite tame, but there were still some violent eddies and boils and large waves trains. On one I thought we might flip over also as the raft could not climb up over the wave and was stuck there surfing with the bottom of the wave threatening to catch the lower edge and push it under while the breaking water at the top kept it in place, but it did just not happen and after a few seconds we were released. After Rapid 25 we pulled over to the side and then landed. There was a steep path with log ladders in a few places out of the deep Batoka Gorge and back onto the lip of the plain. It took a good 20 minutes to climb back out. At the top we had a packed lunch and then drove back to the Waterfront lodge past all the fascinating villages again.

I now had an hour to wait until the cruise on the Upper Zambezi with the same company, Safpar. This cruise was thrown in with the rafting. It was onboard a boat called the Makundi which had two decks. When I boarded I went upstairs and grabbed a table on the top deck with a large group of middle aged and elderly Germans. Pretty soon the Con Tiki crew arrived and most of them were still buzzing with the adrenaline of the rafting. There were about 20 of them and they flocked around the free bar like vultures on a carcass. The cruise went round the biggest island in the river which must have been about 3 kilometres long and 1 kilometer wide. En route we saw some elephants, hippopotamus and some smaller crocodiles. It was interesting but nothing like the cruise on Chobe which was rich in wildlife. As the evening progressed we were served some food and the Con Tiki party got rowdier and noisier with each drink. I think the Germans were fed up with them, but because I felt I knew some of them by now I was not so bothered. But I had sympathy for the Germans who were wanting a sedate, meditative, sunset experience. After the cruise I said my goodbyes to the mostly American and Australian Con Tiki crew and was driven back to Jollyboys Backpackers. My sojourn amongst the flesh pots of Livingstone was over and I was going to be back in the saddle tomorrow on my cycle journey.

Day 050. 28 June. Livingstone Rest Day. 0km. 0 Hours. 0m up. 0m down. Because of my early nights I am always awake by 0600 and up at 0700. And this was the case today despite its being a blank day. The only thing I had to do was extend my stay for 2 nights and book the rafting for tomorrow. I did them before breakfast.

I still had to stock up on cash for the next month as I guessed I would not pass a town like Livingstone again as I was avoiding Lusaka. I also went to the supermarket to stock up on granola and powdered milk. I aimed to have about 3 kilos of it and along with 8 dehydrated meals I had been carrying since Swakopmund they would be my main food as I navigated the smaller roads and villages on the north side of Lake Kariba from Zimba to Chirundu, via Maamba. It is only some 300 km on this deviation but I think it could take 7-9 days depending on the firmness of the dirt roads.

In the afternoon I went to the Livingstone Museum which was about 100 metres from Jollyboys. It had exhibitions on the cradle and spread of man, traditional ethnography of Zambia, the current transition from rural to urban, post independence politics and a section devoted to David Livingstone and his travels. I think the exhibitions were all put together by enthusiastic and knowledgeable students some 20 or 30 years ago and have not been updated since. All the notices and captions were on curled cardboard and the writings all very faded. Still I found the ethnography section and everything about David Livingstone quite fascinating and this alone was worth the modest entry fee. On returning to my room I had another snooze and then dinner before preparing for the rafting pickup tomorrow at 0720 in the morning.

Day 049. 27 June. Livingstone Rest Day. 0km. 0 Hours. 0m up. 0m down. Having been down at Victorian Falls yesterday and suffering a technical malfunction with my camera I came back to Livingstone disappointed. However I managed to fix it so returned after breakfast. I took a taxi down this time not wanting to have my bicycle to worry about. The taxi dropped me off at the entrance to the Avani Resort and then I walked to my chosen location. I spent the next hour taking photos and was very pleased with the results. Packing everything up I managed to flag down a taxi returning to town. The driver, Rainbow, was a Pentecostal Christian, and even by Zambia’s happy, friendly standards Rainbow stood out. In the 20 minutes he took to return he explained a lot about Zambian culture to me. Apparently there are 73 tribes in Zambia each with its own language, although many are similar. So it was decided to make English the National Language. Consequently both the younger and middle generations are not only linguistically adept at English but are also agile in puns, nuances and jokes. In fact I would say Zambians in Livingstone probably speak better English than the English. En route back to the hotel we ran into a traffic jam of cyclists. There were about 25 waiting on the road in each direction. The reason was there was a large herd of Elephants crossing from the riverside up to the bush on the east side. We drove through slowly and there were at least 20 on each side of the road. Those on the river side were tentatively still waiting in the scrub to cross.

257. The Victoria Falls are 1.7 km wide and fall into a 100m deep slot. This slot has a opening on the downstream side leading into a gorge. The falls thunder into this T shaped gash on the plain.

In the afternoon I sat at Jollyboys under the cooler verandah looking onto the pool and caught up with the last two days’ blog. I also had a few perfunctory things to do like get a haircut at a local barbers, have lunch in the local restaurant next to the barbers and take money out of the ATM. Zambia is developing fast and does not have enough electricity to go round so there are frequent power cuts, so less people here use cards for payment and ATMs are few and far between. Cash is king and in the rural areas I would soon be going cash would be the only option.

All in all I had a relaxing, if not lazy afternoon. It was the first time since Rupert’s Eselbe Backpackers in Nata that I had nothing to do and was quite happy to relax. I even had a snooze in the afternoon. One decision I had to make was whether to go rafting or not on the Middle Zambezi River. It is one of the classic rafting rivers of the world and it would be a shame to miss it and have regrets about not doing it, as I had about not cycling through Zimbabwe 2 days ago. So I made the decision to extend my stay here for 2 days and go rafting. The trouble was the river was so high that instead of putting the rafts in at the Boiling Pot below the bridge I think we have to drive down to Rapid Number 14 and put in the deep in the gorge. From rapid 14 I think we go down to number 25 or higher before we climb back out of the gorge for an evening cruise on the Upper Zambezi above the falls.

Day 048. 26 June. Livingstone Rest Day. 30km. 5.5 Hours. 340m up. 340m down. My main aim for today was to see the Victoria Falls, reputed to be the biggest waterfall in the world. After breakfast at Jollyboys I got on my bike and cycled down the road for about 10 kilometres to just before the bridge at the Victoria Falls. The road went through the Mosi-oa-Tunya National Park and there were many warnings about wild animals. I did not see any elephants although there were signs of them everywhere from footprints, trails, broken trees and piles of dung. However, I did come round a corner and was face to face with a large giraffe which would not move. In the end a pick-up came and shielded me as we went past it, but I am sure it could have almost stepped over the pick up truck. I bought my ticket for $20 US and then went into a complex of restaurants and gift shops. At the far end was the entrance to the Avani Resort with a security guard. I gave him a dollar to park my bike inside the resort grounds and next to his booth. I then went through another booth to visit the falls.

248. The large giraffe in the middle of the road would not move and I had to ask a pickup truck to shield me as we passed it.

I had heard there was a lot of spray and when I saw ponchos for hire I thought about it and then thought just how bad can the spray be to warrant a poncho. I was sure it was overkill but hired one anyway. I donned it and walked towards the falls. The falls themselves are 1.7 kilometres wide and in high water form a continuous veil of water crashing down a 100 metre drop into a slot. The slot is also 1.7 kilometres long and 100 metres deep, and is an average of 100 meters wide from the veil of water to the rock wall forming the far side of the slot. Obviously this slot would rapidly fill with water if there was not an exit, which there is, on the downstream side of the slot where the deep Batoka Gorge starts and leads downstream to the east. So viewed from space the waterfall and gorge would look like a T shaped gash on the flat plain. The Zambezi plunges over the top of the T into the slot and then drains down the stem of the T.

249. My first view of the Victoria Falls was the Eastern Cataract. It was quite awesome inspiring and moving to suddenly be face to face with it.

I had already seen some of the spray when cycling down the road and I could hear the falls from a kilometre away but as I followed the path in my poncho I rounded a corner and suddenly saw the eastern edge of them as they poured in a huge white veil into the slot at a place called the Eastern cataract. The water was completely white here, having already gone over small rapids just before this 100 metre drop. It was a phenomenal sight and very moving to see such a truly awe inspiring spectacle. The scale and power of the waterfall was bigger than anything I could have imagined and yet this was just the very eastern edge of it. It was simply enormous.

250. Another view of the Eastern Cataract as it plunged over the precipice for 100 metres into the slot.

In June the river was in its high flow so there was nearly the maximum amount of water cascading over the falls. While this meant the veil of water pouring over the falls was nearly continuous for the whole of the 1.7 kilometre width of the falls it meant there was a lot of spray and mist, and this swirled round the bottom of the slot and then rose up in a huge plume. It was so thick and dense in many places it obscured any view of the falling water just 100 metres away.

As I walked west along the rocky path to other viewpoints I soon came to the Knife Edge Bridge, a walkway across two rocky knolls on the downstream side of the slot. Here the spray and mist was obscuring the powerful section of the cascade on the falls. This mist was rising up into the air like a plume, condensing and then the huge drops were plummeting back to earth in large dense drops which was 2 or 3 times heavier than the heaviest monsoon rain I have ever experienced. Without the poncho I would have been soaked to my underpants in seconds. I kept somewhat dry but my feet and shoes were drenched. After this walkway the path continued westwards with some parts dry and sunny with a great view to the veil of water on the other side, and other parts with heavy mist which rapidly condensed into rain and came crashing down onto the path. Meanwhile unseen in the bottom of the slot was a chaos of spray and foaming water at the bottom of falls which must have been growing rapidly in size as I went west and more cascades joined it. After about 500 metres I got to the end of the path which was where the stem of the T joined the top of the T and could not go any further. Across the other side of the stem of the T the slot continued but I could not reach it from this side. It continued for perhaps another 900 metres and it was all on the Zimbabwe side of the falls. There was a good view of the Victoria Fall Bridge over the Batoka Gorge, just a few hundred metres down the stem of the T. I retraced my steps back past the visible cascades and the drenching showers and returned my essential poncho to the stall.

251. A statue of David Livingstone at the Victoria Falls. He was a much revered person in these parts.

I then went past a statue of David Livingstone, who seemed to be a revered person here in south Zambia, and went to the top of the falls just upstream of where the water crashed over. You could get a good impression of the scale from here too but only for 200 metres until the mist and spray obscured it.

252. Looking at the top of the falls by the Eastern Cataract as the Zambezi was just about to plunge over.

There was one last walk I wanted to do and that was down to the bottom of the Batoka Gorge, just under the bridge and below where the two currents from the top of the T shaped slot met. It was the first pool of the Middle Zambezi (as the river was now known below the falls). The 200 meter descent down to it on some 600 polished and wet stems was quite fascinating as it went through a troop of baboons. They were quite brazen and did not move off the path. I was warned if I had food on display they would accost me for it. Eventually I reached the bottom of the path in a dripping rain forest jungle where it was always wet. Here the trees finished at the waters edge and revealed the Boiling Pot, a huge turbulent cauldron of whirlpools and boils where the enormous Zambezi River flowed into a rockface and changed direction. The eddy it formed was probably the largest and most violent eddy I have ever seen and it was shocking to see the angry chaos of the turbulent water here. I returned past the gauntlet of baboons to the booth and then got my bike from the security guard.

253. One of the brazen baboons on the path who would accost tourists if it suspected the tourist was carrying food.

254. Looking across the Boiling Pot pool which was a violent eddy under the bridge.

I wanted to see if I could get to the Zimbabwe side of the falls and that meant going over the bridge. It was not far to cycle to the immigration who gave me a bridge pass when I said I was going to do a bungee jump. It was just an ink stamp on a scrap of paper. Armed with this I went to the adjacent border post who let me pass onto the bridge. It was 150 years old and built in the UK as part of Cecil Rhodes’ plan to build a railway from Capetown to Cairo. It was still used as a railway bridge and also as a single carriage way for cars and trucks going over one at a time. Occasionally a train went also, either a small freight train or the steam tourist train. I cycled over to the Zimbabwe side and on up the hill to the border post but there was no way I could see the falls from here without getting a $30 visa and paying a $50 entrance fee for their National Park. I returned via the pedestrian walkway on the bridge where half way across was the Bungee jump. I watched as someone hurled themselves off the 100 metre drop over the river and then bounced up and down until they were hauled back up.

255. On the bridge looking south and downstream over the Batoka Gorge where the middle Zambezi flowed in a series of some 30 named rapids

I had seen pretty much all I could but wanted to find somewhere to get some aerial shots. It had to be hidden and surreptitious. I found somewhere but would have to come back tomorrow due to technical problems. So I then returned to Livingstone up through the National Park keeping an eye out for wildlife going down to the river in the early evening. Back at Jollyboys I had a great meal, sorted out the technical problems and went to bed early as I always do now by 2100.

256. There are lots of cyclists in Zambia who use their bikes for work. Their loads made my paniers look paltry.

Day 047. 25 June. Kasane to Livingstone. 79km. 5 Hours. 400m up. 400m down. I was later for breakfast than I would have wanted. Partly my fault for sleeping in and partly the Thebe River Lodge for not being that organised even at 0800. However I ate as much as I could as I did not know when the next meal would be and then eventually set off at 0900. I agonised about which way to take as I had 2 choices both about 80 km with 400 metres of ascent. The first option was the route through Zimbabwe. It was much quieter and went through a National Park where animals, including lions, leopards and elephants could be a hazard. It also involved a border crossing into Zimbabwe which would cost $30 at the minimum and perhaps more if they dug into their barrel of reasons, like carrying pepper spray, a large knife or even a drone. It would be a much nicer way. The other route was through Zambia but it would involve much more traffic, especially trucks and was rumoured to be rather dull. After some 7 km when I reached Kazungula I had already made the decision and turned left instead of right and headed up the ramp towards the large new bridge over the Zambezi River and into Zambia. It felt like it was the weaker option but then in the very, very unlikely circumstances where I found myself surrounded by a pride of lions on the Zimbabwe road with traffic every 15 minutes I would have severely regretted not taking my chances with the trucks instead.

243. The new bridge over the Zambezi River just at the confluence of the Chobe and Zambezi Rivers and the meeting of Namibia, Botswana, Zimbabwe and Zambia.

244. Looking upstream from the bridge to the confluence of the Chobe on the left and the Zambezi on the right

The ramp up to the bridge was easy as there was a pavement at the side. At the top of the curved bridge I could look down and see the forlorn and rusting ferry moored up by the loading jetty. I doubt it would ever be used again now the bridge was here. On the bridge I could look upstream and see the confluence of the Chobe and the Zambezi Rivers. They were both absolutely enormous and virtually went from horizon to horizon. I guess each was 7-800 metres wide where they met. They were not sluggish either with plenty of gentle upwellings as their waters moved downstream under the bridge. On the downstream side of the bridge the combined river was perhaps a kilometre wide and it stretched down to the east until it disappeared beyond the curvature of the earth. This river was the 4th largest in Africa after the Nile, Congo and Niger and it rose in the highlands of Angola. In complete contrast to the scale of the river and the bridge there were a couple of small mokoro, or dugout canoes, fishing off a reed covered island on the Zambian side. About half way across the bridge was the meeting point of 4 countries; Namibia (by virtue of the Caprivi Strip), Botswana, Zambia and Zimbabwe.

245. Despite the modern construction of the bridge and surrounding area there were still some traditional fishermen by the bridge across the Zambezi

I freewheeled down the northside of the bridge and followed the road to a large, clean, well organized customs and immigration complex. It was like a small empty airport. On one side of the hall was the Botswana immigration where I got stamped out of Botswana and then I crossed the hall to the Zambian immigration who stamped me in. It was a quick and easy process, with no visa required and I was out of the hall and back on my bike in 10 minutes. I already noticed how genuinely friendly all the Zambians were here. I cycled north through the small town, also called Kazungula, and then met the larger road, the M10, which went east-west. Livingstone was about 65 km to the east.

It became rural very quickly with much simpler hamlets and compounds than I had seen in Namibia, and nearly all of Botswana. It was much more the Africa I imagined with simple round huts made of sticks and mud blocks and then daubed in mud all under a thatched roof. I don’t suppose the design of this home has changed much in many millennia. There were quite a few huts to one compound, and some smaller ones on posts which were used for food storage. The compounds were also much closer to the road than they had been in Botswana, as if this was a more ancient lane. Virtually every compound had a small stand beside the road where 2-4 sacks of charcoal were stacked up. The sacks were all the same size and were a simple used nylon thread sack with 6-7 sticks around the inside perimeter which extended well beyond the top of the sack. In the space inside the sticks were lumps of charcoal, each the side of a fist. The sacks were bulging with charcoal. Villagers were making more charcopal beside the road in a cottage industry type of way and I guess for many households this was their main form of income. The villagers looked poor and many shouted a greeting and then “give me food, we are hungry”. However, there were lots of waves and warm smiles.

246. The road between Kazungula and Livingstone was narrow as it went through hamlets which had used the adjacent scrun for charcoal. The water ahead is the Zambezi River.

Frequently the hamlets became more concentrated and there was a school. Each school was well advertised with a faded sign and had a school motto. The ideal of the motto was incongruous to the somewhat dilapidated building which formed the school, which looked like it had been built by a worthy NGO, Mission group, or even a Rotary or Lions club and then abandoned. In a few of them there were some children and one at Nakama looked busy and vibrant. The charcoal industry had extracted a heavy price on the forest and bush, and it looked like much of the bush had been cut down and the landscape was now parched and dusty. This might have been because it was the dry season but I think even in the wet season it would not have been lush.

The road was reasonably busy with trucks as it had been in Botswana, however the main carriage way was a bit narrower between the yellow lines and then outside the yellow lines was a narrow tarmac verge, less than a meter wide. Beyond this was a lip and weed covered gravel. It was not a nice road to cycle on and at times I thought I would have been better off taking my chances with the lions on the Zimbabwe side. The truck drivers, and the car drivers to a large extent, thought that they had sole right to the road between the yellow lines and the cyclists, of which there were many now, should stick to the verge. Many did not even bother to pull out and give some space even if there was nothing coming on the other side.

247. The Catholic church in Livingstone is one of many churches from a huge variety of denominations.

After a few ups and downs, one large village I eventually reached the outskirts of Livingstone. There were schools here but they were busy with children in tidy uniforms. There were also churches of every denomination, many with unique names like “The Tabernacle of the Savior Shepherd” After a few kilometres of it getting busier I reached a crossroads which I knew to be the centre of town. I turned right down the quieter road where I could look at my phone. It was quite a good location as I could buy an airtel sim card for my phone and get money out of an ATM. I then found a recommended hotel/hostel/camping place, called Jollyboys. It was just up the street and I was there in 5 minutes and checked in. It was quite a vibrant place and I think it was probably once a favoured overlander backpackers which had now gone slightly upmarket, (as overlanders have done) and morphed into a social meeting point. I met quite a few people that evening who lived and worked in Livingstone, especially in the tourist industry, like microlight pilots or people arranging Zambezi cruises, and they congregated here for a drink at the end of the day. It was interesting, comfortable, not too expensive and was right in the centre of town next to the things I needed like a barbers, the DHL office, an ATM and the David Livingstone Museum. I checked in for 3 nights.

 

Back

June 13, 2025

Day 046. 24 June. Kasane Rest Day. 0km. 0 Hours. 0m up. 0m down. I was up at 0500 to get picked up at 0545 for the Game Drive. The drive was arranged by the Thebe River Lodge so it was all easy and inhouse. Right on cue a specially adapted Toyota Land Cruiser arrived with seating for 9 on the back in three rows of tiered seats. We set off in the dark and I was hoping to see some animals at least. Before we got to the park entrance the driver took a turn down a sandy lane and drove fast across the sand. Someone in the back through we were heading off to see elephants. After a km of the sandy track the driver/guide, called OC, headed off into the bush for a little and wove between some shrubs and then manoeuvred the jeep so the lights shone upon something.

229. On the game drive in Chobe National Park the guide came across a very experienced pride of lions who had taken down a buffalo and feasted all night.

It took me a while to work out what it was, and it was only when OC and the others confirmed it, I knew I was not seeing things. There just 5 metres in front of us were perhaps 7 lionesses tucking into a  buffalo carcass. There was not much left on the bones and most were still knawing on the large ribcage. It was quite a sensational find. OC said he had heard about this kill yesterday and had it confirmed the lions were still here this morning. It was quite a sensational view. There was a lot of snorting, grunting and posturing as the lionesses jostled for position. When they walked about you could see they were full of meat. We had the view pretty much to ourselves for 5 minutes before the news spread to the other drivers and soon there were about 5-6 jeeps jostling for position around us. It took OC quite a while to extricate himself from the gridlock and continue to the park gate.

230. Not long after the lion’s we came across a small herd of giraffes who were grazing the treetops as the sun came up.

At the gate we registered and then got back into the jeep and continued on the main A33 road for perhaps 15 km until we turned off down a very sandy track to the north. OC had got confirmation of another sight. He drove very fast, but well, and the large vehicle almost glided over the sand. We stopped to look at a herd of some 6-7 giraffes who were browsing the tree tops just as the sun was coming up behind them. After watching them for a while we continued down to the shallow wide river valley. Ahead the air was dusty and I assumed it was some low fog from the river. However it was the dust kicked up from the hooves of about 500 buffalo who were walking and grazing as they headed east along the river bank. OC thought they were a breeding herd which might have come from Namibia. There was a total variety of animals from giant bulls slowly striding with their massive heads adorned with huge horns swinging from side to side to young calves tottering along awkwardly on legs which looked like they were made of wood. We parked and they flowed around us like a river and we were a boulder. Apparently this breeding herd would be really difficult for a lion to attack as the bulls would attack the lions and could do some real damage to them. Lions were apparently more likely to attack a bachelor group of bulls where it was more everyone for themselves, rather than all rallying round to protect the calves.

231. We came across a large breeding herd of buffalo which the guide thought had come across the river from Namibia.

As soon as we left the buffalo we ran into another pride of lions. This one had killed an eland a couple of days ago and had devoured most of it. This group was a lot less experienced than the pride that killed the buffalo and consisted of a lot of larger cubs and a few lionesses. The cubs spent a lot of the time wrestling with each other, while a lioness ate. On the surrounding tree there were about 50 vultures waiting for the lions to move off so they could pick over the remains. It was an amazing start to the drive and well beyond anything I expected.

232. We came across a second pride of lions who were feasting on an eland. This pride were not so experienced and contained many cubs, like these two playing.

For the next hour or so we then went down to the edge of the Chobe River and slowly worked our way back east. I did not realize it at the time but this was just a southerly side channel and the main channel was further to the north over a very flat green island called Sedudu Island which gets covered when the floods arrive after the rainy season in the catchment area upstream in Angola. Here, we apparently just missed the lions who had been feasting in the eland coming down to the water’s edge to drink. However we did see a small herd of elephants in the water both drinking and splashing themselves and then they came up the bank to where we were parked and filed by us slowly. There were a number of very small young with them. As we left we passed the buffalo again who were still creating a large dust cloud, and then passed many impala.

233. There were many small herds of elephants scattered in the bush or drinking from the river

234. Looking across the southern channel of the Chobe River to the flat flood prone island of Sedudu.

235. This ekephant was nonchalantly eating the shrub just a few metres from the jeep

Just as we were about to leave the park we came across another cluster of wildlife including waterbuck, greater Kudu, a few more giraffes and an elephant right beside the track who was demolishing a small tree. I noticed he was stripping all the leaves off the twig and discarding them and then just ate the twigs. It was well after 0900 when we reached the tarmac road again after our sandy loop. Once on the tarmac we went back out of the gate and returned to the Thebe River Lodge. The excursion had been beyond my expectations.

236. We saw plenty of more giraffes on the game drive in Chobe National Park.

237. As we were leaving the park we passed a large male Greater Kudu with its distinctive spiral horns .

Back at the lodge I had breakfast which was still being served to those who did the early morning Game Drive and then I returned to my room for a snooze. It turned into a sleep and I did not get up until 1330, just an hour before the next excursion. I did not have lunch as I was still full from breakfast.

The second excursion was called something like the Chobe Sunset Cruise. Again I was picked up at 1445 and then driven some 15 minutes to a jetty area. Initially I was on my own but then a group of 20 arrived from one of the Overland Buses. There were a mix of nationalities but all spoke English. The boat was wide and stable at about 15 metres long and 6 metres wide with a roof and two outboard engines. I guessed this second tour would be hard pushed to match the spectacular of the morning but it tried.

238. On the Chobe River cruise in the late afternoon there were many crocodiles along the banks. This one was 3 metres.

Firstly we went up stream to where the Chobe River was a single channel again after it split to go round Sedudu Island. Here the guide took the southern channel and slowly went up stopping at the various wildlife we encountered. The first was a crocodile, its tail swollen with stored fat. The crocodile was about 3 metres long and would have lived off fish but I am sure it could already take an impala if it came too close to the water’s edge.

As we went up the channel I saw something in a patch of aquatic weeds and thought it was resting hippopotamus. However as we drew nearer I realized it was a large mother elephant, a smaller female elephant and two small baby elephants. The mother was almost fully submerged, and I am not sure if her feet were on the riverbed or if she was floating. She was sweeping the weed with her trunk and bringing large bunches of it into her mouth. The other three elephants, especially the two youngsters, must have been swimming. They occasionally disappeared underwater with just their trunks breaking the surface like a periscope. They looked a little like they were struggling and occasionally tried to clamber onto the large elephants back, but then became confident again and tried to feed themselves and stay afloat.

239. We also passed by a few elephants in deeper water eating aquatic reeds. The two babies were excellent swimmers and were frequently submerged.

We continued up this south channel passing many more elephants, hippopotamus and buffalo and a lot of birds, especially storks and geese. The guide explained that the older buffalo liked it on the island as they were safe from the lions, which would not swim out. The buffalo looked to be mostly old battle scared males who had limps and scratches and had no doubt had their fair share of lion encounters over the years.

240. As the sun began to near the horizon the hippopotamus emerged from the river. Here is a large bull male.

Eventually we got to the west end of the island where the south channel and the main channel initially split. There were a lot of hippopotamus here and they were just beginning to come up onto the land. They would get to the firm bank and then go and forage in the bush for the night. Some might venture 7 kilometres from the river in search of grazing before returning in the morning. In the group we were watching the bull male emerged from the water and scattered his dung around the waters edge marking his territory. He was also battle scared and looked like he had to defend his position and females from time to time. He then plunged into the water again roaring and with his mouth open and the great teeth ready to do some serious damage.

241. There were quite a few older buffalo on Sedudu Island where they could graze without fear of attack by lions.

The sun was now low on the horizon and we started to return. We passed a herd of buffalo on the island as we now went back down the main channel to circumnavigate Sedudu Island. The buffalo here looked content in the evening sun chewing their cud either standing or sitting down. There were a few birds gathering on the backs of the buffalo to pick at any parasite, like ticks, or just peck off the dead skin. The sun set as usual at 1800 in a blaze of colour but once the sun had crossed the horizon it did not take long for darkness to set in and already by 1815 it was too dark to read a paper. At the jetty the others boarded their tour bus while I was driven back in the dark to the lodge just in time for dinner. It had been a sensational wildlife day and I had totally underestimated the quality of the trips and what I might see. It was a fitting end to the 04 Section, NE Botswana as tomorrow I will leave and cross over to Zambia.

242. As usual there sun went down quickly and in a blaze of colour with returning from the Chole River Cruise on the small boat.

Day 045. 23 June. Pandamatenga to Kasane. 102 km. 6.5 Hours. 240m up. 380m down. I was up early for a 0700 breakfast. It was a hearty breakfast and it would have to do me until I reached Kasane in 100 km as there was nothing en route. I left at 0800 but the tail wind of the last couple of days had disappeared. Almost immediately I was into farming country again with vast fields on each side of the road. To the east was wheat and to the west was sorghum. The wheat was being harvested by a couple of combine harvesters side by side such was the pairie-like scale of the farming operation here. After the farm though the there was a slight rise and then I was back into the wilderness with signs saying “Caution Wild Animals”

223. The pairie-like farming operations just to the north of Pandamatenga.

224. A field of sorghum just north of Pandamatenga was completely incongruous with the wild bush of the last few days.

I did not see many animals at all really. Initially there was a large Tawny Eagle. I think they are opportunistic hunters and will take anything small and even scavenge carrion or road kill. Perhaps that is why it was perched on a tree beside the road. The scrub was reasonably scattered here and it would be difficult for an elephant to hide near the road. I saw plenty of signs and there were tracks everywhere but I think most were in the bush now foraging and would not cross the road until dusk approached. A bit further along the road I saw a small herd of zebras who were about to cross and then saw me coming and retreated back into the bush. They ran along beside me, about 100 metres parallel to the road, for about a kilometre.

225. A large Tawny Eagle perched on a tree beside the road looking for an opportunity to hunt or scavenge.

226. These zebra were the only game I saw all day on this 100 km stretch of road which is renowned for its wildlife.

Then the trees suddenly vanished and I was onto an open savannah plain. At last I saw an elephant but it was at least half a kilometre from the road. It was wandering across the savannah and was not eating, but en route to the distant forest or a waterhole. It is not far from the Zimbabwe border here, perhaps just 10 kilometres and the elephants are free to wander across there, where there are reserves and national parks. This savannah plain lasted for about 15 kilometres and then I was back into the scattered bush.

227. In the distance i saw a lone elephant making its way across the savannah towards a waterhole or the scrub forest.

The road was fast to cycle on although it was reasonably busy. The trucks came in convoys with about 4-5 in each and they all gave me plenty of room and often gave a friendly toot on their horns or a flash of their indicators. The verge I was used to for the last couple of days was now very small and I had to be careful when there was traffic coming in the opposite direction and the trucks could not pull over to the other carriage way as much as they would otherwise. All in all though I would commend truck drivers for their thoughtfulness.

The last 30 kilometres were generally fast but as I approached the Zambezi valley there were some long descents but then some vindictive small climbs. They took my momentum away completely and left me struggling to climb them with my legs aching and full of lead. However soon I was on the final run down into the border town of Kazungula. It was a busy town with lots of petrol stations and supermarkets. This was the town where 4 countries; Namibia, Botswana, Zimbabwe and Zambia all met. At the bottom of the hill and down onto the plain beside the Zambezi River was a turnoff to Kasane. It was about 10 kilometres along the road to the west on the south bank of the Chobe River, a tributary of the Zambezi which it joined in Kazungula. Most of the traffic and all of the trucks continued north here into Zambia but I wanted to go to Kasane for a couple of nights to make a touristic foray into Chobe National Park. Kasane was the gateway to Chobe as Maun was to the Okavango Delta.

228. In Kasane there are warning signs for hippopotamus crossing the road as they make their way from the river to graze each night. They can go up to 7 km to graze before returning at dawn.

Initially I wanted to go to the Elephant Trail Backpackers but I think it was all full except for their dormitory beds. When I passed the road up to it I could see it was all uphill for nearly 2 km and I just could not be bothered to enquire so went for plan B which was suggested to me by Franz and Mandy this morning.

Plan B was Thelbe River Lodge and it was a bit further along the south bank of the Chobe River on the road busy with small cars and taxis. I passed some fruit farms and banana plantations and then a road sign warning about crossing hippopotamus to reach the lodge. It was a large lodge which seemed to cater for the overland trucks with 10-15 people in each truck. There were about 4 parked here and their clients were milling around the reception area. The lady at the desk was not unfriendly, but not pleasant, and gave me a room which was really poor value for money. However after 100 km I was tired and wanted a shower and was not going to cycle off and look for somewhere else. They also did the two tours I wanted to take tomorrow from here so that added to the convenience. It was certainly a tourist tour and I am sure it would be quite tame compared to a self drive into the heart of the National Park, but that was not feasible at the moment.

I did meet the owner of the lodge later and asked him a few questions about my route to the Victoria Falls which were about 80 km to the east. He recommended I take the Zambian option rather than the Zimbabwean option as the latter went through the Zambezi National Park where he suggested there would be lots of elephants and possibly lions and leopards. He said if I wanted to go the Zimbabwe way I should really have an escort vehicle. Plus it would mean I would not have to deal with the Zimbabwe customs which are renowned for being eager. I wrote the blog in the evening before supper and then prepared for the 0500 alarm clock as I would be picked up soon after for my game drive early in the day, while the animals were on the move at dawn.

Day 044. 22 June. Pandamatenga Rest Day. 0km. 0 Hours. 0m up. 0m down. I was tired in the morning as I did not sleep well due to inadvertently drinking the caffeine laden drinks last night. However it did not matter as breakfast was when I wanted it so I slept in until 0830. The breakfast was good and the hosts Mandy and Franz looked after me well.

For the rest of the morning I sat in the dining room/bar area under the large cool thatched roof and caught up with the blog. Mandy and Franz went into town leaving me, the cook, the maintenance man, and Zeus the massive Boerboel, to man the fort. Zeus lay out at my feet in a confident relaxed posture as I wrote.

221. During the daytime a herd of about 20 impala wandered out of the bush to the vicinity of the cabins but did not go to the waterhole.

Once I had finished I went for a short walk near the cabins and down to the waterhole to see if I could spot anything. Hidden behind a copse of scrub was a small herd of about 20 impala. luckily they moved slightly into the open to graze on the parched grass as I watched.

I spent most of the afternoon sleeping on the bed in my cabin. It was cool and relaxing and I lay there in a stupor half awake and half asleep until the afternoon was done. I was certainly well rested now. As I went over to the dining room for dinner at sunset Franz pointed out 6 large Roan Antelope who had just emerged from the bush to drink. He explained that after the Eland they were the second biggest antelope and some might be 300 kilos. They did not stay long and looked nervous. I had an opulent dinner and then retired early as I had a long day tomorrow all the way to Kasane which was around 100 kilometres.

222. In the evening, just at sunset, some 6 large Roan Antelope came to drink at the Touch of Africa lodge waterhole

Day 043. 21 June. Telecom mast 85 km North to Pandamatenga. 120km. 8 Hours. 250m up. 170m down. I slept surprisingly well and no wild dogs or lions squeezed under the gate. In my tent most predators would think I was a giant tortoise and not worth investigating, as long they could not see in and providing the the flysheet was on.  I slept right through from 2100 until 0600.  It was easy to get an early start while camping and by 0730 I had finished breakfast which was an entire 400 gram packet of granola and powdered milk. It was cold in the night and my lukewarm water the evening before was now chilled and palatable. I was finally packed and ready to go by 0800. Unlocking the gate and pushing my bike over the elephant protection I made it back to the main road inspecting the track carefully for the omnipresent devil’s thorn seeds,  which were a constant threat of puncture.

215. The elephants had previously pushed over some f the fence around the telecom mast compound, so now it was also protected by a ring of sharp rocks and spikes.

Back on the main road it was not as busy as I feared. The sound of the trucks could be heard a kilometre away and reality there was only one every 3-4 minutes. The road was wide with a good verge, and the trucks were relatively slow. The tarmac was smooth, my tyres were at 40 PSI still and firm and there was a tail wind. At last the planets were aligned so I would be able to average 20 km per hour. Within an hour I made it to the abandoned huts just on the west side of the road. They still looked in remarkable condition but I did not go the 100 metres to investigate for fear of rolling the wheels over thorns. On each side of the road was the endless bush and nothing else. The bush was a little parched and most of the watering holes were dry. There was lots of elephant dung but I did not see any all morning. I made great progress up the road climbing slightly and almost imperceptably until midday when I had already done some 64 km.

216. There were frequent elephant trails and tracks emerging out of the bush with fresh dung, but I did not see any all day.

217. A gentle reminder at all the parking lay byes on the road that wild animals were about. This sign looks like it was used by elephants as a scratching post.

I kept my eyes out for wildlife but saw nothing. The road went past two or three watering holes, one like a small lake, but there was nothing at these either. Although round the perimeter of them there was a lot of dung and footprints. I can only assume that the animals were either away from the road in the bush foraging and would return in the evening to quench their thirst or that there were other watering holes far in the bush and away from the road, which were more preferable.

218. I passed a few watering holes and even this small lake but did not see a single animal all day.

Soon I was approaching 100 km and it was only 1430 in the afternoon. However it was taking its toll. My arms were sore, especially the wrist joints and elbow joints. I think my handle bars could have been 5 cm higher. In theory I could have put the seat down a bit, but it was just right for peddling and I would rather have sore arms than risk injury to my knees. I was also getting chaffed in my groin area and with the sweat it was starting to sting. About 20 km before Pandamatenga the road reached a large cattle grid and I cycled over it into a totally different landscape. There was no more bush with the threat of wild animals about to leap out of it, but now I was into farming land with huge flat fields full of sorghum. The fields were vast and this was farming on an industrial scale which one might find in the mid west of the USA or Ukraine.

219. About 20 km south of Pandamatenga I passed a large cattle grid separating the wild bush from organized farming where these large fields of sorghum flourished.

I also reached the section where the road was being widened. The road rollers had packed an earth and aggregate track beside the current carriageway and it was firm and great for cycling on. Occasionally it was covered in a thin layer of bitumen with rocks on it to prevent traffic going on it but I could weave between the rocks. I passed by a large army barracks and then entered Pandamatenga. It was a spread out town but had a tangible centre which was dominated by huge grain silos. This was where all the sorghum ended up before being transported south on the many grain carrier trucks passing me. There was also a large parking area here for all the trucks where many probably spent the night. Currently there were over 100 parked up along the wide dusty verge, 3 or 4 deep. My main interest in Pandamatenga though was the supermarket. I was parched when I arrived although I still had a bottle of old warm water with unpalatable bits suspended in it. It was no match for some cold sodas and an icecream though.

220. The bar and dining area of A Touch of Africa Lodge was a relaxing place to have a day off physically recovering and catching up with the blog.

There were a surprising amount of white farmers in the carpark and I asked one of them about a place to stay. They recommended a Touch of Africa, a lodge which had camping spaces some 6 km further north. It was the one I had already bookmarked so it was good to have the confirmation. It was a quick half hour cycle to get there and I reached it in the heat of the afternoon. It was run by Franz, a retired Austrian hunter and his wife Mandy, a South African. They gave me a lovely thatched lodge overlooking a waterhole where game was rumoured to come. There was the main restaurant and bar area which was also thatched. The only issue I had initially was the dog. I was the largest and most ferocious looking dog I had ever seen. It was a 90 kg Boerboel, which was extremely muscular and with an enormous head. The dog would have eaten a couple of drug dealers XL Bullies for breakfast and perhaps a lion for dinner. However, the gargantuan canine had been well socialized, knew its subordinate position and was well behaved. I had a great shower and then one of the infamous burgers before deciding to have an extra day here. I was tired and needed to rest and I also needed to catch up a bit with the blog tomorrow. I did not sleep that well as I made the mistake of buying two energy drinks at the supermarket which were loaded with caffeine.

Day 042. 20 June. Nata to Telecom mast 85 km North. 85 km. 6 Hours. 190m up. 120m down. My tyres were still good in the morning so it looked like the problem was solved for the time being and I would be able to move on up to Kasane and Livingstone. Rubert made me the usual sumptuous full breakfast and by the time I had that and said my goodbyes to the team and other guests it was already 0930. I did not really have a plan but there were a few options every 15 to 20 kilometres as I headed north. The one thing I did need was one of these options. It would have been foolhardy to camp beside the road, a little in the bush as there were quite a few wild animals about on this next stretch. Most notably there were elephants and they were abundant over the next 300 km. After all, the road between Nata and Kasane was called the “Elephant Highway”. However there were also rumoured to be wild dogs and lions. So a secure camp was necessary.

209. The open savannah just north of Nata was initially open until the scrub started to appear.

Once on the main road north, The A33, I was delighted to see that there were road works to widen the road. I knew there was a little from my last foray up here until the punctures forced me back, but now I could follow them on one side or the other of the road for the best part of 20 km without going on the main carriage way. The packed earth which had been steamrolled was as good as smooth tarmac and I made good time. Even if I had not been on the newly constructed verges the road was not that busy with trucks and vehicles.

208. Some of the termite mounds on the flat open savannah with limited bush were 3 metres high.

Eventually the packed earth verges finished and I was forced back on the main carriageway, but there was a wide verge of nearly 2 metres width and this was separated from the main carriageway with a yellow line and a row of cat’s eyes. The trucks were not that plentiful and they were not going that fast either. Perhaps they were wary of the elephants. Each side of the road there was initially wild open savannah stretching to the horizon, golden and shimmering in the heat. However after some 30 km since leaving Nata the bush slowly started to appear and then it became quite dense. I knew there were some elephant watering holes near the road along here and kept my eyes peeled for them but I did not see any. There were plenty of signs though, most notable the large tracks across the road and into the bush on each side and elephant dung everywhere. After about 45 km I got to the turn off to Elephant Sands Lodge and Campsite. However, it was down a very sandy track for 2 km and it was likely I would have to push the bike the whole way there and out again tomorrow. Despite the likelihood of seeing elephants come to the watering hole at Elephant Sands I decided to skip it, especially as it was just after midday.

My next option was another 10 km and it was the Veterinary Fence to keep foot and mouth out of Central and southern Botswana. I reached it at the same time as a large convoy of trucks but then overtook them all as they waited. I was flagged through as there were not real controls going north; however there were coming south. Just after this control were a number of shacks selling cold sodas and biscuits. I stopped at one and had something but there were no cooked snacks. It was still just 1330 when I finished so I decided on the next option which was a Telecoms mast in another 30-35 km.

210. My lunch stop at one of the small shacks by the veterinary fence which sold non perishable items only.

211. Just north of the Veterinery fence I started to see more wildlife animals like these zebras.

It seemed a bit wilder now on the north side of the Veterinery fence and it did not take long before I saw a few zebras in the scrub, but still no elephants despite all the signs. Then in about a kilometre I saw the unmistakable sight of one beside the road. It was huge even from here. There was very little traffic and I covered the distance in a few minutes and was suddenly 200 metres from the elephant who continued to graze right beside the road. There was no way I could get past without risking a charge so I waited and waited. Eventually after 5 minutes a convoy of 4×4 came the other way heading south. They slowed for the elephant but continued and the elephant was unmoved. Usually they are afraid of traffic and run back to the bush, but not this one.

212. The first elephant of the day was grazing at the side of the road and was unperturbed by traffic. I had to have a 4×4 escort me past it.

At last a 4×4 came going my way and I flagged it down. The driver I think just wanted to blast past the elephant but agreed to drive between me and the beast. The road was quiet so we both crossed over to the other side. I could see the driver was nervous and had the elephant charged, I am sure he would have sped off leaving me in the lurch. It didn’t charge but there was a lot of ear waving. Soon we were both past. In the next 30 km I saw another two elephants attempting to cross the road but traffic came by just at the right time and they remained on the edge of the bush waiting for another chance, wary of the trucks. I don’t think they would have seen me as a threat but I was just 40 metres away as I passed.

213. The third elephant of the day was very wary of traffic and was about to cross in front of me when a 4×4 appeared and then it fled back into the bush.

The telecom tower I was aiming for soon appeared some 5 km away and it took no time to get there. The head wind of the last month was more of a neutral side wind now and the road surface was good and the tyres at 40 PSI rolled smoothly over it. It was just 1530 when I got there so I decided to check it out. I had heard the perimeter fence was damaged, according to my app called “ioverlander” I parked the bike at the edge of the road and walked the 100 metres up the sandy track checking for thorns as I went. The fence had been damaged but it was now repaired in a fashion. However, right round the perimeter of the compound was the most vicious elephant defence of concrete with sharp stone sticking out of it and also a grid work of iron with spikes in it. The latter was like an upside down agricultural harrow and it would not be possible for an elephant to cross it. I returned to my bike and wheeled it back to the compound. The only issue I noticed was there was a 50 cm gap under one of the gates which perhaps a predator might wiggle under, but it was unlikely I thought and they would still have to cross the harrow spikes.

214. My camp in the fenced compound 85 km north of Nata. The gate was open on arrival and I secured it with my bike lock once inside.

I had my tent up quite quickly and then ate cold dinner out of tins; pilchards, backed beans and fruit salad to be precise. I still had 3 litres of water for tomorrow which would hopefully take me the 115 km to the village of Pandamatenga where I hoped to stay.  If I had not stayed at this telecom mast the next option was a cluster of abandoned cabins a further 20 km. Apparently they were still clean and with roofs but only one had a door and that was last year’s report. After the hermetic dinner I wrote the blog and finished around 2000.

Day 041. 19 June. Nata Rest Day. 0 km. 0 hours. 0m up. 0m down. I had a great lie in as I knew I had nothing to do today. After the usual tasty full breakfast Rupert got a phone call to say the package had arrived and was ready to pick up. Half an hour later I had everything I needed to get back on the road.

I took the wheels off the bike and then the tyres of the rims and cleaned everything up. I had already cleaned them a week ago in Gweta so there was not much to do. Once clean I put the rims back on and had great difficulty in getting a seal to pump the tyre up. Eventually it started to inflate using my electronic pump and soon I had enough pressure in them so the tyres pressed against the rims and they were “seated”. I then removed the core of the valves and injected the latex liquid, about 130ml, into each tyre and blew them up again to 30 PSI. There were a few leaks but as I spun the tyre the latex liquid found the leaks and bubbled out. As it bubbled out it reacted with the air and solidified in the leak,  thereby sealing it. I let the tyres be all afternoon spinning them from time to time to distribute the latex liquid and was delighted to see they held their pressure. I then put them up to 40 PSI and they still held their pressure.

The punctures were solved for the short term and I should be able to get to Livingstone now. In the meantime Fiona had had great success at the main DHL Express depot on the outskirts of Edinburgh and the parcel with the new puncture resistant tyres was dispatched with all the customs forms in order and DHL promising to facilitate it through Zambian customs, which could still be a banana skin.

That evening more guests arrived and Rupert made another great meal. That he prepared this sensational rice and curried goat in a spinach sauce on a couple of gas rings is impressive. Two of the guests were Ricus and Pietro Delporte who were South Africans moving up to Malawi for 6 months until the weather at their other house in Knysna improved. They had worked and travelled all over Africa and were incredibly well informed and experienced. Ricus was articulate, assertive and knowledgeable but was not a know-all by any means and a joy to discuss things with and listen to. They were the most interesting people of many interesting people I met round Ruperts camp fire. They also invited me to stay in Malawi at their lodge, which I was planning to go past anyway. I had really enjoyed my stay at Eselbe Backpackers and was indebted to Rupert for his hospitality and help, but after 3 days here I was now ready to move on.

Day 040. 18 June. Nata 7 km up road and return. 14 km. 2 hours. 110m up. 110m down. After a very relaxing day at the bohemian and inspiring Eselbe Backpackers as the guest of Rupert I was ready to set off after a great breakfast which he made. I half cycled and half pushed the bike the half kilometre up the sandy lane from the rivers edge to the main road and then started the cycle up the road. The road was being widened and there was a long stretch of newly finished road with rocks on it to stop drivers going on it. However I could simply cycle between the rocks very easily,  and did so.

However I noticed that my tyres were deflating and eventually stopped. I had inner tubes in them but I think both had thorns in them. It took me well over an hour to change the tube at the back and patch the tube at the front and I was ready to set off again when I noticed the tyre at the front was still deflating. I must have had two punctures. I thought this is a hopeless situation and I cannot limp up the road repairing punctures every 10-15 kilometres. I knew I was vulnerable to punctures as the tyres I had did not have any embedded protection in them and were primarily designed to be tubeless. I decided it best to return to Eselbe Backpackers and sort something out. I pumped up the tyre again and it just got me back. Everyone was surprised to see me.

I made a few phone calls back to the UK just to make sure the new tyres I ordered were in hand and to find out about freight. In the meantime Rupert made a call to Cycle Base in Gaberone to see what they had. Rupert discovered they had the latex liquid to put in the tubeless tires I had on and also that they had inner tubes with valves with removable cores so I could also put the latex liquid in the inner tube if need be. We ordered some and were assured it would be sent when the money transfer was made.

Rupert then spent hours on the phone to his bank to try and make the transfer. He had a frustrating fruitless time of it and we eventually had to go into his bank to sort it out. However, the transfer was done and the goods were put on the night bus. I was very indebted to Rupert for all the hassle he had on my behalf.  Meanwhile back in Edinburgh Fiona had received all the new tyres and inner tubes to send and had researched the best way to get them to Zambia. There was not much more to do except wait.

207. The large communal dining table and fire pit beyond it were the social hub of Rupert’s backpackers.

As usual there was a great meal that night and then everyone sat round the fire discussing virtually every topic on Wikipedia. The ambience was superb. While Rupert’s Eselbe Backpackers is quite rustic and everything just about works, with his cooking and the evening’s conversation round the fire after the meal there is the potential for Eselbe Backpackers to become legendary.

Day 039. 17 June. Nata Rest Day. 0 km. 0 hours. 0m up. 0m down. I had a great lie in and got up when the sun had chased off the chilly morning. Rupert the host at Eselbe Backpackers made me a great breakfast with real coffee. Most of the guests were leaving including the very nice French couple. However I would probably see them again about Livingstone in a week’s time.

Once everyone had gone I went into the quiet bar area where there was a table and wrote for a couple of hours. It was very relaxing with virtually no disturbance or sounds save for the doves. By midday I was done so I then went for a snooze on the hammock. It was lovely to have nothing to do for the afternoon as previously virtually all my time was spent either cycling, camping or trying to keep up with the blog.

206. On my very relaxing day off at Eselbe Backpackers in went for a short paddle on the Nata River having been assured thw were no crocodiles in the remnant of the river which had no flow in this dry season.

Once I woke I went for a small paddle on the river in one of the old canoes Rupert had. This part of the Nata River still had about a kilometre of water in it and it was about 2 metres deep at the most. There was no inlet or outlet of this long channel at the moment but it would return in the rainy season when the river would form and flow south again. I was assured by Rupert there were no crocodiles in this long pond and he regularly paddled here.

In the evening he made another fine meal and there were only 5 of us at the meal. In the evening we sat round the fire again and chatted until it was quite late. Rupert had a wealth of knowledge about the area and the wild road north from here to Kasane so I picked his brains on it. I had really enjoyed the peace and quiet of his rustic lodge.

Day 038. 16 June. Zoronga to Nata. 45 km. 4 hours. 30m up. 40m down. I slept well and long, and was up at 0630, as the first glimmer of light was appearing in the east. The cockerels had long been awake but now the hens too started foraging nearby, clucking away as I packed. I was ready by 0730 and set off down a series of sandy tracks to the tarmac road which was the artery of the village. Many children were also emerging from the lanes and heading to school in the smart green uniforms. They were vibrant and lively in stark contrast to the younger women at the shop yesterday obsessing about their hair extensions. Once on the tarmac road in the village I cycled up past the shop and onto the main A3 road. It was just over 40 km to Nata now.

There was no breeze for a welcome change and I made quick time. It did not take long before I found a rhythm and was making good time on the empty road. I passed a sign saying “slow down severe potholes”. I thought nothing of it as I generally welcomed them as it slowed the vehicles to a crawl while I could weave in and out of them.

200. The road between Zoronga and Nata was usually fine but for 3-4 sections each of about kilometer the tarmac was destroyed and people preferred the verge

However in this case the entire road had disappeared. There were some thin strips of tarmac for a few tens of metres and then they ended in a lip before another strip started. Most drivers simply abandoned the road and moved onto the verge which was graded, but somewhat rutted. It was a difficult choice for me to either persevere on the destroyed tarmac road or risk the sometimes sandy ruts on the verge. The road was often the least of two evils. There were perhaps 4 sections of this destroyed road and each section was about a kilometre long. I think they were in the process of building a new road adjacent to this road I was on and they had pretty much given up with any maintenance of the original road, assuming the traffic would cope until the new road became operational in a year or five.

201. Near Zoronga the landscape was covered in a sparce forest with well cropped grass underneath. There were hamlets and homesteads hidden in these forests some 200 metres from the road.

Beside the road the landscape continued to vary with either sparse forest and exhausted grazing underneath and then homesteads just visible through the trees away from the road in the forest, or open savannah which stretched far into the distance beyond the curvature of the earth. There was some livestock grazing here but most I saw were clustered around a few water holes near the road. The livestock were again a mixture of cattle and horses with about half and half of each. At a few of these water holes there were flamingos, either resting on one leg or slowly wading through the shallow water while filtering with their beaks. I had heard from many people that the larger salt pans which were currently flooded were currently full of flamingos.

202. There were many salt pans which had dried out but a few still had water like this one with livestock and flamingos.

I stopped for a rest and to eat a snack of dried noodles and biltong. When I did this a 4×4 usually stopped to enquire if everything was OK. Before long one stopped with a charming young French couple. We chatted for about 10 minutes and they gave me a delicious packet of biscuits. We discovered we were both heading to the same backpackers in Nata. They told me they had just seen a large male lion crossing the road about 60 kilometers back towards Maun. It was exactly in the place where I had seen the large herds of unfenced livestock yesterday. They showed me a video and it was clear the lion had just fed as its stomach was full. I am sure this lion was living on borrowed time before the herding or grazing committee contracted a hunter to put it down as it would continue to kill livestock now.

203. Between the salt pans the landscape was open veldt with golden grasses flowing in the breezes

Once they left I had about another 20 kilometres to go to reach Nata and without the head wind it went quickly. As I entered the town I got to a T junction with a larger road which went up the east side of Botswana from south to north. It was the A33 and it was another route from Central Southern African countries like Zambia and Congo to the coast at Durban and Port Elizabeth. I would have to follow it for 300 km in the next week from Nata to Kasane up the so-called “Elephant Highway”. I followed the road for about 2 km to the north and then headed east down a sandy lane to Eselbe Backpackers.

204. The bar and dining area at Eselbe Backpackers was the meeting place for younger travellers on independent overland trips.

It was only about 400 metres down the lane but I had to push the bike half the distance due to the sand. When I reached the backpackers it was even more Bohemian and relaxed than I imagined. It was owned and run by Rupert, a Brit with a long family history in Botswana and Swaziland. There were perhaps 10 various buildings, all of wood and bamboo. Some were the bar and kitchen and others were the small huts which were bedrooms. There was a large outside table under a huge canvas awning. The French couple who gave me the wafers, Pauline and Damien, were already here and so were about another 8 overland travellers in their 20’s. It was outside of the cut and thrust of Nata but I suspect there was nothing to entice me into downtown Nata except the supermarket to stock up. Rupert showed me a bamboo hut with an attached bathroom and shower and I unpacked the bike. The room had everything I needed and outside there was plenty of chat with the relaxed group. Later in the afternoon Rupert ran Emelia, another French guest, and myself into the supermarket for some supplies. He also bought the ingredients for himself to make lasagne for us that evening.

205. One end of my room at Eselbe Backpackers in Nata with the semi outdoor bathroom.

The backpackers was right beside the Nata River which was still full of water but not really flowing anywhere. It was almost like a large long pool which still existed while the river had stopped flowing. Contrary to my intuition the river flowed from the north to the south through the town of Nata and onto the salt pans. There it spread out to form the seasonal lakes which then evaporated in the dry season.

In the evening Rupert made a large lasagne to feed about 6 people while a few of the others made their own dinner and we all sat around the large table and ate together. Once the meal was done the fire was lit and everybody gravitated towards it, sitting round it. Without the breeze the smoke went straight up so there was no one having to endure smoke in their eyes. I was a little distracted in the evening trying to get some replacement Schwalbe tyres with some puncture protection as the current tyres I have on the bike have none and I feel quite vulnerable especially when cycling near thorns or over broken glass.

Day 037. 15 June. Gweta to Zoronga. 64 km. 6 hours. 140m up. 150m down. In the morning the tyre was flat. The sealant had failed to seal the hole. I tried blowing it up again to no avail so decided to take it off and put a tube in the tyre. On inspection all the sealant was either dried up or had been expelled by various punctures. It did not take long to put the tube in as it was the front wheel and I pumped it up to 35 PSI and it was taut, but with enough flex to act as a shock absorber. I paid the bill and left at 0930. As I cycled through the village on this Sunday morning it seemed quite a few people were going to church. They were well dressed and seemed to be the friendliest in the community as all smiled and waved as I went past. I passed the giant baobab tree, which was perhaps 25-30 metres on second thoughts and then reached the main road by the petrol stations. I cycled along it for about 5 km until I reached the turn off for Planet Boabab, a 3 star lodge.

193. There were lots of large baobab trees around Gweta, especially near a lodge called Planet Baobab.

The lodge was a short kilometre down the track. Dotted amongst the savannah scrub here were more enormous Baobab trees. It was not so much their height which amazed me but their huge girth. However, at the lodge there were a few gigantic ones and one especially right at the lodge which must have been 7-8 metres in diameter. I guess this tree was at least 500 years old and probably a lot more. There were perhaps 20 giant trees here but this was the most impressive. The lodge had built a bar right under it thinking that would be cool, but I found it lacking taste and a bit disrespectful. I chatted with a very nice UK couple here before having a second look at the trees. If trees could talk they would have some story to tell. Possibly from a time when humans did not live in the area.

194. One of the largest was right beside the lodge and must have been 7 metres in diameter. It was a behemoth.

I did not return to the main road straight away but continued on a gravel road to the east for about 5 km. It was a lovely quiet cycle through scattered homesteads in the sparse forest. I have noticed that a lot of the homesteads are not beside the main road as one would expect but are perhaps 200-400 metres off the road and not visible from the road. Here surrounded by a perimeter fence of branches as posts and wire lies a large compound with maize growing in it and then the inner compound with 3 or 4 huts, often with thatched roofs and a corral where the livestock spend the night. On this small gravel road I was much closer to these homesteads and frequently passed people who were much more friendly than their counterparts in villages and frequently waved. It was not as quick as the tarmac road but much more interesting.

195. The were lots of subsistence homesteads beside the smaller road near Gweta. Many have maize fields.

Eventually the two roads merged and I was back on the tarmac but now I entered a region which was bereft of trees and was a vast area of savannah grass with extensive salt pans in between. These salt pans were quite natural and occurred because the rains of the last millennia collected in these barely discernible depressions on the landscape and then evaporated over the dry season leaving a mineral residue which has accumulated. They were bare areas of white deposits where nothing grew. I passed a few smaller ones of perhaps a square kilometre or two but I knew from the map there were much larger ones which were hundreds of square kilometres just beyond the horizon like the Ntwetwe Pan, The Nxai Pan and the Sowa Pan. My initial plan had been to cycle across one of these on 4×4 tracks, but because there was so much rain in the recent rainy season many of the pans were still covered in water or still marshy with a muddy clay like silt which would be a nightmare to push a bike through.

196. Half way between Gweta and Zoronga were huge salt pans which must now fill after a very wet rainy season. Perhaps once a decade in this climate era.

Between the small pans I passed beside the tarmac road were the extensive veldt-like grasslands with golden grasses. They were excellent grazing and there were large herds of cattle and horses scattered across them. There were no fences and the livestock were free to wander. I thought there can’t be lions here as they would have a field day with all this easy prey at their disposal.

197. Between the salt pans on each side of the road was savannah grasslands which was being grazed by large mixed herds of cattle and horse

As I cycled across this area of smaller salt pans and open savannah I realized I had little hope of reaching Nata that evening. It was mid afternoon and I still had 50 km to go, although the easterly headwind was diminishing as it did most afternoons. I had two options, one was a telecoms mast just before Zoronga and the other was Zoronga village itself just a bit further, leaving just 40 km to do the next day to reach Nata. I had enough water for the telecoms tower but they were quite soulless, perfunctory places to campsite so I decided to continue to the village where there was a small shop where I could buy something and ask about somewhere to pitch a tent as I have done in Phudukudu.

198. The neighbouring compound at Zoronga next to the absent policeman’s house where I was allowed to camp.

I reached the village and took the side road into it and soon found the shop. There were a few young women hanging around the shop and working in the shop and they all seemed totally disinterested, with a lot of shoulder shrugging to every question. Of the 5-6 of them, half were putting hair extensions in each other’s hair and they only said “give me money”. Eventually one woman said “try next door” but there was no next door. When I queried this she said “try the police at the end of the road”. So I set off into the spreadout heart of the village. Eventually after some 5 attempts and nearly at the point of giving up and returning to the tarmac road out of frustration, I found a grandmother who pointed me to a sandy track leading to a cluster of houses. There another grandmother found a neighbour of the policeman, who said he was away. However he made a call to the policeman who gave me permission to camp in his compound. It was perhaps 1700 now so I had the tent up beside his house and had eaten by nightfall. I went into the tent as all around me the evening fires in the compounds around me flickered and the evening air had the aroma of woodsmoke. I wrote a little but was asleep by 2000 and slept well.

199. My tent next to the policeman’s house in Zoronga. He was away but told a neighbour I could camp there.

Day 036. 14 June. Phuduhudu to Gweta. 81 km. 8 hours. 230m up. 230m down. I slept well on the verandah of the community hall and was content to be amongst the fire fighting crew who were all very helpful. After the indifference of the Botswanans I met on the first 3 days in the country I got a completely false impression of them and that has now completely changed. I now find them competent, helpful, good drivers and cheerful. I was up before anyone else and had a disgusting breakfast of corn beef out of a tin and some bread. I had forgotten just how putrid corned beef was as it was about 3 or 4 decades since I last had some. I was packed up and ready to go by 0800 as the others were rising. I went to see the foreman who sanctioned my stay yesterday and gave him 200 Pula, or about £10, to either buy the team some soft drinks that evening or give it to the Phuduhudu community as he felt fit. It was graciously received. They waved me off from the compound and I cycled through the empty lanes just coming to life and returned to the main road.

The headwind hit me with a vindictive force as soon as I was out of the shelter of the village trees. I guess it was a force 5 and right into my face. I was struggling to get much more than 10 km per hour and if I pushed harder I could feel my right knee ligaments straining. It was going to be a long day. After an hour or so I saw 4 zebras running down the road towards me. When they saw me they bolted into the bush. As I was looking for them I saw two giraffes some 200 metres away. They were both very alert and looking straight at me. Either they have very good senses and saw me on their own or were alerted by the zebra as I think the two animals have a symbiotic alert reciprocity.

187. I saw a couple of giraffes on the south side of the road about 10 east of Phuduhudu.

There was not much to say about the next hour as I ground into the wind. The grasses at the side of the road were being buffeted by it and I felt progress was slow and at a cost. About an hour later I passed a larger herd of zebras. They were grazing on the wide verge but when they saw me they became unnerved and started to run in the same direction I was going but just inside the edge of the bush. They ran for about a kilometer pausing just to let me catch up. I could hear their hoofs pounding the ground.

188. About 20 km east of Phuduhudu i came across another herd of zebra with About 50 animals in total.

Soon the vegetation changed and the taller scrub gave way to shorter scrub and then this too almost disappeared leaving just wide open grassland savannah. There was no hiding here and any zebras or giraffe would have been visible for a kilometre and an elephant 2 kilometres. But I could see nothing and all the animal tracks which came out of the bush on each side of the road disappeared. It was only after 20 km when the bush started to get a bit thicker again did I see a flock of about 40 ostriches, just before the end of the park. As I was watching them a police pick up appeared and wound down the window. “Do you remember me?” said the passenger with a bright smile and gleaming teeth. It was the police woman from 2 nights ago when I encountered the elephants. We chatted for 5 minutes before she headed off back to Maun.

189. As I cycled east further into the Makgadigadi National Park the bush almost dissapeared and there was just scattered scrub rising out of the endless savannah grasses.

?After the park I was suddenly back in cattle country and I was quite surprised to see them. There were rumoured to be lions in Makgadikgadi National Park and this did play on my mind a bit, but now there were cattle, goats and donkeys about I was off the menu. Their farms were small and almost subsistence level I think. The going was still slow despite the wind dropping as it often did in the afternoon. Then I noticed my front tire was very flat. I stopped to blow it up but it had a hole in it and the sealant was bubbling through and would not seal the gap. I pumped it to 35 PSI from the 10 it was at, and set off. I was going much faster now and perhaps I had been running this tire under pressure for a while and was blaming the laborious progress on the wind which had largely disappeared now, while it was actually the tire all along.

190. Just on the eastern edge of the Makgadikgadi National Park I saw a flock of about 40 ostriches.

My joy was short lived as I had to stop and blow the tire up again after 5 km. I could feel the air escaping as it blew onto my cheek as I operated the battery pump. I had to do this about 6-7 times in all and the hole was just simply not sealing. There was still sealant in the tire as it was bubbling out. I was starting to curse the idea of tubeless tires. When working they are great but in a crisis like this they are useless and inevitably I will have to put a tube in this front tire too. I will then have both front and back on tubes and only the outer tire to protect them from the thorns on the verge and the copious amount of broken glass along the road. A puncture resistant outer tire like a Schwalbe Marathon Plus would have been better as it had a 5mm thick strip of kevlar embedded in the tyre’s circumference. I limped down the road to the turn off to Gweta and then down the 2 km access road.

191. On the outskirts of the large village of Gweta i saw this enormous Boabab tree which was about 35 metres high and the biggest Boabab i have seen.

On the access road I passed a huge Boabab tree. Its swollen trunk must have had a diameter of 3-4 meters or so and the tree had a height of 35 metres. It was an enormous specimen and must have been very old and venerable. It has overseen many generations of humans. When I got into the larger village it was easy to find the lodge. They had space for me but were busy with a large group with about 20 Chinese. I got a small roundavel style round hut with a thatched roof. It was quite cramped inside but had all I needed. On the outside was an area enclosed with a 2.5 metre wall which was the bathroom, with toilet, sink and shower, and the trees above. I had a shower and washed my clothes and also washed the back tire I took off yesterday to get rid of all the water soluble latex on it. I did this as I would probably have to use it tomorrow morning if the front tyre did not seal overnight. After that I went over to the quite chaotic buffet which was dished out rather than self service. I had to be quite assertive to get a good portion and then get cutlery from the limited supply. The Gweta Lodge has potential to return to a former glory but at the moment most things were a bit haphazard or broken and it was almost the same price as the considerably better Maun Lodge. Still I was grateful for a bed after 2 nights camping.

192. The quirky but slightly chaotic and ramshackle Gweta lodge had a tiny rondavel type room for me with an outdoor bathroom behind the wall on the left.

Day 035. 13 June. Motopi Telecom Mast to Phuduhudu. 45 km. 5 hours. 110m up. 110m down. It rained a little in the night which was a surprise, however I slept well and woke early. In the morning the tyre was flat so I decided to change the tubeless to one with an inner tube. The whole procedure took about an hour. There was no liquid latex left in the tyre. It had all either leaked out or just dried up in the heat. It meant whenever I got a new puncture there was nothing to seal it. In retrospect I had no choice but to switch to an inner tube. In the next few days I will have to get a replacement organised. Elias left first heading towards Maun while I headed east into the land of the elephants and into the strong wind.

177. The large female was guarding the back left of the procession helping a matriarch bring up the rear.

Once I left the security compound and was back on the main road I was aghast at just how strong the wind was. Elias would have an easy day while I had to struggle at 10 km per hour. I retraced my route of last night past Leopard Plains Lodge and on to where the two elephants were last night. There were none now but I soon saw a single one in the bush on the south side.

A bit later I saw another, possibly a smaller female. Then behind here I saw a small procession of elephants heading east. There was a side road here up to a raised area and I took it to get a better view, I could now see there were at least 25 in the procession of all shapes and sizes. The smaller female was marking the back left of the procession while there was a large matriarch at the back. As the procession passed a dusty area they all stopped and flung an arc of dust over their backs. There must have also been a big matriarch at the front also but I did not see her. I watched for a good 20 minutes as the whole herd moved through the bush on the other side of the road. The younger female guarding the back nearest the road knew where I was and what cars were approaching the whole time. It was a tremendous privilege to watch them heading through the bush towards greener pastures.

178. I had already seen about 20 elephants that morning so expected to see even more now i was entering the National Park.

I left as the herd moved off and returned to the road. There were another two sightings of single elephants right on the verge. I think they were drinking from a leaking pipeline which went along the south side of the road. After these two I continued east for another couple of kilometres into the wind and then came across 4 large elephants near a leak in the water pipe. They were close to the road and had I cycled past they would have been just 30 metres away. Way too close to call. So I stopped some 100 metres away to wait for a vehicle. There were none for about 10 minutes. It was great watching these elephants as such close quarters for this time, completely alone with them. Then a 4×4 arrived and I flagged it down and explained to the Botswanian driver I needed him to drive slowly for 200 metres while I used his vehicle as a shield. He was very obliging. Once past he drove off and I observed the elephants for another few minutes. They were truly enormous.

179. I got to these 4 large elephants and thought it would be foolhardy to squeeze past so spent 10 minutes observing them until a car arrive to escort me past

180. Up close the 4 elephants were quite daunting and very large.

I was making heavy weather of the kilometres in this headwind and with the animal viewing breaks was doing less than 10 km per hour. I then decided to see if I could find somewhere in Phuduhudu village rather than go another 40 km after that to another telecoms mast. I did not want to get caught out in the dusk in elephant alley. I had heard that the area I was going into now, the Makgadikgadi National Park was full of zebras at this time of year and right on cue I ran into a herd of about 300 crossing the road. As I was watching them an elephant also crossed right in front of me. I think the elephants are generally quite passive, but if there are young, or a male is in musk then they can be unpredictable. I had to wait for about 10 minutes to allow for all the zebras to cross. I peddled on for another 10 minutes and then came across another large herd with 300 animals. They were unnerved by the bike and ran parallel to the road for a good kilometre with me cycling beside them.

182. Waiting for a large herd of about 300 zebra to cross the road. There was another herd of 300 just beyond

183. Some of the zebra. They were not wary of cars and lorries but very nervous of me and bolted soon afterwards.

Soon afterwards the road veered to the north near a telecoms mast and then reached the village of Phuduhudu. I knew there was a shop here but it was off the main road. I asked a few people and they directed me into a grid of wide dusty lanes. The houses here were well kept and there were some enormous parkland type trees dotted about. It had a nice ambience. The shop was closed for the afternoon but a team of kids soon discovered me and came over excitedly. They were easy and delightful and quite happy to practice English. There was a building next to the shop with perhaps 10 green tents outside it. I went over to ask if I could stay also. “Not a problem,” they said.

185. Some of the happy kids in the village of Phuduhudu. There welcome gave me the confidence to go and ask others if I could stay in the village.

184. One of the streets in Phuduhudu village with their big trees and well kept compounds with traditional buildings and huts

It was actually the village hall they were at and there was a building with a verandah. They said I should put the tent on the verandah. It was up and I was unpacked in half an hour. I was curious about the others here and asked them what they were doing. They were all firefighters from Maun and they were burning the verges so a fire could not jump the road. There were few females but they were mostly men. They had a lot of small equipment like leaf blowers to help drive the fire. They were a cheerful, generous and good natured lot. Once the shop opened I bought some supper and bread and then settled down to write the blog as the sun set in a blaze, as it was partially cloudy. It had been a really memorable day with the elephants and then the insight into the nice village and the travelling firefighters.

186. My tent on the verandah of the community hall, where the visiting fire fighters had said i could camp.

Day 034. 12 June. Maun to Motopi Telecom Mast. 96 km. 8 hours. 310m up. 310m down. I was slow in getting going and did not leave until nearly 1000. I was already on the SE side of town so I was soon on the main road, the A3, which led east to Nata nearly 300 km away. I passed a lot of the suburban warehouses one finds on the outskirts of town like builders merchants, petrol stations and workshops and also a few out of town tourist lodges, and then suddenly I was beyond the outskirts and in livestock country again. Sheep, goats, cattle and donkeys grazed the verges. There was very little change and if it kept up like this all day I would be struggling to find much to say. After 2 hours I passed the village of Chanoga where there were a couple of very basic roadside pit stops selling food from 3 or 4 large cauldrons. I am not sure if it would be freshly made or yesterday’s, but I am sure as I go deeper into Africa I will have to eat at these soon. Today I was still full from the large breakfast.

171. At many of the small villages along the road there were local cafes. It would nor be long before i was eating in them.

About an hour east of Chanoga I saw something unmistakable in the distance, namely bicycles with panniers. There were two of them so I crossed over the road to meet them. There were Marius and Simon from Germany and they looked cool and rough, cycling in sandals on bikes which looked like they had been well used. I was very enthusiastic to meet them. It was like a Man Friday moment. They were also eager to meet me. Very soon we realized we were both doing the exact opposite to each other. They had come from Dar-es Salam, about 3600 km away and were going to Swakopmund. with about another 1300 km to go. We chatted for nearly an hour beside the road exchanging tips and they added me to a Whatsapp group about cyclists in Africa. They said there were about 6-7 cyclists coming my way over the next week or so, including a Swiss guy not far behind them. It was a joyful chat, partly because of the coincidence, and partly because they were likable, happy, easy going people. One tip they gave me was that it was possible to sleep in the fenced off areas at the bottom of telecom masts as the gates were always open and it was then possible to close the gates and lock yourself in with the bike lock. They had used about 4 in the last week as it was out of the way of elephants. There were apparently many elephants in the next section to Kasane. After an hour we shook hands heartily again and then set off.

172. At last I saw some other cyclists after a month on the road. Marcus and Simon were doing the exact opposite to me and going from Dar es Salem to Swakopmund.

It did not take me long to get to a veterinary fence where I had to disinfect my shoes and ride through a puddle of disinfectant. Immediately after it was a selection of tuck shops and stalls and I bought 4 bananas at one stall for a late lunch. Once I set off I was in a totally different landscape. The verges were no longer dusty and covered with livestock, but were now tall, golden, flowing grasses, and they came right up to the road. I also noticed that there were no subsistence compounds here and the area was devoid of people. I think I had entered a Park but was not sure if it was National or Regional or even just a game reserve. The wind had died and I was making quite good time, but labouring a bit. Then I noticed my back tire was at a very low pressure.

174. After the veterinary fence I left the ranches of Ngamiland and entered a National Pak where there was no livestock and the grass could grow tall.

I stopped to blow the tyre up with a battery gadget and it was soon at 45 PSI again. However 5 km later I had to repeat the process as it fell to about 15 PSI again. I had to do this about 6-7 times and just managed 5 km before I had to top up the tyre pressure. It was not good as obviously I had a puncture which the latex goo inside the tube could not plug. I had inner tubes but once I switched from the tubeless system to the more standard inner tube I could not go back. The problem was there were so many thorns and glass fragments which the tubeless system had dealt with admirably so far, and had I used inner tubes instead I would constantly be stopping to repair punctures. I had a spare tyre and 3 inner tubes and I would need the former if I was to change over as the current tyre would have so many sharp protrusions embedded into it that it would puncture the inner tube immediately in multiple places. It was a quandar, but for now I would have to pump every 5 kilometres until I reached a destination.

175. As dusk fell the elephants came out of the bust to wander along the road.. I saw 6 in all lurking behind trees. Thw all fanned their ears when they saw me and watched me pass.

I did have my mind set on Leopard Plains but it was an expensive lodge. I had checked yesterday and it did have availability. It was still 20 km away, or 4 fills of the tyre. Suddenly something on my right caught my eye. It was a massive elephant some 40 metres away in the bush. It had large tusks so I assumed it was a bull. It did a quick U turn and went back into the bush before I could photograph it. Then half an hour later there was another but this time it just stood watching me flaring its ears. I was past it in a gif but then turned to get a photo, but the elephant was now partially obscured by trees. It was exciting. Not long after I passed the turn off to Motopi and the telecom mast at this T junction where Marius and Simon had spent the night locked in its compound. I cycled past it and on for another 5 km to reach Leopard Plains. Unfortunately the Lodge was now full and he was not going to open the gate for me.

I decided I would continue and find somewhere to camp nearby. It was already 1730 and dusk was imminent. I cycled for another 2-3 km but there were many elephants on the south side of the road on the edge of the bush waiting to come out as it got darker. They were like sheep in the Scottish highlands beside the road, except with considerably more menace. I got to one place where there were two drinking from a pond beside the road and it just seemed too close for comfort.

Fortuitously a police pickup came by and I cycled beside it keeping the pickup between me and gargantuan beasts. On the other side I had a discussion with the 3 policemen and they said I would be best going back as the next village was 40 km and the road was full of elephants now in the dusk and they would be wandering along paths on each side of the road where I intended to camp. They watched me cycle past the two elephants again and then continued east while I returned west. The police wanted me to go to Motopi but I knew I just wanted to go the 6-7 km back to the telecoms mast. It was an exciting cycle and a few times I passed an elephant lurking behind a tree just 30-40 metres away. I made it to the junction peddling with a sense of urgency and then headed up the sandy track for 200 metres to the tower. The gate was bound with cloth.

176. My camp under the telecom mast in the fenced compound with gates. We closed the gates to keep the elephants out.

Then Elias the Swiss cyclist appeared and opened the gate for me. He said “you’re leaving it late to finish” and I explained the previous 2 hours. He had been here since 1500. We chatted as I put up my tent right under the tower. By the time I had finished it was dark. I then had 2 cans of food for dinner, while talking more with Elias. He had cycled all the way from Switzerland to here. I noticed he did not have tubeless, but inner tubes, and the Swalbe puncture resistant tyres with a kevlar strip embedded in them. I pumped up my tyre before I ate in the hope it would reseal and hold its pressure overnight. If not I would have to put a new tyre and inner tube on tomorrow morning. After the meal we said good night and then I went into my tent to write the blog. I felt very secure locked into the compound with the locked gate. There was some distant lightning occasionally but too far away to hear the thunder.

 

 

Back

October 14, 2023

Day 52. Jan 10. S 87º57.940 W 083º05.636 to S 88º09.228 W 082º43.957. 22 km. 10.5 hrs. 2940 Cal. There was sun on and off in the night and the tent was warm. However, in the morning just as I was packing up, I could see the clouds starting to erase the sun and the light. Not again I thought. How many white outs can there be on this trip? But it did not turn out like that as it must have been a thin mist of low cloud and although my shadow almost disappeared, the visibility remained tolerable. It stayed like this for a couple of hours until my first break. After 5 km I crossed out of the difficult 87 degree and into the reputedly easier 88 degree. The terrain was quite easy, but it was slow. All that new snow which had fallen yesterday was like white iron filings, shards of ice, and they clung to the pulk as I pulled it over them. It was hard slow work, almost like pulling a tyre on a wet sandy beach. The sun never really disappeared though, and it shone through the veil of mist with a halo round it and more iron filings in the mist fell to the ground.

I was dreading my second break as I anticipated cold fingers preparing and eating it. It was cold, about minus 25, but the ferocious bitter winds of the last few days had dissipated, and it was now a gentle breeze and the wind ribbon waved half-heartedly. Preparing lunch, I must have looked like a scientist handling flasks of liquid nitrogen. I had big clumsy mitts on and with them I was filling the Nalgene bottle and the macaroni cup with steaming water from the thermoses. In the end it worked OK, and the macaroni was great. It started hot but I had to finish it within 5 minutes, or it would start to freeze.

I was quite empowered by the lunch and set off well. I could feel the surge of energy from the 1000 calorie meal. Instead of stopping after 5 km I continued for 7 km. The terrain got easier with less sastrugi and dunes or drifting, and, if you could see them, there were also strips of harder glazed snow which were aligned in the direction I was going. More and more blue sky was appearing and yet behind me from where I had come looked dark and almost certainly a whiteout. I wondered if I really had climbed out of one weather zone into another which was the high pressure which was frequent on the polar plateau, where there was more of a continental climate. Frequently I looked back, and the sun was still there but beneath it on the ground was a tremendous glow as if there was a nuclear explosion. I assume it was the optics of the veil of mist and the reflection from the snow. It was there all afternoon whenever I looked back.

126. It looked like a nuclear explosion on the ground but was obviously a reflection of the sun on the icefield.

During my third break a hand got very cold. I think some moisture got onto the glove and into the mitt liner while I was preparing a drink. Luckily, I had the redline mitts to hand in a pocket in the green bedding bag. I ripped off my damp glove and plunged my hand into the lamb’s wool and down feather of the redline and prevented any damage. I was glad now I had an abundance of gloves. I skied another 5 km after that across a plain filled with dunes of snow about a metre high. There was hardly a flat patch there. It looked like ocean would look like in a force 3 breeze just before the white caps of a force 4 started. They were easy to ski over but there was plenty of soft snow between them to slow me down.

At last, the 22 km mark for the day came and I pitched the tent at once in this choppy frozen ocean. There was no wind, and the tent was a dream to put up even with mitts on. It took just 15 minutes instead of the windy 30 minutes when I was much more cautious. As it was, I could feel the heat of the sun on my face as I started to boil the kettle. I had still 205 km to ski to the South Pole and had 9 day’s worth of food which I could stretch to 10 with a bit of rationing and 11 with a lot. It seemed quite plausible. I had already done over 950 km since I started. Once the weather improves in a few days I might put in some early starts to get the average milage down a bit. It had been a great day, and I was delighted to have started the final section and put the rough climb section behind me.

Day 53. Jan 11. S 88º09.228 W 082º43.957 to S 88º20.805 W 082º46.888. 22 km. 11 hrs. 3070 Cal. Although the sun was out it was very cold at minus 28 outside. Luckily there was virtually no wind otherwise it would have been serious. As it was, I could feel the cold creep through my salopettes. I had pretty much every item of clothing on when I left at 0700. In the unlikely event it got too hot I could always ventilate using the zips on the salopettes and pit zips on the jacket. It remained chilly all day and even hit minus 30 when I stopped to put the tent up. The one item I lacked were really good gloves for tent work. The Hestra Alpine Pro were not up to the job as the shiny leather absorbed the cold and the lining was too thin. Much the same way a steel toecap boot is cold in the winter as the toecap absorbs the cold.

I did not have a plan when I set off but wanted to cross the 88 degree and 20-minute line. It was about 21 km away. All the 4 sessions today were quite similar. The spindrift had settled everywhere on the flat ice between the gentle climbs. On these flatter bits with new spindrift the going was very sluggish and the ice crystals lying in the dunes did not let the pulk pass easily. However, where the ridges of the dunes had been polished the pulk slid beautifully. The trouble was there were few of these polished areas and they were mostly on the climbs.

127. The moonscape of waves on the ice sheet. Mostly they were dunes but some were carved into sastrugi

As the wind was now quite negligible it was easy to prepare my food and eat it sitting on the pulk. I had made a mistake of taking such preparation intensive food for my midday meals and would have been better off having a nose bag of easy snacks I could just tuck into. When I did have my macaroni, I did feel a surge of energy which lasted a couple of hours before the mouse was back gnawing at the walls of my stomach. I was quite well nourished though but my main complaint was tiredness.

I don’t know whether my pulk is heavier or slides less well than the others?  Probably both but at the moment I am putting in 10-11 hours days every day without respite and have to do so to complete my 22-24 km each day. I wake at 0500 and the cycle begins and start skiing at 0700. I don’t finish until 1900 and then have to set up the tent and put everything on the drying racks. If the sun is not out to warm the tent, I have to bring the stove in to warm the tent for an hour or so to dry everything. Then I have supper, write the blog, and try and get to sleep by 2200 but it is often later. I should have 8 more days of this before I reach the South Pole. People might ask what I am going to do when I reach the Pole and the ALE camp there. Overwhelmingly what I would like to do is sleep. I will sleep for days hopefully.

The weather now is much more continental with dry, sunny, cold. The forecast for the next week is more of the same. But it comes at the price of cold. It is now on average between -25 and -30 centigrade outside. But without the catabatic winds that is not too bad if you wrap up well. I do have a problem with my breathing mask and general condensation from my breath. It ices up the windstopper flap I have sewn onto the bottom of my goggles to protect my nose and cheeks. icicles hang from the bottom of it. When I lift them slightly to my forehead so I can eat I feel I am in the mouth of a predator fish looking out past the teeth. However, the real condensate is around the mask and at the end of the day it is thick with ice. I should have brought 3 or 4 of them really to swap out every break.

128. It was a particularly cold day. Between minus 25-30 ?C The ice built up on my goggles and breathing mask was severe.

Today I skied until about 1900 and as soon as I had done my 23 km put the tent up. I was tired, too tired to write the blog, so I am writing it the next morning before breakfast at 0430. Hence the slight rambling. On the bush telegraph the FireAngels, Bex and George have finished with a massive 37 km day and have reached the Pole. Congratulations to them they have had a well-organised and well-disciplined expedition and have done stunningly well. Poppis and the Finns are about 2 days ahead of me and Al and Dave about one and a half, so I am still managing to keep in touch with them. They both had resupply caches left for them near here. Also about are Per the Swede and Robert the Polish skier who started at the shorter Messner start and are a few days ahead. And then there is Patrick who started at Berkner Island and is doing a really huge trip. Patrick is going very well and should be at the South Poe in a few days. We are all put to shame by Frenchman Vincent Colliard who reached the South Pole yesterday beating the previous record which had stood for a while. He did it in 22 days beating the record by 2 days. It will be nice for Pierre (already at the Pole and waiting to fly back to Union Glacier) to meet him. 2 record breakers, both French, the fastest and the youngest.

Day 54. Jan 12. S 88º20.805 W 082º46.888 to S 88º32.724 W 081º46.847. 23 km. 10.5 hrs. 2800 Cal. Distance to Pole 162 km. Food Left 7 days. (ED: note the 2 new stats for the final countdown!) Again, it was very cold in the morning. Down to about minus 30. I got cold fingers packing up the tent. I noticed that although it was clear and quite wind still, the air was full of shards of ice glistening in the sun like stardust. Every day the terrain in degree 88 has become easier and today it started off pretty uniform with small dunes, drifts really. You could have skied here in a whiteout without trouble. However, the snow was abrasive, and it was hard to pull the pulk except for the rare bit of more glazed snow. I guess that as the sastrugi, and the dunes get smaller it means the winds are not so strong here and maybe that’s why the snow was a bit looser and still sharp and angular as it had not been battered and rolled by the wind as spindrift. I felt desperately tired as I skied in the morning both physically and even more mentally. There were times where I could easily have fallen asleep and carried on skiing I felt, like sleepwalking.

I had my breaks sitting on the pulk with the very slight breeze in my back and the sun in my face. It was like the weeks before Thiel Fuel Cache when the weather was good. except now it was probably 20 degrees colder. I easily made the macaroni and the hot chocolate drinks with the mitts on as I was getting more used to it. I had to eat the macaroni quickly, like a dog lapping up its dinner and without finesse as I had to get it down before it froze.

In the second half of the day the temperature rose to about minus 15 and it was noticeably warmer. It was more to do with the sun being at its strongest than with any weather change. Whereas yesterday I felt I was going uphill the whole day while not really doing so, today I felt I was skiing on the level. Either my legs were less tired, or the snow was a bit easier. Once I had been going for about 12 hours in all with 10.5 on skis I decided to camp. I wanted 24 but was happy with 23.

I had wanted an early night but as I was melting snow the stove started to splutter. It needed a bit of maintenance. The other one had already been put aside for maintenance, so I had to strip the burners from both stoves and get them going again. It took well over an hour. I also filled my fuel bottles from the dodgy ones in the pulk. I had about 2.5 litres of fuel to cook and occasionally heat the tent if the sun was not out. It would be enough to get me to the South Pole. I only have 7 days of food left now and am aiming to be at the Pole on the 19 January which assuming there are no weather problems is quite feasible as it is 162 km away. However, in the next 4 days I want to do 100 km just to add a comfort buffer. It means getting up earlier. I am afraid the blog might suffer, and become more perfunctory, but we will see how time goes. As I put my tent up a plane flew north in the distance. It was carrying Pierre, Bex and George and, I assume, Vincent Colliard back to Union Glacier, so the bush telegraph will be very depleted as they were part of the mainstay.

Day 55. Jan 13. S 88º32.724 W 081º46.847 to S88º45.800 W 081º53.839. 25 km. 11 hrs. 2770 Cal. Distance to Pole 138 km. Food Left 6 days. I woke naturally at 0400. The tent was warm, and the sun was out so I decided I might as well get up and make an earlier start. I had planned to do this anyway. It took me two and a half hours to get ready and set off which is a bit ridiculous really and I will have to be more efficient in the mornings. It was very cold when I packed up the tent, I reckon it was minus 30, but there was no wind which was lucky. I got very tired in the first session and almost got the “nods” where you are desperate to stay awake but can’t. Despite skiing and pulling the pulk, the experience is the same as when you are on a long drive and can’t keep your eyes open. At least then I would have had the chance to pull into a stopping place but there was not the same option here.

Since I came into the 88th degree the conditions have gradually got easier. I likened my first day in them like an ocean frozen in a force 4 just before the whitecaps start to break. Then it was a force 3 and yesterday was like a force 2 and very benign. Well today it was almost flat calm. This can only mean one thing and that is the prevalent winds in this area are gradually diminishing as I head up to the Pole. I would say this area seldom receives the big winds to create the sastrugi and dunes of the lower sections.

I had been going for a good hour when I noticed some cloud formations and mist to the east. I thought nothing of it until suddenly the snow lost its luminosity. I looked round and the sun was being swallowed by a large cloud. Not again I thought as I assumed I had finished with the compass now I had reached the sunlit uplands.

129 The last of the dunes and sastrugi halfway through the 88th degree as the terrain became yet more flat and calm.

At the time I was experimenting with the neoprene facemask, as the Cold Avenger breathing mask produced so much moisture which ran down to my chest making the five layers of clothing damp. However, the neoprene FRX racing mask had its own issues and steamed up the goggles. As I was wondering how to revert back to the cold avenger the skies darkened, and a small wind appeared. It was absolutely freezing and despite having all my clothes on I could still feel the cold. It caught me unawares like a squall at sea while you are sunbathing. Luckily, I had a spare pair of goggles but as soon as I put them on, they started to fog up also. I decided to revert back to the partially frozen Cold Avenger. However, the switch over was fraught in the minus 30 with the wind. Eventually I managed but I sacrificed 2 pairs of gloves as they got covered in frozen condensed breath and got a bit wet. Eventually the switch to the breathing mask was complete and luckily my googles started to clear again.

The cloud only lasted for a couple of hours and then the sun returned. I caught myself starting to smile when the first shard of sun approached. I carried on to the south, coming across numerous ski tracks from my colleagues. Some I followed for a bit, others I ignored. They were no easier than the rest of the ice field. I noticed my pulk, which squeaked and crunched over the snow was starting to fall silent. I had climbed imperceptibly and was now at the 88th degree and 40 minutes and this was the end of the climb which had been going on the undulating steps from Thiel Fuel Cache. I was now going onto the Polar Plateau at last.

The snow was like castor sugar or sand, but it was not so abrasive as the same type of snow in the 86th degree. The grain of the snow was very small and almost powder. It was OK to ski on and it continues for the next 150 km all the way to the south pole. I skied perhaps another 10 km across the plateau till I hit the 25 km mark and then put the tent up. The snow was deep and loose, and the tent pegs would struggle if a wind arrived, so I used the skis as tent anchors. Since the squall passed early in the morning the weather had been nice again and now in the evening it warmed the tent and dried my damp clothing. It had been a great day and despite the tiredness I enjoyed the peace and solitude of the plateau, smooth and luminous bright, it was vast and almost seemed to follow the curvature of the earth like an ocean view does. If I had 6 more days like today, I would reach the pole before my food ran out.

Day 56. Jan 14.  S 88º45.800 W 081º53.839 to S 88º58.377 W 082º44.961. 24 km. 10.5 hrs. 2740 Cal. Distance to Pole 115 km. Food Left 5 days. I woke naturally at 0400 again and the sun was out. I was a bit quicker this morning and got away just after 0600. It was immensely bright outside on this Polar Plateau, yet far to the north where I had been in the last 2-3 weeks was cloud. I wondered if there were the same whiteout conditions there now, similar to the ones which had plagued me when I was there. The snow up here was like caster sugar again, but some people compared it to sand. It was quite a remarkable consistency and not unlike the snow of the 86th degree which was deep and abrasive. Except here it was not so abrasive and the pulk slid a bit more easily. However, I was never going to get any sort of glide on my skis before the end of the expedition as the snow was too sharp and granular. Perhaps even without a pulk I would have had little glide. So, I was resigned to plodding along for the next 5 days or 115 km. What was remarkable about the snow was the silence of it. Unusually the pulk runners squeak as they get dragged over the snow but with the Polar Plateau snow it was silent as if riding on a bed of feathers.

It was pretty flat all day according to my instruments, but I felt I was going uphill. I was quite fatigued. I thought perhaps I had some sort of illness or lethargy but had no fever. I felt very sleepy and could have easily put the tent up and fallen asleep at once. It was the same as yesterday. This was probably because I am not getting enough sleep. I ski for 11-12 hours, put up or take down the tent for 4 hours, cook for 2, blog for 1 and the remaining 5 hours are sleep. For most of the morning I felt slightly delirious and plodded along in automaton mode with my eyelids often heavy. Even when clouds came and blotted out the sun and the temperature plummeted to minus 30, I did not get any invigoration. Nor after the snacks or meal. It was only towards the end of the day after the last break that I became livelier. People might say, I bet you can’t wait to have a beer or pizza. Actually, nothing is further from my mind. What I am really looking forward to is falling asleep in front of the fire in my cosy living room with Fiona, my partner, practicing the piano in the corner.

I came across more tracks and even some campsites today. I think they were from Al and Dave- the ex-marines, and then later Robert and Per, 2 soloists from Poland and Sweden respectively who appear to have teamed up. They began from the Messner Start, which is slightly shorter and meets the Hercules Inlet route at Thiel Fuel Cache. Thereafter they would have done the rugged 86 and 87 degrees which I did. They are not on my bush telegraph but they seem to be averaging 18 km a day so I might catch them up. In the meantime, I am still last.

I was going to do 25 km today but as I reached 24, I saw a wave of castor sugar looming. It was not the climb which concerned me but the cold wind coming down the slope as the evening air chilled. This catabatic wind would have stripped any solar gain the tent was producing. So, I stopped well before the bottom of the slope. This slope rose up pretty much on the 89th degree and also coincided with the 2700 metre contour line. I got a message from Poppis saying he had recorded a temperature of minus 32 just up the slope. So that, and the catabatic wind, would have been fiendishly cold.

The tent was up quickly in the gentle, but bitter breeze and I was soon inside the tent feeling the sun on my face. Without the sun this expedition would have been very difficult. There would be no way to dry clothes or have a clear vision of the terrain. The forecast said sun, lots of it, for the next week, but the temperature would be about minus 30-35. With it minus 30 outside the temperature in the tent could be plus 20 and all that separated the two was a layer of ripstop nylon.

Tomorrow, I start the Last Degree. The others already have. There is a definite excitement in the air now with everybody remaining, about 9 of us about to finish in the next week. I plan to finish on the 19th of January primarily because that is when my food runs out. The forecast is good, 5 days is average for a degree and the last degree is relatively easy and flat, so it is within my sights. But things can always go wrong.

Day 57. Jan 15.  S 88º58.377 W 082º44.961 to S 89º11.566 W 082º19.116. 25 km. 10.5 hrs. 3010 Cal. Distance to Pole 90 km. Food Left 4 days. I woke at 0430, a bit later than I wanted but still OK as I was quite fast and still managed to set off by 0630. It was a beautiful morning with just a slight breeze but cold; very cold at below minus 30. As I got to the bottom of the slope that I had stopped before yesterday, the breeze started to pick up and it went from a force 2 to a 3. It really made a difference, and my fingers were getting cold, so I had to put the OR Alti Mitts on. As I skied south it appeared that this rise was just one of many rises. They were less than a kilometre apart and there must have been a down slope the other side of each rise. I barely noticed the ups and downs other than visually. It was like a huge mid ocean swell created by a distant storm. I must have crossed some 15 of them in the first 12 km.

The wind had now increased to a force 4 and the spindrift was certainly on the move, although it stayed close to the ground. The patterns it produced on the surface of the snow were just like sand where water was moving over it. There were ripples in the snow everywhere. Although this was a southern wind, I noticed that there were some dunes here, and these were all aligned South East – North West indicating a South East wind. These South East winds would have been cyclonic when large depressions from the Southern Ocean extended this far. They must have been ferocious weather events. Luckily, I just had to cope with this cold catabatic southerly wind as the cold air flowed downhill from the plateau. My wind soon increased again to force 4. The wind chill must have been in the minus 40’s. I had to change gloves again for the Redline Mitts. I have never been more thankful to Bjorn at Pitteraq in Oslo for thrusting them upon me. They are so warm and give instant respite.

In the UK when we say a “bitter wind” we probably have a cold easterly in February coming off the North Sea. However, this morning’s wind took that to a whole new level. It was more like an industrial blast freezer where food is rapidly frozen. If I took a finger sized chipolata sausage at room temperature and threw it on the ground here, I am sure it would be frozen solid in a couple of minutes.  A bare hand, perhaps 10 minutes, and a hand in my Hestra gloves, perhaps half an hour before there was frostbite. I had to plan every move that involved any dexterity and stopping for a snack or rehydrating the macaroni was out of the question. Hence, I did not stop for nearly 6 hours by which time I had done 13km. At one stage I could feel the cold even coming through the Redline Mitts and thought I would have to call it a day and put the tent up or risk frostbite. It was the most intense cold I think I have experienced. However, I managed to get the Redline Mitts into the poggies and that brought some respite.

After 6 hours the Force 4 had abated to a Force 2, and I took the opportunity to have the macaroni and hot chocolate. It was delicious and I managed to finish the cup of macaroni before it froze. This boosted my energy, and I did another 8 km with the wind easing all the time. I came across some tracks and worked out they were from Al and Dave and also from Robert and Per. They were just a day old but already covered in small dunes. It was not a great help to follow them as the new spindrift was more abrasive than the snow I was on. However, it did mean I could park my mind in neutral and not have to worry about navigation. I followed their tracks past their campsites and across more rolling swell until I had done 25 km. As yesterday I noticed a large wave or ridge to the south which would be the first thing tomorrow.

It was just a force 2 but still below minus 30 when I quickly put the tent up and went inside to sort myself out. My mask had frozen to my small beard which took a while to pull apart but the piece of drybag I had sewn onto the mask did seem to have diverted the moisture away from my chest. Despite the blast freezer raging outside at minus 30 the tent did get up to nearly 20 degrees inside which will dry my damp clothing. It had been a good day despite the wind and the most noticeable achievement was passing into the “Last Degree”. ALE and private firms run mini guided expeditions across the relatively easy but cold last degree which takes a week or so for those who want a shorter Antarctic adventure. But these had just finished for the season. At the scheduled 2100 ALE phone call I spoke to Louis Rudd who had just finished guiding a group for his company called Shackleton.

Day 58. Jan 16. S 89º11.566 W 082º19.116 to S89º25.296 W 081º44.483. 26 km. 11 hrs. 2740 Cal. Distance to Pole 65 km. Food Left 3 days. I woke at 0400 and left at 0630. Initially it was great but then a southerly wind developed. It was not as bad as yesterday but still one of the coldest days I have experienced. The whole day was similar to yesterday really except the wind was just low enough to give me the confidence to prepare the chocolate drinks and the lunch. I continued skiing over the vast undulating icefield which sat over the pole and spread out in every direction.

Around lunch I thought I spotted someone away in the distance, about 5 km away. Of course, it could just be my eyes playing tricks on me. But I lined it up with 2 distinctive patches of snow and it did in fact move. In fact, it seemed there were two people. It must be Robert and Per, Polish and Swedish respectively. They had started at the shorter Messner start and were going quite slowly. After some 4 hours I finally caught up with them when they camped early because Per’s foot was sore. I had not seen anyone since the end of November so as I approached the tents, I was anxious. It was indeed Robert and Per, and they came out to meet me. I suppose a snippet of social chat was all I could hope for in my “Man Friday” moment. However, it was very perfunctory. I would have been better going round them and saved the epiphany of social interaction for the camp at the South Pole. They took a few photos of me, and I skied off after 10 minutes.

130. Arriving at the campsite of Per and Robert who took the photo.

I wanted 26 today and I got them. Once the tent was up, I did all the chores and then had my delicious Expedition Foods fish and potato. After the meal I tried to write but kept falling asleep so made the blog for today short and succinct.

Day 59. Jan 17. S 89º25.296 W 081º44.483 to S 89º38.363 W 081º17.103. 25 km. 11 hrs. 2610 Cal. Distance to Pole 40 km. Food Left 2 days. When I looked at my watch and it said 0400, I knew I had to get up, but I would dearly loved to have spent another 4-5 hours sleeping. I could see from the rippling on the tent there was a slight breeze, but the sun was out, and the tent was not cold. The solar gain of the tent is an absolute Godsend and without it this trip would be totally different with tens of litres of fuel to heat the tent and dry things.

I set off at 0630 and already the wind had dropped a bit as per the forecast. by lunchtime it had all but ceased. The view from my hermetically sealed face area and out of the goggles was almost of a tropical paradise with smooth white sand under an even light turquoise sky. It could have been a poster for a white sandy Hebridean beach or Whitehaven Beach in Australia. The “sand” was brilliant white, almost luminous, and it sparkled as I went along it. There was immense solitude and mystery here on the Polar Plateau nearly 3000 metres above sea level. It was quite a magical place. But then if you took a glove off or unsealed part of the face the reality of minus 30 soon made its presence felt with a stinging reminder.

131. The problem of condensation is that it freezes on the breathing mask and on the cheek and nose protection flaps sewn onto the goggles.

As I skied my thoughts inevitably turned to finishing in a couple of days. There will be a team running the camp as a satellite from the main hub at Union Glacier. I wondered who was in that team as inevitably there would be someone there who I’d known previously or was a friend of a friend, either American, Norwegian, or British. Then there will be the “expeditioners”. Pierre and the FireAngels had already left but in their place will be Patrick the Canadian who I hung around with in Punta Arenas before we left. Then there would be the Finns who arrived at the South Pole today. Then Al and Dave (the ex-marines) and I would probably all arrive in 2 days. I should imagine the comradeship between us will be overwhelming. Apparently, Patrick has already said he would bring me breakfast in bed on the first morning. I am not looking forward to luxuries that much other than having time to relax and write. I don’t think I have had a whole day off since I thought I had badly damaged my knee and that was perhaps 7 weeks ago. I am also looking forward to the very simple things like having a chair to sit on or readily available hot water.

However I will also miss the daily expedition life and the routine I have established. Everything in the tent has a place and this order has evolved over the last 8 weeks. As long as the sun is out it gives me great joy to ski in Antarctica and I have enjoyed being in my bubble of exclusivity. But there have also been some significant hardships and it will be a delight not to contend with these for a while.

I did my 25 km by 1900 and then put the tent up. once inside I soon started to warm up as the evening sun shone onto the west side of the tent and radiated it heat. It was a very simple luxury, but I would not swap it for all the chocolate in Belgium. After the scheduled 2100 call with ALE I ate my delicious fish and potato stew and then wrote the blog but had difficulty staying awake. I still have 40 km to do which I hope to do the majority of tomorrow leaving me with a short day to finish on the 19th. All in all, it had been a great day, but I was tired and fatigued.

Day 60. Jan 18. S 89º38.363 W 081º17.103 to S 89º50.151 W 079º55.617. 22 km. 10 hrs. 2490 Cal. Distance to Pole 18 km. Food Left 1 days. When I looked at my watch it said 0300 so I rolled over for another hour. Unfortunately, I slept on to 0500 partially due to the tent being so warm due to the sun outside. I eventually got going at 0730. It was too late a start to do the intended 25 km, but it would be close. It was a beautiful, very bright and quite still morning and I had to vent the salopette legs to stop myself overheating despite the temperatures hovering around minus 30. From one horizon across to the other there was not a cloud in the light turquoise sky. There was just the sun in it. I have not seen the moon at all on this entire trip and it is something I will have to look up. Perhaps its orbit is in more restricted latitudes of say below 80 or even 70 degrees.

I split the day into four times 6 km sessions. On the first I approached the 2800 contour line and there was wave after wave of rolling ice waves to gently climb and then even more gently descent to reach the next. Each wave was about half a kilometre apart. The pulk felt heavy and difficult to pull or perhaps I had become quite feeble. It was now only about 50kg with a day’s worth of food and 2 litres of fuel. I tired very easily and also noticed how short of breath I was. It was nearly 3000 metres, but I had acclimatised in a text book manner and also at 3000 metres in the Himalayas I don’t have any issue. Maybe there was less oxygen in the air at the poles. I have not seen my torso for nearly 2 months as I never change clothes however, I notice the tremendous weight loss. I started probably 103 kg and I would say now I am approaching 80 kg. Just when the New Year’s resolution of Keto or Atkins or Huel diets are running into the sand in the general population with little to show may I recommend dragging a 100 kg sledge for 2 months across 1200km in Antarctica for guaranteed weight loss.

On the second session I felt a bit perkier as the waves eased off onto a very broad ridge. The weather had not changed but suddenly it felt colder. Much colder. I had my hand bare for 15 seconds doing something and it started to sting. I also noticed the cold suddenly creep through all my clothing. I have become used to it being minus 30 over the last week but this was much more, and it frightened me. An hour or two later I warmed up so I can only conclude it was a cold bubble of air that had dropped from a very high altitude. Like the opposite of a thermal. During its worst I had the redline mitts on and the poggies and still my fingers were cold.

During the third session I reached the top of the broad rise which the waves of the morning led up to and the skiing was easy. I think there was a slight descent because I was getting a glide on my skis here and there. In the distance I noticed 2 white stripes on the ice cap which looked a bit unusual. They could not be drifts. They were a long way away and perhaps there was some sort of mirage. it was warm enough now for me to take my phone camera out and I set it to 100 zoom and took a few photos. There were black things and when I looked with the eye again, I could make them out. Then it dawned on me it was the South Pole Station. There it is. THERE IT IS!! It was about 24 km away still but that was the South Pole and the end of my journey. I aimed to get there tomorrow.

From here there was a lovely barely perceptible descent for a couple of km down into a dip where the building disappeared. I stopped here for my snack and was amazed now how warm it was. I could virtually eat the whole energy bar without gloves on. This is what I would expect though on a sunny afternoon. I was going to do 6 km after the snack but in the end only did 4 km as I wanted the time to do the blog and enjoy a sunny evening in the tent. It was my last evening in the tent. I would miss the routine and order from boiling the kettle with my legs in the hole in the snow to then turning the stove off to retreat to the inner chamber which the sun had warmed nicely. I then had a host of things to do including eat my delicious dinner, check in with ALE, spread the solar panels out on the tent floor to charge, do some maintenance and write the blog. It was a routine which had developed over the last 60 nights which I have been in the tent consecutively. The tent has really been my home and I have got quite fond of it in the same way a prisoner might get fond of his cell. There is stability and order here while just outside is danger and chaos.

And so, I began my last night in the tent. Tomorrow I will be thrust back into society again having been detached from it for two months. During that time, I have virtually been entirely on my own like an ascetic monastic monk in a stone house on a rocky outcrop. I am usually a keen follower of current affairs, yet I know nothing about what has happened in the world since mid-November when Hamas launched an attack on Israel and Israel had just started to respond. I have lived in a complete cultural void where the only things that matter are the weather, snow condition, temperature, and visibility. It will be quite a shock to go back into society again after my supercharged Lent. I can imagine when I reconnect with my phone there will be over a thousand emails waiting for me but there will also be people to laugh and share jokes with and rejoice with and that excites me. I have done my time as a spiritual hermit and now it is time to re-enter society again. I have done it a few times in my life, not least with my 249 day Norway trip, but there is always an anxiety with change and change will happen tomorrow when I get to the South Pole Station. When I arrive there, I will be the oldest person to have skied solo to the South Pole and also the oldest person to have skied there unsupported. That is taking all my food fuel equipment and doing all my own repairs and maintenance without any outside help. I am pleased with that as it is quite an achievement for a 64 year old.

Day 61. Jan 19. S 89º50.151 W 079º55.617 to S 90º00.000 W 000º00.000. 21 km. 8 hrs. 2210 Cal. Distance to Pole 0 km. Food Left 0 days. I managed to get up a little after 0400 and the sun was shining into the tent heating the black insulation I had on the floor and this in turn was warming the tent and heating my boots. I packed everything and placed it all outside the vestibule and then turned and sat with my legs in the pit and looked inside my tent with some sadness. It had been very good to me and had been a solid and secure home for last two months. I then did the zip up of the inner for the last time and went out to pack the pulk. Although it was sunny there was a crescent of light grey cloud to the east. All the forecasts said it would be great today except for the one which I got on the Iridium Go. which said it would cloud over at 0900. Unfortunately, the Iridium Go forecast was the one I had leant was by far the most accurate and so it seemed today also.

132. In the freezing fog semi whiteout which enveloped on my last day as I skied towards the pole.

I decided to split the day into 3 times 6 kilometres and have two breaks. At each break I would have the last of my food, a packet of macaroni cheese. The 1000 calories in each would power me through the day. The trouble was it was a faff to prepare with mitts on. It was lovely as I set off, but the crescent of low grey cloud was moving towards me like a dust storm consuming all as it swallowed it up in its misery. I braced myself for it as the joy of the morning started to fade and within a short time the lights had gone out and where there was once sparkling snow there was now just a dull uniform greyness. It was not a proper whiteout, the likes of which plagued the 86th degree for me, but a semi whiteout and I could still see 100 metres. Without the sun to temper the cold the temperature dropped considerably as the freezing fog enveloped me. When the 6 km mark came up for the first break, I thought it is just not worth getting cold for the sake of a bowlful of macaroni so decided to bin the break and just have one at 9 km.

The closer I got to the South Pole the more and more tracks there were. Just as you could not move anymore with crossing over a longitudinal line it was the same with ski tracks and even vehicle tracks left by scientific vehicles. Most of the ski tracks came from ALE or private groups doing the “Last Degree” to the South Pole. Given the poor visibility, I decided to follow one of them where I guessed some 20 skiers had been altogether. It was fast and easy. With the longitudinal degree lines, what was 60 minutes or 60 nautical miles on the equator, was now just tens of metres. I should have been able to see the South Pole buildings from here become imperceptibly closer with every kilometre but could not see them at all.

Beside the ski track I was following there had been a single skier a few metres off to the side. I went over and followed this track for a while. There were a few things I noticed about it. It was so shockingly straight it would have made a Roman Road look like a meandering country lane. The pole baskets of the skier hit the ground every 2 metres rather than every metre like mine, so this skier had a great glide and technique. The pulk they were towing was a Paris Pulk. I soon deduced it was the track of Vincent Colliard who passed this way a week ago on his record-breaking speed run. he was making his own track as he did not want his record questioned. His technique was simply superb.

133. Arriving at the Ceremonial South Pole after 61 days alone on the ice if Antarctica.

At 9 km I did stop for my macaroni and as predicted I did get cold. I could feel the minus 30 even creep into my boots with the separate liners and 2 pairs of socks. I could feel it permeate 6 layers on top and 4 on my legs and I could certainly feel it come through the mitts. However, once I had the macaroni inside me I felt empowered and sped off to try and warm up again. After a quick 4 km, almost racing an imaginary Colliard beside me on his razor-sharp track, I had warmed up again. Then out of the grey, to the west of the track, appeared some small structures with flags on. I assumed these were scientific data or collection points. They continued for a kilometre or so when the freezing fog started first to thin and let some more light in and then to lift slightly. Suddenly before my eyes some 2 kilometres away the South Pole Base Station, dozens of small scientific structures, a large telecoms dish and the brightly coloured tents of ALE’s South Pole Camp appeared. ALE’s camp was about half a kilometre to the east of the South Pole Base Station, and it was my immediate destination. All the ski tracks were leading to it like spokes on a wheel. I had been told when I got to it someone would come out to meet me and point me in the direction of the South Pole itself.

It took a short hour to reach ALE’s brightly coloured camp, almost a pageant in contrast to the stark authoritarian structure of the US administered Amundsen Scott South Pole Station.  I can imagine someone in the ALE camp saw me and announced “incoming single skier with pulk” as soon an ALE jeep came out to meet me. The camp manager Cedar from Whitehorse and his good friend Devon from South BC, Canada, got out and strolled over to intercept me. I recognised both from Union Glacier 2 months ago. It seemed appropriate that Devon should welcome me as he was the person who put me in touch with ALE (Antarctic Logistics and Exploration) 8 months ago when I first enquired about an adventure in Antarctica. There was a hearty handshake and congratulations, but I was covered in ice and did not want to take my mask or goggles off because it would take so long to realign everything. They pointed me in the direction of the Ceremonial South Pole and the Geographical South Pole which were adjacent to each other a short kilometre away up an icy road. They told me to go there, and they would come up in 15 minutes and meet me and take photos and then drive me and the pulk back.

134. With the glint of victory in my eyes at the Ceremonial South Pole. The tape on the nose is to cover some frost damage.

I went up to the flags of the Ceremonial South Pole and as I got there Devon arrived in the ALE truck. There were more handshakes and then he took some 30 photos of me getting his hands cold in the process. We then walked over to the Geographical South Pole a few hundred metres away and I set off my check in to register the 90-degree reading. I walked round the world a couple of times and stood with one foot in one time zone and the other in a time zone twelve hours ahead. Devon took more photos. Then we loaded the pulk onto a trailer and I climbed into the truck and drove the short km back to ALE’s camp. Here Devon showed me a large yellow tent with 2 beds, a heater, 2 chairs, and a table in and said it was mine. I could stand up in it and the warmth was fantastic, both solar and the kerosene heater. I put my bedding on the pack on the bare mattress and then went into the main dining and kitchen tent.

135. With my now very empty pulk with the Thistle of Scotland on the back. My bedding is in the green bag.

As I went in there was a cheer and people came forward congratulate me. First were the two ex-marines Alan Chamber and his friend Dave who arrived a few hours ahead of me. Then Anna, a delightful and calm Kiwi from Te Anau, who gave me an enormous and warm hug, and then Twitty, a Malaysian cook from Sabah. Along with Cedar and Devon, we were the only people here. I had just missed Patrick and Poppis and the Finns who flew back to Union Glacier as I was arriving. I sat with Al and Dave and had a huge plate of food and soft drink. There was beer here too, but it would make me too sleepy.

136. With my skis at the Ceremonial South Pole. I used both Asnes Amundsen (pictured) and Asnes Ousland in the pulk.

I spent the afternoon basking in the euphoria of that dining tent and the seemingly unlimited supply of luxuries of soft drinks, chocolate, and great company. Alan and Dave were in a similar mood and had the sparkle of victory in their very blue eyes. Alan was a Polar veteran and had many North Pole last degree trips under his belt and a few South Pole ones too. He knew everybody and one of his last trips had been to bring the founding owners of Google to Antarctica for a solar eclipse and they were now his personal friends. I had been in contact with Al and Dave almost daily via a Garmin Inreach message and they had helped keep me motivated during my darkest days in the whiteouts in the 86th degree. How lovely it was now to bask with them in the victory of this warm convivial tent looked after by Cedar, Devon, Anna and Twitty the most warm, considerate and delightful hosts. Cedar and Devon were both polar guides and had done this trip so they could empathise with us.

137. At the Geographical South Pole at 90 degrees where all longitudinal lines and time zones meet.

Soon Twitty announced dinner was ready and served us a fusion of Malaysian inspired beef curry and chicken and then the 7 of us, 4 staff and 3 guests ate together. It was the most perfect evening and it only got better when Al produced a bottle of single malt, Wolfburn 46%, from Thurso which the 7 of us shared. I eventually went to bed just after 2100 into my warm spacious tent having been told breakfast was at 1000 the next day. As usual I went to bed fully dressed in 3 layers of leggings and 5 tops. Initially I slept well but then woke after midnight absolutely boiling as if I had fallen asleep in a greenhouse in the mid-afternoon in the middle of a heatwave. The trouble is I could not get my tops off. All the zips were stuck in the done-up position where they had been for the last 8 weeks and then were eroded by salt and time. I eventually forced them off but nearly ripped my ears off. The mesh of the Brynje under garments had left diamond impressions on my torso. I was pleased to see my arms had not withered as much as I feared. after that I fell back asleep and slept well until the alarm went at 0500. The joy of hitting the “dismiss” button should not be underestimated and I slept for another 4 hours.

Back

October 14, 2023

Day 40. Dec 29.  S 86º00.335 W 081º14.560 to S 86º11.000 W 081º20.082.  20 km. 10.5 hrs. 3110 Cal. It had been snowing a light drizzle through the night and it was still doing so in the morning. Perhaps 2 cm had accumulated on the pulk. It was not flakes or even polystyrene like beads but more of a fine dust, as if someone had thrown icing sugar around. I set off at 0700 and immediately knew I would be splitting the day into four 5 km sessions rather than 6 as it was heavy going from the off.

The 86 degree is renowned for having deeper soft snow, similar to what I was skiing on. There was probably a climatic explanation, but it might be that this region gets a lot of freezing fog, and this produces the fine snow particles which just accumulate. These small snow particles like icing sugar grip the runners of the pulk and don’t let it pass easily. I found that there were also some slightly glazed ridges amongst the beds of deep soft snow and these ridges ran in the same direction I was going, namely south. If I kept to the ridges, it was much easier, but it was not easy to link them up. Although it was nearly a whiteout the sun was there as a diffuse ball trying to shine through a thin layer of fog. This fog or low cloud persisted all day but the diffuse ball in the sky was there most of the tie also. It was a kind of semi whiteout and the snow had little contrast, but I could see at least 100 metres.

I pulled and pulled the pulk all day gradually getting more and more tired. It was exhausting work. I felt like a large plough horse pulling a 3 bladed plough through an everlasting field of sorbet. As the day wore on the more tired, I got. I suppose this is what it was like to be a slave or a prisoner in a work camp where you get up and toil all day, day after day, until the labour takes its toll. However, this usually takes years, and it is quite unbelievable really how resilient the human body is. I was toiling but I was well nourished and there was also a goal insight just in 3 weeks or so. My lot was really nothing like a slave or prisoner of war, but it was taxing, and I was working at full steam really.

At last, the 20 km was up and I found a nice firm sheet of neve snow on which to pitch the tent. It was up in 20 minutes, and I was soon inside getting the stove going. It takes a good hour to melt and boil enough snow for the next 24 hours. After that I retreated to the inner tent and got onto my sleeping bag and made a chair from the thermarest. It was the best time of the day, just about to have my delicious Expedition Foods fish and potato stew, which I could never tire of. Their lunch time Mac and Cheese is wearing a bit thin though. After that the bush telegraph messages start coming in about who had an easy day and who had a tough one. It seems that most people in this neck of the woods were having the same problem with the soft abrasive sand like snow. Not Pierre though he had finally broken through the giant sastrugi and dunes of snow and was just on the Polar Plateau. He had some 200 km of flattish skiing to do to reach the South Pole. For me it had been a hard day with little rewards or view, but I was another 20 km closer to the pole. I would sleep well tonight.

Day 41. Dec 30. S 86º11.000 W 081º20.082 to S  86º17.916 W 081º22.555. 13 km. 9 hrs. 2470 Cal. It was snowing a light drizzle when I woke and packed. The pulk had about 5 cm of new snow on it with the consistency of castor sugar (where I previously wrote icing sugar, I meant castor sugar). Once I was hitched into the harness and had taken my first steps, I knew today was going to be hard. To make it more bearable mentally I kept it in 4 sessions but dropped the kilometres in each one to 4 kilometres. As it turned out even that was too much. It was a fiendish haul and I had to really work hard. The first kilometre took an hour and cost me 300 calories. I became a bit despondent about it all and morale slipped to a low ebb. In the last week since leaving Thiel Fuel Cache it has virtually been poor weather the whole time. The sun has not made many appearances, but the whiteouts and the fine snow has continued almost unabated. It is sapping my joy and from what I can make of the weather forecast there is still a couple more days of overcast snowy weather to come. I also was a bit annoyed that the others were now days ahead of me. They were in teams with much lighter pulks, and they could also take it in turns to plough through.

I had hoped to do a degree in every 5 days, which is an average of about 22 km per day but there is no way I can manage that in these conditions. After nearly 3 hours I had only done 3 km and I was already quite exhausted so had my first break. It had at least stopped snowing now and the whiteout was quite half hearted really. For the rest of the day the weather did improve and as it did, I could feel my mood lift. Towards the end of the day there was plenty of blue sky and I could put my compass away and rely on distant cloud formations as a bearing. My usually ordered system of breaks went out of the window as I ploughed on, and they became quite random and almost chaotic as I had to stop nearly every kilometre for a rest. I could feel some aches and pains but interestingly not in my right knee. My pulk weight including the pulk was still about 75 kg and of that only about 30kg was food and fuel now. I think I am still a good week or two from that magic tipping point when I can easily overcome the resistance. A bit like a motorboat labouring away until suddenly it breaks free and starts to plane on the water.

115. Ploughing a lonely furrow in an endless plain of caster sugar like snow, some 10-15 cm deep.

I heard from others ahead that this degree becomes easier after the halfway point with firmer snow again. That means I probably still have another two days of hard work before I get there. If it continues like this much more, it will cost me my “unsupported” status as I will probably need a re supply somewhere on the Polar Plateau but that is still a long way off. A resupply would not be the end of the world for me, but had I decided to go “supported” the whole way I could have had a 50 kg lighter pulk on average and a lot less worry over my equipment failing. The Finns did this and have been living the dream with entrecote and chardonnay. I stopped early at 1730 as I thought there was a danger of damaging some muscles especially in my right lower leg. As I put the tent up the sun came out and it soon warmed the tent. In fact, it was a lovely evening in the tent and the temperature in the drying rack got up to 31 degrees and the solar panels were working overtime after a leisurely week for them. The sun makes all the difference to the mood too and I was content in the evening.

Day 42. Dec 31. S 86º17.916 W 081º22.555 to S 86º27.544 W 081º27.525. 18 km. 9 hrs. 2290 Cal. It was a warm and sunny night. The tent was warm, and everything was crisp and dry. The solar chargers had filled both batteries in the night. The tent life in the morning was pleasant as it was about 20 degrees in the tent. When I emerged, it was to a wall-to-wall light blue sky, a very mild turquoise almost like a watercolour wash. The snow was a brilliant white and without my goggles I would have almost been blinded by it. The weather had instantly changed my mood for the better. There had been no wind in the night and my footsteps around the tent, some 15 cm deep were still fresh. As I put on the yoke and started to pull, the pulk felt heavy and I decided to go for four times 4.5 kilometres today making a total of 18. It is what most of the others managed in this quagmire of caster sugar.

As I was doing the first session the icesheet rose up to a higher plateau to around 1800 metres. On this rise there must have been some catabatic winds descending from the 1800 plateau as there was little snow here on the firm neve and skarve surface. My ski poles squeaked as they twisted on the firm surface. There was also some small sastrugi around, but it was quite light. The pulk slid easily across the hard surface and I could climb quite quickly. However, it was only a couple of kilometres over an hour or so and soon I was on the shelf above and the deep caster sugar returned.

116. My tent pitched with the skis as pegs as the snowpack was too soft for the standard snow pegs I have.

It continued like this for the rest of the day with me stopping every 2-2.5 hours for a break. As far as the eye could see it was a smooth even surface to the distant horizons. The horizon itself was huge and well delineated. Above was the turquoise water colour wash and below the brilliant white smooth snow, which I though took of some of the turquoise from above. Occasionally I came across the tracks of Poppis and the Finns who passed here two days previously, but they were buried under 10 cm of new snow, and I quickly lost them again.

At the breaks I had to swap my gloves for mitts as it was much colder now. I also put on my Decathlon duvet jacket over my main Shackleton jacket and the harness. That way I kept warm while sitting on the pulk. During the last session a wisp of hazy cloud appeared and occasionally covered the sun. It was the next batch of poor snowy weather arriving and it was forecast to last 2 days. Hopefully I would be out of this wind still area where the snow accumulated with being compressed into firmer snow by the wind. After this inclement weather for the next couple of days, which was bound to be in a whiteout, the forecast looks good. At 18 km I stopped and put up the tent. There was no sun now, so it was not that warm until I brought the stove inside the inner tent. It did not take long before it was roasting. I ate my supper sitting up feeling the warmth pumping out from the stove. On the bush telegraph this evening I have not heard from Pierre but with both his bindings damaged but just usable he is pushing for the South Pole on the Polar Plateau now. Poppis and the Finns, the FireAngels, and the ex-marines Al and Dave, are all ahead by a day or 3 and are in better conditions now and all three groups are preparing for the big 1000 metre climb to the Polar Plateau. Theis climb of 1000 metres is over some 150 kilometres, so the gradients are not that steep, but significant. Today had been a nice way to finish off the year.

Day 43. Jan 1. S 86º27.544 W 081º27.525 to S 86º38.000 W 081º37.741. 20 km. 10.5 hrs. 3150 Cal. From my sleeping bag I could hear it was quite windy outside and the tent buffeted a bit. But it was just a mild gale and not anything like a storm and I could not afford a day off.  When I emerged from the tent, having packed everything, I thought “is this wise?”. It was like Ice station Zebra again. If someone had said to me I would do 20 km today I would never have believed them. It was also cold, perhaps minus 15, and the windchill was terrific. I carefully took the tent down using the security painter in case a gust took it from my hands and packed it too and got out the compass. I would have liked to have taken a photo, but it would have been too cold on my fingers, which now look like a clerics rather than a bricklayers, as I lose weight.

With the compass mounted I set off and luckily the wind was almost at my back coming from the NE. I was well covered up. The Shackleton salopettes, which are amongst my favourite bits of kit, really do a great job in keeping my legs warm and the jacket with the fake fur ruff protect my top half face beautifully. The terrain was still sandy snow like caster sugar. The skis would not keep a straight line or stay that level and my boots and ankles were twisting sideways frequently. However, there were often patches where the snow was firmer, and I could ski here and was delighted how well the pulk was on this firmer snow. I decided to go for four 5 km sessions and by the time I reached the first the wind had eased from a force 6 to a 4. It was still bitter in it.

On the second, third, and fourth sessions the snow got progressively firmer, and the skiing was much easier. I had to put the “Cold Avenger” face-mask on as the sunburn on my lips was being affected by the cold. It too is another favourite bit of kit. I suddenly saw my blurry shadow and looked round and there was the haze hidden sun behind a thin layer of cloud. It came and went all day except in the morning, when it was a total white out, the visibility remained tolerable. I climbed steadily all day and barely noticed it and by the time I reached 20 km I had climbed to 1900 metres over sea level. Which partly explains the bitter cold. I still have another 1000 metres to climb over the next 10 days or so to reach the Polar Plateau.

It is almost habit now, but it is amazing to just stop at a random spot on this vast ice sheet take out the tent and put it up and then some 20 minutes later I am sitting with my legs in a hole while the stove is melting snow. Then I retire into the inner tent, which is my home, and the bitter cold of the outside is soon forgotten. After my scheduled call to ALE at 2100 hours I write the blog and send it to my friend, Ruth, to proofread and publish. The day has a rigid structure and routine and without that I think things would unravel quite quickly.  On the bush telegraph both Pierre and Poppis had equipment failures which they are both hoping to fix. The FireAngels, Bex and George, are now into the middle of the 87th degree where the climbs are steep and the sastrugi of biblical dimensions. Al and Dave, the ex-marines are about 25 km ahead of me and keep sending me words of encouragement which was needed after the last week of poor weather and difficult snow. All in all, it had been an OK day, and I am slowly chipping away at the distance. It is now only 375 km to go, and I still have 17 day’s worth of food left.

Day 44. Jan 02. S 86º38.000 W 081º37.741 to S 86º48.765 W 081º45.469.  21 km. 9.5 hrs. 2450 Cal. Sometime in the early morning the sun must have come out as it was hot in the tent. I was still in my minus 30 sleeping bag so was in effect being slowly roasted. As a result, I did not wake naturally around 0500 but nearer 0600 and I felt a bit groggy, almost hungover. The sun stayed out while I breakfasted, packed, and for the first hour or so of the day. The skiing in the morning was great and it was firm and even. I decided to go for 3 sessions of 7 km each so I would only have two breaks instead of three. Ahead of me I could see a great wave of ice. It looked like a frozen tsunami towering some 50-100 metres above. To get to the base of it there was actually a bit of shallow downhill and then the climb up the wave started. It was 100 metres, and it took about an hour. The climb was on hard snow and even bare ice which was fissured with narrow cracks 1-2 cm wide caused by the buckling of the ice sheet as it slowly flowed down here. The pulk glided beautifully on it and despite going up, felt light. It was so different to the last week when I was in a quagmire of soft white sugary snow which clawed at the pulk. I felt like a fruit fly which had inadvertently landed in the middle of bowl of syrup and after a week of wading through it finally reached the rim of the bowl.

117. The tsunami in the ice sheet which I had to climb to reach the 1900 metre plateau.

Despite the effort of the climb up the tsunami it was nice to have some topography again after a bland flat week. Near the top of the climb, I had my first break just as the forecast clouds and snow were coming in on the bitter NE wind. From my selection of gloves and mitts I had finally found a great solution to this cold for my fingers. I had removed the liners from OR Alti Mitts and this allowed me to use my OR Backstop Sensors inside them. Then I put both into the poggies so in effect I had 3 layers. If I needed to do something dexterous, I could just slip my gloved hand out of the mitt for a minute or five and then reinsert it into the warm mitt lining later.

On the second session the weather deteriorated to just short of a complete white out. However, the surface was even, and I could just plod along. Both the sky and snow were a dull grey but the sky was slightly darker so there was fuzzy horizon. There was little to see on the snow’s surface and any pitfall was only noticed at the last minute, but there were very few. One of the biggest problems skiing in a near whiteout was what to do with the mind. It would not go dormant and passive but just kept churning round and round on usually banal thoughts. Once it started on a chain of negative thoughts It was difficult to turn it around to happy thoughts again. One recurring theme was constantly calculating how much food I had, versus how many kilometres, versus how much time I needed, versus average kilometres per day. “Doing the Math” as people on the Pacific Crest Trail used to say. I think long distance hikers do a lot of it and it is dull. Perhaps that is why they listen to podcasts to have a more structured chain of thought rather than random thoughts in a chaotic chain reaction.

During the third session the whiteout cleared, and it was more like sporadic pockets of snow showers coming through. There was always one horizon which was clear even if the other 3 were blurred. I kept my compass mounted in front of me as without it I was like a moth to the sun. Within the space of 15 seconds, I could inadvertently turn 90 degrees without knowing it. It was only when I looked at the compass again that I realised. I also use my Garmin Fenix watch a lot to navigate. It has the course plotted on it and my position too and I just keep on one or the other. It also tells me how far I have done and much more useful information like whether I am ascending or not. Just as I was approaching the end of the day, I started on another shallow but sustained climb from the shelf or plateau I had been on up to the next level. I only did a part of it when I hit 21 km much earlier in the day than I thought.

118. The tent is up, and the sun is warming it for me to go inside and cook (boil water really) and relax.

I had the tent up and stove on by 1900 just as the sun came out fully to warm the tent. It was a lovely evening for me with some warmth and the clothes, hardly damp with sweat, drying on the rack. I had macaroni for supper for a change as over the last few days I have been rationing the odd portion here and there, especially the lunch time macaroni which is a palaver to prepare in a cold wind. But doing this I have collected an entire day’s worth, so I still have 16 day’s worth; one to finish this degree and 5 for each of the next 3 degrees. A degree is 112 km for those who like to “do the math”. At the scheduled 2100 call to ALE I give my position and then have a small 2-3 minute chat.  Sometimes there is someone from the ALE family of employees there to offer encouragement and support after the call. Tonight, it was Preet Chandri, polar superstar, on the phone to chivvy me along to the Pole. They are a very thoughtful bunch at Union Glacier and indeed the Polar Community in general.

Day 45. Jan 03. S 86º48.765 W 081º45.469 to S 86º57.102 W 081º50.543. 16 km. 8 hrs. 2290 Cal. I could hear it was a nasty day from the comfort of my sleeping bag. It took great discipline to get up because I knew what lay in store. There was yet another weather front coming in and it would mean snow, whiteout, and a cold wind. None the less I had to get something on the scorecard for today. When I went out at 0700 it was as bad as I feared with virtually no visibility, snow and a stream of spindrift flowing like water round a boulder when it hit the tent. There was a large drift on the upwind side of the tent and the snow valances around the tent were buried. Rather than burden myself with something unfeasible I said I would try and do 4 sessions each of 4 kilometres. I thought it was quite manageable. Just as I started, I noticed a tiny air bubble in the compass.

The first session was quite arduous as it continued uphill on the hard snow and drifted snow which was almost dune like. I saw nothing of it nor when I was about to walk into it until I was on it. It was a total white out and all I could see were my skis and the compass on the mount. There was no horizon at all. The trouble with this total white out is you can’t see the change in terrain or the small ridges or dunes and so you can’t plan accordingly, you just stumble into it. So, it took 2 hours to do the first session. My skis slipped on the harder patches and then got bogged down in the small dunes. All I could do was keep moving forward. As an experiment I closed my eyes for a minute and kept skiing. It did not make any difference at all. It was the same with all the sessions today except some had quite benign terrain where I could step forward more confidently. I spent the entire day watching my compass bubble grow until it was about the size of a lentil.

I kept thinking about the weather and why it was like this at the moment. Perhaps it was affected by El Nino, which influenced the Atlantic also, or perhaps it was just a bad run of low pressures in the Southern Ocean and these ones were big enough to encroach onto Antarctica also. If they did then the northeast winds (the equivalent of the northern hemisphere south westerly) would bring in moisture which would be swept inland and condense and fall as precipitation as it rose and the 86th degree is where it rose. Maybe it was a bit like a cloud forest in warmer climes where moisture laden air would rise up in the mountains and condense leaving the mountains above dry and sunny. Maybe that is the case here too where the moisture falls here in the 86th and 87th degree leaving the Polar Plateau dryer and sunnier. Hopefully not as elusive and fictitious as the Sunlit Uplands of Boris Johnson.

119. It takes about an hour at the end of every day to melt and boil some 7 litres of water for the next 24 hours.

As I closed in on my 16 km in the whiteout, I thought that if any normal people had seen me, they would want me sectioned or locked up for my own good. Here was a solo person on a vast glacier in a whiteout with the nearest other people, Al and Dave, some 30 kilometres away. And yet to me now it felt quite normal. It’s what I had been doing for the last 6 weeks and what I would be doing for the next 2. Perhaps I was suffering from a kind of Stockholm Syndrome where I felt some benevolence to my kidnappers. When the weather is good, I thoroughly enjoy it, but this run of snowy and misty weather is beginning to test my patience. However, from the small forecasts I can get on my devices it seems good weather is just round the corner.

I had wanted to make it to the 87th degree but that would have meant another 3 hours skiing and a late finish. So as planned I stopped at 16 km and put the tent up. it was cold here now I was at 2100 metres. It was perhaps minus 18 outside but in the wind, it felt considerably more. There was no sun, so the tent was cold but after melting the snow I brought the stove inside and it quickly warmed the interior and started to dry some of the damp clothing. It had not been a great day, yet I had done 16 km and climbed some 150 metres too apparently although I never noticed it. The bush telegraph was very quiet, and I think everyone had an early finish and then an early bed.

Day 46. Jan 04. S 86º57.102 W 081º50.543 to S 87º08.805 W 082º27.146. 24 km. 11.5 hrs. 3790 Cal. The iridium weather forecast said it would be 5 days of sun from this morning and I could see and feel from inside the tent it had already started. However, it was to be cold, about minus 22, and there would be a force 4-5 wind for the whole period. When I went outside to pack, the sky was perfectly blue, a light azure, but it was cold, very cold. I decided to be ambitious today and go for 4 sessions of 6 km and see if I could make 24 in total. However, the snow was clinging at the pulk. It was if I was dragging it through iron filings, especially the deeper sections. There had been snow on and off for the last 8 days and it had not really settled yet or got a glaze.

The first session was quite easy except for the sluggish snow but it took 3 hours just to do 6 km. I started at about 2100 metres height and climbed frequently over waves of ice as they flow in super slow motion down from the plateau. There was the odd bit of negligible downhill on the south side of the wave before a gentle climb of on average 20 metres or so to the next. Each wave seemed 2 km apart. Going up the wave the wind had generally blown the snow off the firmer fissured ice, so it was much easier than the flatter parts where it settled.

It was so cold my glove system of OR backstop, then the outer shell of the OR Alti Mitt and then the poggie was not really enough. I had something else at the ready which I was keeping for the plateau but thought it wise to use it now. It was the Mountain Equipment Redline Mitt. They were too big for the poggies but the small OR backstop fitted inside them. They were fantastically warm, and I was so pleased I brought them.

It was a delight to be able to see everything again. The cold and the wind were a small sacrifice to pay to be able to appreciate where I was on this vast rolling ice sheet. My mood soared and I was optimistic again. If I could just push hard for these 5 predicted good weather days, I should be through the infamous 87 Degree and almost on to the flatter gentler Polar Plateau.

120. The valley with the dunes of snow in a moonscape before the tsunami of ice beyond which I would climb

At the third break it was just too windy, and I would have got too cold preparing my drink. I thought it was getting on also and it would be better to do just another 4 km in which case I could skip the hot chocolate drink, which I did. A bit further on I came over another wave and could see a great frozen tsunami rearing up ahead. It was the slope up to the 2200 metres contour line. Unfortunately, my 4 km would take me halfway up it but, that was acceptable I thought. However, there was a small valley of ice between it and the wave I was on. I had a nice 5-10 minute downhill run and sometimes had to ski fast so the pulk would not catch me up and bash into my legs. The valley was quiet and sunny with little wind and in hindsight I should have stopped here. It had some strange snow formations which I had heard ALE refer to as dunes. I previously dismissed it as perhaps a mis translation between American and British English, but I was wrong. There were actual dunes of snow some 2-3 metres high. I wove a path through them and then started climbing the tsunami up to the 2200 metre contour. It was OK in the sunlight but would have been a nightmare in a whiteout. There was sastrugi everywhere, however it was quite small and between the sastrugi were smooth hard sheets of bare snow which was almost ice. I carried on up with the wind getting up to a force 4, then a 5, and finally a 6. I did my 22 km but there was nowhere to camp, so I went on, and on, and on and there was still nowhere. As I climbed, I was drawn like a moth to the west as it was easier. I had to veer this way anyway so did not fight it. But I could not find anywhere, and the wind was not abating as it often does with catabatic winds as you climb. Eventually at nearly 2000 I decided I’d just have to camp here in the flow of spindrift which was flowing down from above. I found a section which had settled spindrift on the bare ice as I needed to use my skis at tent pegs in this wind.

It took me nearly an hour to put the tent up as I had to be neurotic about not losing anything to the wind. I certainly could not catch it again and I doubt Usain Bolt would have been able to. A super Redline mitt or a tent bag would have soon been swept away. However, at last it was all up using the 4 skis and all the pegs bar two which I kept to anchor the pulk drag line. Then began my favourite part of the day to light the stove and derobe after a good day. I was however shocked at the amount of ice around my face, balaclava, buff, and the cold avenger breathing mask. They were all frozen together and then also into my small beard. I had only just started to boil the kettle when I had to make the phone call for the scheduled check in which was one of the reasons I had to camp because the phone was packed and operating it in the cold wind was not that feasible. If I missed that phone call alarm bells would start to ring, and people would be initially concerned and then start to take action. As it happened, I did do the 24 km I set out to do but it had thrown my evening routine out of the window and instead of sleeping at 2200 it was midnight. Even at midnight the sun continued to warm the tent, but the force 5 wind cooled it.

Day 47. Jan 05. S 87º08.805 W 082º27.146 to S 87º18.649 W 083º28.926. 20 km. 9.5 hrs. 3160 Cal. It remained windy all night although it dropped from force 6 to force 4 in the morning. A huge pile of snow had drifted in the lee of the tent, and I almost had to dig my way out. I was both physically and mentally tired after yesterday’s late finish and I felt it in the first steps. I decided to go for 4 times 5 km today. The next waypoint was about 40 km to the south and it was called SkiSP West 2014. However, to the east of this was a crevassed area and this waypoint was the most easterly we could go, we should stay west from it. I also had information from the most experienced Norwegian Expedition organiser of the last 25 years that it was far better to go much further west to W080?30.000. That way the climbs were not so steep and the sastrugi was smaller and you were well away from and potential crevasses. So, I decided to veer west to this waypoint, which was some 8 km west of SkiSP West 2014, and then come back east again and join the ALE route some 30-40 km to the south. So as soon as I left camp, I started to navigate towards this alternative waypoint still some 40 km away.

121. The tent was covered in a large drift in the morning which I had to dig my way out of.

Initially I had to continue to climb. It was not too bad as the winds had swept much of the loose snow and spindrift off this area leaving hard snow. The ski skins adhered to it but the pulk runner glided nicely over it making it easy work for me. It was cold, still minus 20, and the wind chill was significant, but I was well covered up. The main thing was it was bright and sunny and the windchill was a small price to pay to be able to see the snow and ice and the wind carved formations. The sastrugi was quite minimal really and at the top of the gentle climb, at around 2200m, it disappeared. Instead, what I got was flat fields of firmer snow which was compacting and between these areas of looser softer snow which the pulk sank into a little. Both seemed to adhere to the pulk but more so the latter.

And it continued like this throughout the day with undulations and gentle climbs. In all I went from about 2200 metres to 2300 metres which seems to be the way of things at the moment. The only real issues were doing intricate tasks like preparing lunch or tent work where dexterity was needed, and I could not use the mitts. The cold was overpowering and would chill a bare hand very quickly. It was also a nuisance with the breathing mask. The vapour in my breath condensed outside it and ran to the apron under the breathing aperture and froze. It froze my breathing mask to my balaclava and then froze the balaclava to my nearly 2 cm long beard and jacket zip. At the end of the day, I had to prise it all apart. It was certainly a novel way to shave, a bit like waxing.

122. The condensed breath from my breathing mask quickly froze into a clump of mask, balaclava and beard in these cold temperatures.

As the day wore on and I had my breaks in the sun with the bitter wind to my back the force of the wind dropped so rather than a horizontal cascade of spindrift like last night there were just some wispy tendrils of it, usually down wind of sastrugi formations. I found a place to camp as soon as the 20 km mark came up and put the tent up without the stress of a near gale. It was sunny and after the tent was up but before I brought my stuff in, I dug a hole in the vestibule for my feet. As I dug, I could fell the warmth in the tent and it pleased me I would have a warm evening to dry out the stuff, especially the face mask and goretex shell.

There was not much chat on the garmin messenger bush telegraph other than that Pierre had just 40 km to go and was within touching distance of becoming the youngest person to ski to the South Pole. His anticipated success is a great victory for him as he had a fuel shortage and broken and failing bindings. Poppis and the Finns are doing well and were saying it is twice as cold in Finland with temperature of minus 44.4. If there is one people that can look after themselves in the cold, it is the Finns. The FireAngels are on the plateau some 5 days ahead of me and Al and Dave I assume are 2 days ahead.

Day 48. Jan 06. S 87º18.649 W 083º28.926 to S 87º29.236 W 084º24.713. 21 km. 10.5 hrs. 3150 Cal. It was windy and even colder in the morning. minus 22 with a force 4 wind. I put everything on before I went out. It was fiendishly cold, probably the coldest I have ever experienced. I have camped in minus 41 in Sweden but when it is so cold in Scandinavia it is calm. I had the redline mitts on and I was not taking them off even for a photo. I set off at 0700 and aimed to be at a waypoint 22 km away by evening so split the day into 4 times 5 km.

The skiing was quite rough and the snow abrasive, but I ploughed up the first hill gaining some 40 metres to reach the first stop. I was hermetically sealed from the cold but eating and drinking were vulnerable times. The drink I mixed up at breakfast was already in its Nalgene bottle but as I tried to drink it it turned to a slush puppy before my eyes. The bottom 3 cm froze before I could drink it.

At the next break I decided it was too much palaver to make the Macaroni and Cheese. I would get sore fingers at the best and frostbite at the worst. I had the hot chocolate drinks and that was energy enough. The Macaroni can go towards an extra day’s food I was slowly collecting.

The third and fourth session were long. I did not notice it, but my balaclava was over my mouth and all the condensate was running down it onto my 4 chest layers soaking them. A km short of the waypoint I had done 21 km and was exhausted so threw in the towel at the top of a climb to reach 2400 metres. It took a while to put the tent up in the force 5 but by 1930 hrs I was ensconced in a sunny tent. Unfortunately, the wind did not allow for a heat to build up. I did the fortnightly refilling of the 3 litre fuel bottles which should see my out and I still had another 2 litres in reserve.

I was very tired, hence the short blog, but I have 3 more days anticipated good weather and want to get to the Polar Plateau in that time. It means 20-24 km per day for the next 3. It would be a nightmare going through this terrain in a whiteout but a joy in these conditions when you can see. Pierre, against all the odds, is camped 11 km from the pole and will become the youngest to ski to the Pole unsupported. He is just 26.

Day 49. Jan 07. S 87º29.236 W 084º24.713 to 87º38.617 W 083º30.219. 19 km. 10 hrs. 2720 Cal. I knew what was in store today and indeed the next 3 days. It was to continue up the undulating wavy ice gaining about 100 metres per day. If I did 20-22 km each day, I should finish with the infamous 87th degree in 3 days. The weather forecast looked promising except maybe for the last day. However, it remained cold at about minus 22 and the wind was a force 4 on average. It would make everything significantly more challenging and slower as I had to do things with mitts on rather than gloves.

The slope up to the Polar Plateau and the 88th degree was not a steady gradient at all. It had the same profile as a wavy water slide at theme park with mostly downhill sections but some flat or even uphill sections. To me it was the opposite I would climb what looked like a frozen tsunami for 30-40 metres but then on reaching the top of the slope I might have to go down 10-20 metres in elevation over the course of 3-4 km on a flatter section before the next tsunami of 30-40 metres. This has been the trend for the last 200 km really and also often before Thiel Fuel Cache. I don’t know what causes these waves. It is far too regular to be the underlying topography of the bedrock hundreds, if not thousands, of metres below. It must either be explained by the laws of fluid dynamics, for glaciers are slow fluids really, or it must be wind stripping snow continuously from one area and dumping in another to the extent that it builds up to tens of metres in depth. I probably favour the fluid dynamics speculation.

Where the climb is up the face of the tsunami the snow surface is generally quite rough with patches of sastrugi and also glazed and polished plates of neve snow. At the bottom of the slope are dunes and the biggest sastrugi where the catabatic winds coming down the slope are at their strongest. I think first a dune forms and it can be 2 metres high. The dune then hardens and gets glazed by the sun and wind. Then a strong wind will tear down the mountain in a storm and find a chink in the dune which then allows it to start carving it into sastrugi until the whole structure is razed. Between the wave and the bottom of the next slope is the step or self in this vast icefield and this flatter area is a moonscape of structures and blocks like the bottom of the slopes but smaller. There are also beds of loose snow here and it can be hard work pulling the pulk across their abrasive surface.

123. The moonscape of dunes, sastrugi and other wind carved formations on the flatter sections between waves.

I split the day into 3 seven-kilometre sessions as preparing lunch was out of the question in this cold wind. My breaks were a litre of drinking chocolate and an energy bar, and I would have only 2 each about 3 hours apart. The macaroni was carried forwards and over the last 3 days I have accumulated another whole day’s supply. So, I now have 12 days food left and my end date can be pushed back to the 19th. I hope 2 days will finish this degree and then have 5 for each of the last two degrees. In essence starving myself a little to build a supply is a way of keeping the daily average sustainable.

I reached the waypoint to avoid the crevassed area to the east after just a km and then took a new bearing to return to the original route some 25 km to the south. I had come some 7 km to the west of the route, but it had not cost me more than a km or two as the angle away from and back to the route were very small, and it was worth it just not to worry about crevasses. Once I turned, I went over a couple of waves and across large flat areas with slightly sticky snow. It was the snow and spindrift which fell last week but it has now begun to harden and glaze with the sun and wind and it was much easier. At the end of each session I was tired, dog tired, and could not wait for the nourishment. These were hard relentless days, but I had to make the most of the good weather. However, at the last session I ran out of steam and called it a day after just 5 km into the 7 km session.

It was now only a force 3 and the spindrift was barely moving. The sun was of course out and strong. I put the tent up quite quickly and then went inside to take off all my cold protection gear. Over the last days my biggest problem was the build-up of ice around the breathing mask. Yesterday as it built up it also thawed against my chin and throat and soaked my clothing as it ran down my chest. Today I tried the mask outside the jacket. It kept my chest dry, but the mask and jacket were frozen together, and it took ages to prise them apart. Because of the lack of wind, the tent got quite warm, and everything dried well. There was also no spindrift landing on the tent which in effect prevented solar gain. All in all, it had been a great day.

124. Today’s ice build-up entombed the zip to my jacket and it took a cautious while to prise apart.

On the bush telegraph Pierre announced that against all the odds he had reached the South Pole after 47 or 48 days. The youngest ever to do so. With his integrity, courage and brains Pierre will go a very long way in life. Al and Dave, the ex-marines are about a day and a half in front of me and racing to get to their food cache. Poppis the same. The unsupported Fire Angels, Bex and George, are efficiently clocking up the miles very professionally and are almost in the final degree.

Day 50. Jan 08. S 87º38.617 W 083º30.219 to 87º48.596 W 083º01.267. 20 km. 10 hrs. 2730 Cal. It was a lovely day and the wind which had been a constant menace over the last few days was a bit diminished. However far to the NW I saw some clouds on the horizon and from the forecast I knew they were coming this way. It seems there is a weather system coming my way and that can only mean whiteouts and that make me anxious as there will be no visibility or no heat in the tent in the evening to dry things other than precious cooking fuel.

I split the day into 3 time 7 kilometres as it was too much palaver to rehydrate the macaroni and it was another if I run out of food at the end. The breaks were just hot chocolate and an energy bar. The first session was getting back onto the main route after the diversion to the west to avoid a potential crevassed area. It was a nice ski, and I was delighted that the snow was hardening up and the sheets where spindrift had laid now had a crust and the pulk slid beautifully over them. I had to weave between dunes, about a metre high, and sastrugi, I suppose also a metre high but the way the dunes and sastrugi were aligned were exactly the direction I was going so I could just follow the hardened shallow groves between them, and I made quick time. and did the first 7 km in 3 hours. Meanwhile the clouds kept getting closer.

The second session was pretty much the same except the terrain got gentler and there were few dunes or formations. The surface was firm, and it was easy to pull the pulk. Somewhere early on, perhaps even in the first session, I crossed the 2500 metre contour line. I could feel the air a bit thinner, but it had been a very gradual acclimatisation, so it was not a shock but occasionally after a strenuous bit I gasped for breath. Not long after there was a depression of about 40 metres deep and 5 kilometres long and 2-3 wide. I could not work out what might cause such a depression in a glacier. As glaciers are slowly flowing, I would have thought this depression would have filled in over time. But there must have been other factors keeping it as a depression like a shallow reservoir which had been drained.

My biggest problem was the Cold Avenger breathing mask. It produced a lot of water from my breath, and it had to go somewhere. It either fell out as droplets or dripped onto the growing mass of ice under the mask. I wore it outside my jacket hood otherwise it would soak my neck and chest area. Outside the hood worked well until I wanted to eat. Then I had to undo it behind the hood and use the jacket front as a hinge and the two were frozen together.

On the third session the clouds began to cover the sky and the day, and my happiness, began to shut down and the snow withdrew its luminosity, and it was replaced by a dull, one-dimensional white sheet. Fortuitously I came across some tracks. I think they were from the Fire Angels, Bex and George, 5 days ago. I followed them a bit but, in this light, they were impossible to see, and I lost them in the whiteout. I got my compass out and started following a bearing for a couple of km. The terrain was very benign and there was nothing lumpy to trip me up. With a km to go it all went wrong. I knocked the compass with a ski pole, and it jumped out of its holder. It was a tricky job to get it back in and I had to take the mitts off, and my gloved hands got cold. Then while I was flustered sorting the compass out my goggles steamed up and the steam froze. There was too much going on, so I decided to camp right there. I had the tent up quickly and went in, but it was cold inside without the sun. After melting the water, I had to bring the stove inside and it quickly warmed the inner sanctum and dried the clothes. It is not without risk though so I had to keep vigilant nothing could fall onto it or touch it.

The weather forecast for the next few days is poor and that left me in a bit of despair. I think I am more susceptible than most to whiteouts and the lack of visibility. I feel completely helpless as I shuffle forward in them with nothing visible. Perhaps others can see a bit more than me and certainly in groups you have other people to help judge perspective but on your own it is quite isolating and vulnerable, and I am dreading the next day if there is sastrugi about. On the bush telegraph the others have said there is not much though. Poppis and the Finns have reached their food resupply and will be having a slap-up meal in a warm tent and then will sleep it off tomorrow as they rest. Such are the joys of supported expeditions as opposed to the hardship of unsupported ones.

Day 51. Jan 09. S 87º48.596 W 083º01.267 to S 87º57.940 W 083º05.636. 18 km. 10 hrs. 2920 Cal. I did not sleep well as I was anxious about the weather and it holding me up. It seemed better weather up on the plateau. However, when I woke at 0300 the sun was out, and it was partially cloudy. I decided to go for it, and after the usual morning routines, I was off before 0600. The snow was now quite hard and my pulk was noticeably light and I made good time for about an hour before some scattered snow showers came through. They were the advance party and pretty soon they merged, and the horizon disappeared, and the whiteout set in. I had planned 3 times 7 km to take me to the milestone of the 88th degree 21 km away to the south. It was the end of this crux and infamous section.

When the white out arrived I just carried on skiing but at a slightly slower pace. The terrain was still pretty even but 3 times a small ridge caught me unaware and I fell over. I was quite comfortable skiing on this in the white. I was loathe to stop and have my snack and drink as I knew I would get cold, especially my fingers and I did 8 km before I decided one more km and then I will stop. However, in that 1 km I ran into some large dunes which looked to be about 2 metres high although I could not really see them. What I could see is some of the eroded faces and deep groves around them and they looked treacherous to ski off or slide into. I therefore had to proceed very slowly probing my way. Luckily, they only lasted for about half a kilometre, but it took over an hour to pass through them.

After the quick cold break, I began to climb a slope. The snow covering on it was perfect with sheets of glazed snow. The ski pole’s tips squeaked as I twisted them when I walked and the pulk, usually grinding or screeching behind me fell silent. I guess a lot of the spindrift does not settle here but carries on down to the bottom to form new dunes. I climbed nearly 100 metres from the 2500 contour to the 2600 contour but hardly noticed it on this superb surface. I kept looking round to see if there was any hint of light to the west where the weather was coming from but there was none, and this whiteout looked set for the day. As long as I did not any large sastrugi I should be OK if I continued cautiously and patiently like this. However, there was no joy at all to a whiteout and I relied on my compass and wind ribbon to navigate by. If I relied on instinct I would be going round in circles.

125. Tools of the trade in a whiteout. The compass mounted at eye level and the wind direction ribbon on the ski pole.

After the second break my intention was to do another 7 km, but I ran out of steam again and the terrain became quite lumpy. I could not see but it just stumbled into it. I fell twice again, probably partly due to exhaustion and disorientation. I had been staring at the compass and the unseen ground ahead of me for 8-9 hours now. So, I decided to throw in the towel at 18 km. It does not sound much but they were hard won.  It was also a victory for me to confront the anxiety of a whiteout and come out on top. I dare say if there was a lot of sastrugi I would not have fared so well.

At 18 km on the dot, I stopped and pitched the tent on what seemed a flat bit of snow. I set up my travelling home and moved in to start boiling. It was very cold outside, perhaps even minus 25, and the tent was not much warmer until the stove got going which raised it to zero. It was not the same as the sun and there would be none of that tonight. It was going to be cold. However just as I was packing up the kitchen, I noticed a shadow and looked out to see the sun. I could feel its warmth through the nylon flysheet. It would make all the difference. I was still some 4 km shy of the 88th degree but I was delighted with what I had done. I retreated to the inner sanctum, surrounded myself with feathers and ate my delicious fish and potato stew. I was quite early, and it was nice to get the blog out of the way before the scheduled 2100 hrs phone call to ALE to let them know all is well and I am still alive.

Back